
Glass. 
Book. 



RUDIMENTS 



LATIN TONGUE: 



A PLAIN AND EASY INTROD UCTION 



LATIN GRAMMAR; 



THE PRINCIPLES OF THE LANGUAGE ARE METHODICALLY DIGESTED, 
BOTH IN ENGLISH AND LATIN. 

WITH 

USEFUL NOTES AND OBSERVATIONS, 

Explaining the Terms of Grammar, and farther improving its Rules, 



BY THOMAS RUDDIMAN, A.M. 



©tereotj^e Virion. 



EDINBURGH: 

Printed at the University Press, 
TOR BELL & BRADFUTE, AND STIRLING & KENNEY, 
EDINBURGH ; AND WHITTAKER & CO., JAMES 
DUNCAN, AND SIMPKIN & MARSHALL, LONDON. 

1832. 



<b 



K 



-?&V:v 



*> 



F546 




PREFACE, 



Among the several instructors of Youth in this Nation, 
n many have for a long time complained, that the two Ru- 
diments of the Latin Tongue, commonly taught in our 
' Schools, are many ways insufficient in respect to the end 
proposed by them : That the one is written wholly in La- 
tin, the very Language it is designed to teach ; that the 
other is defective, particularly in the Syntax ; and that 
the Rules of both are often obscure and intricate, and 
sometimes false and erroneous. Whereupon some know- 
ing Masters of that profession, by their repeated solicita- 
tions, prevailed with me to undertake the compiling of a 
new Rudiments, which they conceived might, in a great 
measure, be freed from the faults and defects of the for- 
mer, and so contrived as to bring down its Rules to the 
level of a boy's capacity, and make them enter with 
more ease and familiarity into his mind. This is the end 
I had in view : With what success it has been prosecuted, 
is a province for others, not me, to determine. However, 
if any thing inclines me to hope its acceptance in the 
world, it is owing to the kind assistance I have had, from 
time to time, of the above mentioned and other gentle- 
men, as the duty of their respective employments would 
permit them. What discouraged me most in this under- 
taking, was the different opinions of Grammarians, with 
the sharp contests and disputes they have had about the 
method of Instruction, and the most proper way to com- 
municate the Latin Tongue to others with the greatest 
facility and expedition. It would be almost an endless 

As 



Vi PREFACE. 

task to reckon up the various Schemes that have been 
projected for that purpose ; therefore I shall engage no 
farther in tins subject, than as it seems necessary to give 
my Reader a clear and distinct view of the reasons that 
determined me to the method I have followed. 

I have long observed that those of our country whose 
business it is to direct the studies of Youth, are greatly 
divided about what an Introduction to Latin Grammar 
ought properly to contain, and in what Language ks pre- 
cepts should be conveyed. Some are for contracting it 
into as narrow limits as is possible, and not to burden the 
memory of the learner with any thing but what is essen- 
tial and absolutely necessary ; while others contend that 
this is too general, and not sufficient to direct his practice, 
without the addition of more particular rules. Again, 
though the greater part incline to have the first principles 
of Grammar communicated in a known language, there 
are not a few, and of these some persons of distinction, 
who are still for retaining them in Latin, which, though 
attended at first with more difficulty, makes (in their judg- 
ment) a more lasting impression on the mind, and carries 
the learner more directly to the habit of speaking Latin, a 
practice much used in our Schools. It appeared next to an 
impossibility to satisfy so many different opinions : How- 
ever, the method I have taken seems to bid fairest for it ; 
for I have reduced the substance of these Rudiments into 
a sort of Text, and have given the Latin an English Ver- 
sion, leaving the Master to his own choice and discretion 
which to use. And, that none may complain that the 
Text is too compendious, I have subjoined large Notes, 
which I humbly conceive will supply that defect. 

To render my design of more general use, I was obliged 
to fall in with this expedient, which has produced one in- 



PREFACE. 

convenience, namely, that the Book is thereby swelled 
to a much greater bulk than I could have wished, or some 
perhaps will excuse ; though the reasons are so obvious 
that it is needless to relate them. I confess I have been 
larger in the Notes than the nature of a Rudiments seemed 
to require ; but as I presume there is nothing in them but 
what may be useful either to Master or Scholar, and since 
it was never my intention that they should be all taught, 
or any of them, with the same care as the Essential Parts, 
I thought they might the more easily be dispensed with. 
There is one thing more which has considerably increased 
them, viz. the Remarks I have added on English Nouns, 
Pronouns, and Verbs, which I judged useful on a double 
account ; 1 . As they serve to illustrate Latin Grammar, 
the first notions and impressions whereof we r&ceive from 
the language we ourselves speak : 2. Because the greater 
number of those who are taught the Latin Tongue reap 
little other benefit from it, than as it enables them to speak 
and write English with the greater exactness, I supposed 
it would not be amiss to throw in something in order to 
that end. 

Having thus given a general plan of my undertaking, all 
I shall say of the particular management of it is, that I 
have laboured all along to render every thing as plain and 
easy as I possibly could, considering with a tender regard, 
for whose benefit it is designed. I have consulted the best 
Grammarians, both ancient and modern, and have bor- 
rowed from them whatever I conceived fit for my purpose ; 
though, not contenting myself with their bare authority, I 
frequently had recourse to the fountain itself, I mean, the 
purest writers of the Latin Tongue. As thus I have been 
solicitous to avoid error, so I have been cautious not to 
incur the censure of having affected novelty, and therefore 

A4 



Vlll PREFACE. 

have reseded no farther from the common Systems than I 
think they have receded from truth ; retaining the usual 
Terms of Art, which have so long obtained in the Schools, 
though sometimes I have taken the liberty, as I saw occa- 
sion for it, to explain them in my own way. That I might 
lay no more weight on the memories of children than they 
could well bear, I have reduced the Rules to as small a 
number as the subject would allow of, and conceived them 
in as few words as was consistent with perspicuity ; leaving 
it to the industry of the Teacher to explain them more 
fully, as he shall find necessary, without which no Rules 
can be sufficient. The Syntax is indeed longer than was 
to be wished ; but I frankly own that I do not see how it 
can be made much shorter, without either confounding its 
order, or leaving out the Elliptical Rules. However, to 
remove the objection as much as I could, I have subjoined 
a more compendious Syntax, consisting only of a few 
Fundamental Rules, which may be taught alone, or before 
the other, as the judgment and discretion of the Master 
shall direct him. 



THE 



RUDIMENTS 



OF THE 



LATIN TONGUE; 



A PLAIN AND EASY INTRODUCTION 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



PARS PRIMA. 

DE LITERIS ET SYLLABIS. 

QMagister. 
UOT sunt Literae apud La- 
tinos'? 

Discipulus. Quinque et vi- 
ginti ; a, b, c, d, e, f, g, h, i, j 9 
k,l,m 9 n, o,p, q, r, s, t, u 9 v, 

*> y> *• 

M. Quomodo (ttvidunjur? 
D. In Vocales et Conso- 
nantes. 

M. Quot sunt Vocales ? 

Z). Sex ; a y e, i, o, u 9 y. 



PART t 

OF LETTERS AND SYLLABLES. 

YY Master. 

JUL o w many Letters are there 
among the Latins ? 

Scholar. Five and twenty ; 
a, b, c, d, e, f, g, h, i, j, k, 1, 
m, n, o, p, q, r, s, t, u, v, x, 

M. How are they divided f 

S. Into Vowels and Conso- 
nants. 

M. How many Vowels are 
there ? 

S. Six ; a, e, i, o, u, y. 
As 



10 Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 

M. Quot sunt-Consonantes-? 

D. Novemdecim ; h, c, d, f 9 
g, K j, &> h ™* n> P> q, r> s, t, 
v, x, z. 

M. Quot sunt Diphthbngi ?* 

D. Quinque ; ae vel ce, oe 
vel oe, au, eu, ei : ut, aetas, 
vel cetas, 'poena velpceiia, audio, 
euge, hei. 



M. How many Consonants 
are there? 

S. Nineteen; b, c, d, f, g, 
K h K 1, m, n, p, q, r, s, t, 
v, x, z. 

M. Hoio many Diphthongs 
are there? 

S. Five ; ae or ae, oe or oe, 
au, eu, ei : as, aetas or aetas, 
poena or poena, audio, euge, 
hei. 



NOTES. 

GRAMMAR is the art of speaking any Language rightly ; as, He- 
brew, Greek, Latin, English, &c. 

Latin Grammar is the art of speaking rightly the Latin Tongue. 

The R UDIMENTS of that Grammar are plain and easy instructions, 
teaching beginners the first principles, or the most common and necessary 
rules of Latin. 

The Rudiments mav be reduced to these four heads : I. Treating of 
Letters. II. Of Syllables. III. Of Words. IV. Of Sentences. 

These are naturally made up one of another ; for one or more Letters 
make a Syllable, one or more Syllables make a Word, and two or more 
Words make a Sentence. 

A Letter is a mark or character representing an uncompounded sound. 

A" Y, Z, are only to be found in words originally Greek ; and H by 
some is not accounted a letter, but a breathing. 

We reckon the J", called Jod, or Je, and the V, called Vau, two let- 
ters distinct from / and U; because not only their figures, but their 
powers or sounds are quite different ; J sounding like G before E, and 
V almost like F. 

A Vowel is a letter that makes a full and perfect sound by itself. 

A Consonant is a letter that cannot sound without a Vowel. 

A Syllable is any one complete sound. 

There can be no Syllable without a Vowel : And any of the six Vowels 
alone, or any Vowel with one or more Consonants before or after it 
makes a Syllable. 

There are for the most part as many Syllables in a Word as there are 
Vowels in it : only, there are two kinds of Syllables in which it is other- 
wise, viz. 1. When Z7with any other Vowel comes after G, Q, or S ; as 
in Lingua,, Qui, Suadeo ; where the sound of the U vanishes, or is little 
heard. 2. When two Vowels join to make a Diphthong or double Vowel. 

A Diphthong is a sound compounded of the sounds of two Vowels, so 
as both of them are heard. 

Of Diphthongs three are proper, viz. au 3 eu, ei, in which both Vowels 
are heard ; and two improper, viz. ce, ce, in which the a and o are not 
heard, but they are pronounced as e simple. 

Some, not without reason, to these five Diphthongs add other three ; 
as, at in Maia, oi m Troia, yi or ui, in Harpyia, or Harpuia. 



Part IL 
PARS SECUNDA. 

DE DICTIONIBUS. 

M. Quot sunt. Partes Ora* 
tionis.? ' 

D. ' Octo ; Nomen, Prono- 
men, Verbum, Participium ; 
Adverbium, Praepositio, Inter- 
jectio, Conjunction 

M. Quoniodo dividuntur ? 

D. In Declinabiles et Inde- 
clinabiles. 

M. Quot .sunL-DeclinabiLes ? 

D. Quatuor ; Nomen, Pro- 
nomen, Verbum, Participium, 

M. Quot sunt jin declinable 
les? 

D. Item quatuor; Adver- 
bium, Praepositio, Interjectio, 
Conjunctio. 



Of Words. 1 1 

PART SECOND, 

OF WORDS. 

M. How many Parts of 
Speech are there? 

S. Eight ; Noun, Pronoun, 
Verb, Participle ; Adverb, 
Preposition, Interjection, Con- 
junction. 

M. How are they divided ? 

S. Into Declinable and Inde- 
clinable. 

M. How many- are Declin- 
able? 

S. Four ; Noun, Pronoun, 
Verb, Participle. 

M. How many are Indeclin- 
able f 

S. Likewise four ; Advert} 
Preposition, Interjection, Con 
junction. 



A Word, Vox or dictio, is one or more Syllables joined together, which 
men have agreed upon to signify something. 

Words are commonly reduced to eight Classes, called Parts of Speech : 
but some comprise them all under three Classes, viz. Noun, Verb, and 
Adverb. Under Noun, they comprehend also Pronoun and Participle ; 
and under Adverb, also Preposition, Interjection, and Conjunction. 
Others to these add a fourth Class, viz. Adnoun, comprehending Ad- 
jectives under it, and restricting Nouns to Substantives only. These by 
some are otherwise called Names, Qualities, Affirmations, and Particles. 

The declinable parts of Speech are so called, because there is some 
change made upon them, especially in their last Syllables : And this is 
what we call Declension, or declining of Words. But the indeclinable 
parts continue unchangeably the same. 

The last Syllable on which these changes do fall, is called the Ending-, 
or Termination of Words. 

These changes are made by \v T hat Grammarians call Accidentia, i. e. 
The Accidents of Words. 

These Accidents are commonly reckoned six, viz. Gender, Case, Num- 
ber ; Mood, Tense, and Person. Of these, Gender and Case are peculiar 
to three of the declinable Parts of Speech, viz. Noun, Pronoun, and 
Participle ; and Mood, Tense, and Person, are peculiar to one of them, 
viz. Verb ; and Number is common to them all. 

Note 1. That Person may also be said to belong to Noun or Pronoun : 
but then it is not properly an Accident, because no change is made by 
it, in the word. 

A 6 



1 2 Rudiments of the Latin Tongue ', 

Note 2. That Figure, Species, and Comparison, which some call 
Accidents, do not properly come under that name, because the words 
have a different signification from what they had before. — See Chap. IX. 

Note 5. That the changes that happen to a Noun, Pronoun, and 
Participle, are, in a stricter sense, called Declension or Declination of 
them ; and the changes that happen to a Verb, are called Conjugation. 



CAP. I. 

DE NOMINE. 

M. (x,uomodo decliaatur No- 
men? r 

D. Per Genera, Casus, et 
Numeros. 

M. Quot sunt Genera? 

D. Tria; Mascidinum, Foe- 
mininum, et Neutrum. 

M. Quot sunt Casus ? 

D. Sex; Nominativus, Ge- 
nitivus, Dativus, Accusativus, 
Vocativus, et Ablativus. 

M. Quot sunt Numeri ? 

D. Duo; Singularis et Plu- 
ralis. 

M. Quot sunt Declinatio- 
nes? 

D. Quinque ; Prima, Secun- 
da, Tertia, Quarta, et Quint a. 
REGULAE GENERALES. 

1. Nomina Neutri Generis 
habent Nominativum, Accu- 
sativum, et Vocativum, simi- 
les in utroque Numero: et hi 
Casus, in Plurali, semper desi- 
nunt in a, 

2. Vocativus in Singulari 
plerumque, in Plurali semper, 
est similis Nominativo. 



CHAP. I. 

OF NOUN. 

M. Idow is a Noun declin- 
ed? 

S. By Genders, Cases, and 
Numbers. 

M. How many Genders are 
there ? 

S. Three; Masculine, Fe- 
minine, and Neuter. 

M. How many Cases are there? 

S. Six; Nominative, Geni- 
tive, Dative, Accusative, Vo- 
cative, and Ablative. 

M. How many Numbers are 
there ? 

S. Tivo ; Singular and Plu- 
ral. 

M. How many Declensions 
are there? 

S. Five; First, Second, 
Third, Fourth, and Fifth. 
GENERAL RULES. 

1. Nouns of the Neuter Gen- 
der have the Nominative, Accu- 
sative, and Vocative, alike in 
both Numbers : And these Cases 
in the Plural end always in a. 

2. The Vocative for the most 
part in the Singular, and al- 
ways in the Plural, is like the 
Nominative. 






Part II.— Chap. L— Of Noun. 13 

S. Dativus et Ablativus j 3. The Dative and Ablative 

Pluralis sunt similes. | Plural are alike. 

4. Nomina Propria plerum- } 4. Proper Names for the 

que carent Plurali. | most part want the plural. 

A NO UN is that Part of Speech which signifies the name or quality 
of a Thing ; as, Homo, a Man ; Sonus, Good. 

A Noun is either Substantive or Adjective. 

A Substantive Noun is that which signifies the name of a Thing ; as, 
Arbor, a Tree ; Virtus, Virtue ; Bonitas, Goodness. 

An Adjective Noun is that which signifies an Accident, Quality, or 
Property of a Thing ; as, Albus, white ; Felix, happy ; Gravis, heavy. 

A Substantive may be distinguished from an Adjective these two 
ways : 1. A Substantive can stand in a Sentence, without an Adjective, 
but an Adjective cannot without a Substantive ; as, I can say, A stone 
falls ; but I cannot say, Heavy falls. 2. If the word Thing be joined with 
an Adjective, it will make sense ; but if it be joined with a Substantive, 
it will make nonsense : Thus we say, A good Thing, A white Thing; but 
we do not say, A Man Thing, A Beast Thing. 

A Substantive Noun is divided into Proper and Appellative. 

A Proper Substantive is that which agrees to one particular thing of 
a kind ; as, Virgilius, a Man's Name; Penelope, a Woman's Name ; Sco- 
tia, Scotland ; Edinburgum, Edinburgh ; Taus, the Tay. 

An Appellative Substantive is that which is common to a whole kind 
of Things ; as, Vir, a. Man ; Femina, a Woman ; Regnum, a Kingdom ; 
Urbs, a City ; Fluvius, a River. 

Note, That, when a Proper Name is applied to many, it becomes an 
Appellative ; as, Duodecim Caesares, the Twelve Caesars. 

GENDER in a natural sense is the distinction of Sex, or the difference 
between Male and Female ; but in a grammatical sense we commonly 
understand by it, the fitness that a Substantive Noun hath to be joined to 
an Adjective, of such a Termination, and not of another. — Therefore, 

Of Names of Animals, the Hees are of the Masculine, and the Shees of 
the Feminine Gender : But of things without life, and where the diver- 
sity of Sex is not considered, even of things that have Life, some are of 
the Masculine, others of the Feminine, and others of the Neuter Gender, 
according to the use of the best Authors of the Latin Tongue. 

Besides these three principal Genders, there are reckoned also other 
three less principal, which are nothing else but Compounds of the three 
former, viz. the Gender common to two, the Gender common to three, 
and the doubtful Gender. 

I. The Common Gender, or Gender common to two, Genus commune, 
or Commune duum, is Masculine and Feminine, and belongs to such 
Nouns as agree to both Sexes ; as, Parens, a Father or Mother ; Bos, an 
Ox or Cow. 

II. The Gender common to three, Genus commune trium, is Masculine, 
Feminine, and Neuter, and belongs only to Adjectives ; whereof some 
have three Terminations, the first Masculine, the second Feminine, and 
the third Neuter ; as, Bonus, bona, bonum, good. Some have two, the first 
Masculine and Feminine, and the second Neuter ; as, Mollis, molle, soft. 



14? Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 

And some have but one Termination, which agrees indifferently to any of 
the three Genders ; as, Prudens, wise. 

III. The Doubtful Gender, Genus dubium, belongs to such Nouns as are 
found in good Authors, sometimes in one Gender, and sometimes in another; 
as, Dies, a Day, Masc. or Fern. ; Vulgus, the Rabble, Masc. or Neut. 

[We have excepted out of the number of Genders the Epicene or Pro- 
miscuous Gender; for, properly speaking, there is no such Gender dis- 
tinct from the three chief ones, or the Doubtful. There are indeed Epi- 
cene Nouns, that is, some names of animals, in which the distinction of 
sex is either not at all, or very obscurely considered : And these are ge- 
nerally of the Gender of their termination ; as, Aquila, an Eagle, Fern, 
because it ends in a; Passer, a Sparrow, Masc. because it ends in er. 
(See p. 16. and 19.) So Homo, a Man or Woman, Masc; Mancipium, 
a Slave, Neut. ; Anguis, a Serpent, Doubtful.] 

To distinguish these Genders, we make use of these three words, Hie, 
haec, hoc ; which are commonly, though improperly, called Articles. Hie 
is the sign of the Masc. haec of the Fern, hoc of the Neuter Gender; 
Hie et haec, of the Common to two ; Hie, haec, hoc, of the Common to 
three; Hie aut haec, hie ant hoc, Sec. of the Doubtful. 

By CASES we understand the different Terminations that Nouns re- 
ceive in declining : So called- from cado, to fall, because they naturally 
fall or flow from the Nominative, which is therefore called Casus rectus, 
the straight case ; as the other five are named Obliqui, crooked. 

The Singular Number denotes one single thing ; as, Homo, a Man : 
The Plural denotes more things than one; as, Homines, Men. 



Before the Learner proceed to the Declension of Latin Nouns, 
it may not perhaps be improper to give him a general view of 
THE DECLENSION OF ENGLISH NOUNS. 

I. The English Language hath the two Genders of Nature, viz. Mas- 
culine and Feminine ; for Animals in it are called HE or SHE, accord- 
ing to the difference of their sex : And almost every thing without life is 
called IT. But because all the Adjectives of this Language are of one 
termination, it has no occasion for any other Genders. 

II. The English, properly speaking, has no cases, because there is no 
alteration made in the words themselves, as in the Latin ; but instead 
thereof we use some little words called PARTICLES. 

Thus, the Nominative Case is the Simple Noun itself: The Particle 
OF put before it, or 's after it, makes the Genitive : TO or FOR before 
it, makes the Dative: The Accusative is the same with the Nominative: 
The Vocative hath before it : And the Ablative hath WITH, FROM, 
IX, BY, &c. 

Note 1. That when a Substantive comes before a Verb, it is called 
the Nominative : When it follows after a. Verb active, without a Preposi- 
tion intervening, it is called the Accusative. 

Note 2. That the Apostrophus, or sign ['], is not used in the Geni- 
tive Plural; as, Mens ivorks, the Apostles Creed. 

Note 5. That TO, the sign of the Dative, and of the Vocative, are 
frequently omitted or understood. 

Besides these, there are other two little words called AR TICLES, which 



Part IL—Chap. L—Of Noun. 1 5 

are commonly put before Substantive Nouns, viz. A, or AN before a 
vowel or H, called the Indefinite Article, and THE called the Definite. 

A or An signifies as much as the Adjective One, and is put for it ; as 
A Man, that is, One Man. The is a Pronoun, and signifies almost the 
same with This or That, and These or Those. 

Note 1. That proper names of men, women, towns, kingdoms, 
and appellatives, when used in a very general sense, have none of these 
articles ; as, Man is mortal, i. e. every man ; God abhors sin, i. e. all sins : 
But proper names of rivers, ships, hills, §c. frequently have The ; as, 
the Thames, the Britannia, the Alps. 

Note 2. That the Vocative has none of these articles, and the Plural 
wants the Indefinite. 

Note o. That when an Adjective is joined with a Substantive, the 
article is put before both ; as, A good Man, the good Man : And the 
Definite is put before the Adjective when the Substantive is understood ; 
as, The just shall live by Faith, i. e. The just Man. 

III. The English hath two Numbers as the Latin, and the Plural is 
commonly made by putting an s to the Singular ; as, Book, Books. 

Exc. 1. Such as end in ch, sh, ss, and x, which have es added to 
their Singular; as, Church-es, Brush-es, Witness-es, Box-es ; where it is 
to be noticed, that such words have a syllable more in the Plural than 
in the Singular Number; which likewise happens to all words ending 
in ce, ge, se, ze ; as, Faces, Ages, Houses, Mazes. The reason of this pro- 
ceeds from the near approach these terminations have in their sound to 
an s, so ttiat their Plural could not be distinguished from their Singular 
without f\he addition of another syllable. And, for the same reason, 
Verbs of these terminations have a syllable added to them in their third 
person sing, of the present tense. 

Exc. 2. Words that end mf, or fe, have their plural in ves ; as, Calf, 
Calves ; Leaf, Leaves ; Wife, Wives : But not always ; for Hoof, Roof, 
Grief, Mischief, Dwarf, Strife, Muff, &c. retain/. Staff has Staves. 

Exc. 3. Some have their plural in en ; as, Man, Men ; Woman, Wo- 
men ; Child, Children ; Chick, Chicken ; Brother, Brothers or Brethren, 
(which last is seldom used but in sermons, or in a burlesque sense.) 

Exc. 4. Some are more irregular ; as, Die, Dice ; Mouse, Mice ; 
Louse, Lice; Goose, Geese; Foot, Feet; Tooth, Teeth; Penny, Pence ; 
Soiv, Soivs, and Swine ; Cow, Cows, and Kine. 

Exc. 5. Some are the same in both Numbers ; as, Sheep, Hose, Swine, 
Chicken, Pease, Deer ; Fish and Fishes, Mile and Miles, Horse and Horses. 

Note, That as Nouns in y do often change y into ie, so these have 
rather ies than ys in the Plural ; as, Cherry, Cherries. 

An English Noun is thus Declined : 

A, The The 

Nom. King,"] TNom. Kings, 

Gen. of King, , j Gen. of Kings, 

Dat. to, for, King, I *§ J Dat to, for, Kings, 

Ace. King, | £ j Ace. Kings, 

Voc. King, ^ Voc. Kings, 

w Abl. with, from, in, by King : J [_Ab\. with, from, in, by, Kings. 



16 



Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 

THE FIRST DECLENSION. 

M. How is the First De» 
clension known ? 

S. By the Genitive and Da- 
tive Singular hi ae Diphthong, 



PRIMA DECLINATIO. 

M. Quomodo dignoscitur 
Prima Declinatio ? 

D. Per Genitivura et Da- 
tivum singular em in ae Diph- 
thongo. 

M. Quot habet Termina- 
tiones ? 

D. Quatuor; a, e, as, es; ut, 



M. How many Terminations 
hath it ? 

S. Four; a, e, as, es; as, 
Penna, Penelope, Aeneas, Anchises. 

Penna, a Pen, Fern. 

Sing. Plur. Terminations. 

Norn, penna, a pen, Nom. pennae, pens, a, ae, 

Gen. pennae, of a pen, Gen. pennarum, of pens, ae, arum, 

Dat. pennae, to a pen, Dot. pennis, to pens, ae, is, 

Ace. pennam, a pen, Ace. pennas, pens, am, as, 

Voc. penna, Open, Voc. pennae, Opens, a, ae, 

Abl. penna, with a pen: AM. pennis, tvithpens. a: is. 

^f After the same manner you may decline Litera, a Let- 
ter; Via, a Way; Galea, an Helmet; Tunica, 2l Coat; To- 
ga, a Gown. 

A is a Latin termination : e, as, and es, are Greek. 

Nouns in a and e are Feminine, in as and es Masculine. 

Rule, Filia, a Daughter ; Nata, a Daughter ; Deo, a Goddess; Ani- 
ma, the Soul, with some others, have more frequently abus than is in 
their 'Dat. and Abl. Plural, to distinguish them from Masculines in us 
of the Second Declension. 

C In declining Greek Nouns, observe the following Rules : 

1. Greek Nouns in as, and a, have sometimes their Accusative, with 
the Poets, in an; as, Aeneas, Aeneam velAenean.; Ossa, Ossam vel Ossan. 

2. Those in es have their Accusative in en, and their Vocative and 
Ablative in e ; as, 

Nom. Anchises, Ace. Anchisen, 

Voc. Anchise, Abl. Anchise. 

5. Nouns in e have their Genitive in es, their Accusative in en, their 
Dative, Vocative, and Ablative in e ; as, 

Nom. Penelope, Gen. Penelopes, 

Dat. Penelope, Ace. Penelopen, . 

Voc. Penelope, 
Abl. Penelope. 
[As to the Dative of words in e, I have followed Probus and Priscian, 
among the ancients ; Lilly, Alvarus, Vossius, Messieurs de Port Royal, 
Johnson, &c. among the moderns. And though none of them cite any 
example, yet I remember to have observed three such Datives, viz. Cy- 



Part II.— Chap. I— Of Noun. 17 

bele in Virg. iEn. XL 768. Penelope in Martial, Epig. XI. 8. 9 : and 
Epigone in Reinesi Syntag. Incript. Class. 14. Num. 85. But Diomedes 
and Despauter seem to be of opinion that these Nouns have ae in their 
Dative. The reason that moved the former is, because they thought it 
incongruous, that seeing Nouns in e generally follow the Greek in all 
their other cases, they should follow the Latin in their Dative only, espe- 
cially since their Ablative, which answers to the Greek Dative, ends in e. 
As, on the contrary, they maintain, that if such Nouns have ae in their 
Dative, it must come from a Nominative in a ; of which there are some 
examples yet extant : And then they may likewise have their Accusative 
in am ; as, Penelopam, Circam, in Plautus ; Lycambam, in Terentianus 
Maurus. Thus, Helenae or Helenes, Helenam or Helenen, are frequently 
to be met with in Poets, who also turn such words as commonly end in a 
into e in the Nominative and Vocative, when the measure of their verse 
requires it. And here it may not be improper to remark, that even Greek 
words in es have sometimes their Nominative and Vocative in a, (whence 
comes their Genitive and Dative in ae : ) And if Mr. Johnson's citations 
are right, both es and e have sometimes their Accusative in em.'] 



SECUNDA DECLINATIO. 

M. Quomodo dignoscitur Se- 
cunda Declinatio ? 

D. Per Genitivum singula- 
rem in i, et Dativum in o. 

M. Quot habet Terminati- 
ones? 

D. Septem; er, ir, «r, us, 
um, os, on; ut, 



THE' SECOND DECLENSION. 

M. Hotv is the Second Declen- 
sion known? 

S. By the Genitive Singular 
in i, and Dative in o. 

M. Hoiu many Terminations 
hath it? 

S. Seven; er, ir, ur, us, urn, 
os, on; as, 



Gener, a Son-in-law; Vir, a Man; Satur, Full; Dominus, 
2l Lord; Regnum, a Kingdom; Synodos, a Synod; Albion, 
the Island Albion, or Great Britain. 



Gener, a Sbn-in-law, Masc. 



Sing. 
Norn, gener, 
Gen. generi, ( 
Dat. genero, 
Ace', generum, 
- Voc. gener, 
All. genero : 



Plur. 
Nom. generi, 
Gen. generorum, 
Dat. generis, 
Ace. generos, 
Voc. generi, 
Abl. generis. 



Terminations. 

er, ir, us, i, 

i, orum, 
o, is, 
um, os, 

er, ir, e, i, 
o: is. 



After the same manner you may decline Puer, a Boy ; Socer, a Father- 
in-law; Vir, a Man, &c. But Liber, a Book; Magister, a Master; Alex- 
ander, a man's name ; and most other Substantives in er, lose the e before 
r .• Thus. Sing. Nom. Liber, Gen. libri, Dat. libro, Ace. librum, Voc. li- 
ber, Abl. libro ; Plur. Nom. libri, Gen. librorum, §c. 



IS Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 

Dominus, a Lord, Masc. 



Sing. 
Nom. dominus, 
Gen. domini, 
Dot. domino, 
Ace, dominum, 
Voc, domine, 
Abl. domino : 



Plur. 
Nom. domini, 
Gen. dominorum, 
Dat, dominis, 
Ace. dominos, 
Voc. domini, 
Abl. dominis. 



Regnum, a Kingdom, Neut. 



Sing. 
Nom. regnum, 
Gen. regni, 
Dat. regno, 
Ace. regnum, 
Voc. regnum, 
Abl. regno : 



Plur. 
Nom. regna, 
Gen. regnorum, 
Dat. regnis, 
Ace. regna, 
Voc. regna, 
Abl. regnis. 



Thus, ' 
Ventus, the Wind. 
O cuius, the Lye. 
Fluvius, a River. 
Puteus, a Well. 
Focus, a common Fire. 
Rogus, aF uncr al Pile. 



Thus, 

Templum, a Church. 
Ingenium, Wit. 
Horreum, a Barn. 
Canticum, a Song. 
Jugum, a Yoke. 



REGULAE. 

I. Nominativus in us facit 
Vocativum in e; ut, Ventus, 
rente. 

II. Propria in his perdunt 
us in Vocativo; ut, Georgius, 
Georgi. 



RULES. 

I. TJie Nominative in us 
makes the Vocative in e ; as, 
Ventus, vente. 

II. Proper names in ius lose 
us in the Vocative ; as, Geor- 
gius, Georgi. 



Filius hath zhofili, and Deus hath Dens, in the Vocative; and 
in the Plural more frequently Dii and Diis, than Dei and Deis. 



The most common terminations of the Second Declension are er and 
us of the Masc. and urn of the Neut. Gender. 

There is only one Noun in ir of this Declension, viz. Vir, a Man, 
with its compounds, Levir, Duumvir, Triumvir, Sec. and only one in ur, 
viz. Satur, full, (of old Saturus) an Adjective. Os and on are Greek ter- 
minations, and generally changed into us and um in their Nominative. 
These, with other Greek Nouns in us, have sometimes their Ace. in on. 

[We have excluded the termination eus from this Declension, as be- 
longing more properly to the Third ; as, Orpheus, Orpheos, Orphei, Or- 
phea, Orpheu : For when it is of the Second Declension, it is e-us of two 
syllables, and so falls under the termination us ; Orpke-us, Orphe-i, (con- 
tracted Orphei and OrphiJ Orphe-o, Orphe-um (or Orphe-on), Orphe-o.'] 



TERTIA DECLINATIO. 

M. Quomodo dignoscitur 
Tertia Declinatio? 



THE THIRD DECLENSION. 

M. How is the Third Declen- 
sion known? 



Part IL—Ckap.L—Of Noun. 



19 

S. By the Genitive Singular 
in is, and Dative in i. 

M. How many Terminations 
or final Syllables hath it? 

S. Seventy and one. 

M. How many final Letters 
hath it ? 

S. Eleven; a, e, o, c, d, 1, 
I n, r, s, t, x; as, 



D. Per Genitivum singula- 
rem in is, et Dativiim in i. 

M. Quot habet Termina- 
tiones seii Syllabas finales ? 

D. Septuaginta et unam. 

M. Quot habet Litems fi- 
nales? 

D. Undecim; a, e, o, c, d, 
I, n, r, s, t, x; ut, 

Diadema, a Crown; Sedile, a Seat; Sermo, s. Speech; Lac, 
Milk; David, a Man's Name; Animal, a living Creature; Pec- 
ten, a Comb; Pater, a Father; Rupes, a Rock; Caput, the 
Head; Bex, a King. 

Sermo, a Speech, Masc. 
Sing. 
Nom. sermo, Norn. 

Gen. sermcTnis, Gen. 

Dat. sermoni, Dat. 

Ace. sermon em, Ace. 
Voc. sermo, Voc. 

AM. sermon e: AM. 



Plnr. 


Terminations. 


sermones, 


a,e,o,&c. es, a, 


sermonum, 


is, um, ium 


sermonibus, 


i, ibus, 


sermones, 


em, es, a, 


sermones, 


a,e,o,&c. es, a, 


sermonibus. 


e,i : ibus. 



Sedile, a Seat, Masc. 



Sing. 
Nom. sedile, 
Gen. sedilis, 
sedili, 
sedile, 
sedile, 
sedili: 



Dat 

Ace. 
Voc. 
AM. 



Plur. 
Nom. sedilia, 
Gen. sedilium, 
sedilibus, 
sedilia, 
sedilia, 
sedilibus. 



Dat. 

Ace. 
Voc. 

AM. 



As Sermo, so most Substantives of 
this Declension in a, o, c, d, n, t, x, 
er, or, ur, as, os, us; (except their Ace. 
and Voc. when they are Neuters, or 
when they want the Plur. Number.) 
Also (when they have more Sylla- 
bles in their Gen. than Nom.) all 
Words in es. and most of those in is. 



Of the final Letters of the Third Declension, six are peculiar to it, o, c, d, 
I, t, x ; the other five are common to other Declensions, viz. a, e, n, r, s. 

The copious final Letters are, o, n, r, s, x. 

The copious final Syllables are, to, do, go, en, er, or, as, es, is, os, us, 
ns, rs, ex. 

All Nouns in a of this Declension are originally Greek, and have al- 
ways an m before it. There are only two words in c ; Lac, Milk ; and 
Halec, a Herring. Words in d are proper names of men, and very rare. 
There are only three words in t, viz. Caput, the Head ; Sinciput, the 
Fore-head; Occiput, the Hind-head. 

1. The Terminations er, or, os, o, n, 

2. The Terminations io, do, go, as, es, is, ys, ous, 

x, and s after a consonant, 
5. The Terminations a, c, e, I, men, ar, nr, us, ut, 
But from these there are many exceptions. 



"} TMasculin 
' >■ are -< Feminine 
it, j ^Neuter. 



20 Rudimetits of the Latin Tongue, 

Note 1. That for the most part the Genitive hath a syllable more than 

the Nominative ; and where it is otherwise they generally end in e, es or is. 
Note 2. That whatever letter or syllable comes before is in the Gen. 

must run through the other Cases, except the Ace. and Voc. Sing, of 

Neuters; as, Thema, -atis, -ati, -ate, a Theme; Sanguis, -guinis, Blood; 

Iter, -tineris, a Journey ; Carmen, -minis, a Verse ; Judex, -dicis, a Judge. 

REGULAE. 
1. Nomina in e, et Neutra 



in al et ar, habent i in Abla- 
tive 

2. Quae habent e tantum in 
Ablativo, faciunt Genitivum 
pluralem in um. 

8. Quae habent i tantum, 
vel e aut i simul, faciunt ium. 

4. Neutra quae habent e in 
Ablativo singulari, habent a in 
Nominativo, Accusativo, et 
Vocativo plurali. 

5. At quae habent i in Ab- 
lativo, faciunt ia. 



R ULES. 
1.- Nouns- in e, and Neuters 
in al and ar, have i in the Abla- 
tive. 

2. Those which have e only 
in the Ablative, make their Ge- 
nitive plural in um. 

3. Those which have i only, 
or e and i together, make ium. 

4. Neuters ivhich have e in 
their Ablative singular have a in 
the Nominative, Accusative, and 
Vocative plural. 

5. But those which have i in 
the Ablative, make ia. 



1. EXCEPTIONS in the Accusative Singular. 

1. Some Nouns in is have im in the Accusative ; as, Vis, vim, Strength ; 
Tussis, the Cough ; Sitis, Thirst ; Buris, the Beam of a Plough ; Ravis, 
Hoarseness; Amussis, a. Mason's Rule. To which add names of Rivers 
in is; as, Tybris, Thamesis, which the Poets sometimes make in in. 

2. Some in is have em or im ; as, Navis, a Ship ; Puppis, the Stern ; 
Securis, an Ax ; Clavis, a Key ; Febris, a Fever ; Pelvis, a Bason ; Res- 
tis, a Rope ; Turris, a Tower ; Navem vel Navim, &c. 

2. EXCEPTIONS in the Ablative Singular. 

1. Nouns which have im in the Accusative, have i in the Ablative; as, 
Vis, vim, vi, &c. These that have em or im have e or i; as, Navis, na- 
vem vel navim, nave vel navi. 

2. Canalis, Vectis, Bipennis, have i : Avis, Amnis, Ignis, Unguis, Rus, 
and Imber, with some others, have e or i, but most commonly e. 

5. These Neuters in ar have e; Far, Jubar, Nectar, and Hepar: Sal 
also has sale. 

5. EXCEPTIONS in the Genitive Plural. 
• 1. Nouns of one Syllable in as, is, and s, with a Consonant before it, 
have ium; as, As, assium; Lis, lit ium; Urbs, urbium. 

2. Also Nouns in es and is, not increasing in their Genitive ; as, Vallis, 
vallium ; Rupes, Rupium. Except, Panis, Canis, Vates and Volucris. 

5. To which add Caro, Cor, Cos,Dos,Mus,Nix,Nox,Linter,Sal,Os,Ossis. 

Note, That when the Genitive Plural ends in ium, the Accusative 
frequently, instead of es, has eis or is; as, omneis, parteis, or omnis, par- 
tis, for omnes, partes. 






Part II.— Chap. L— Of Noun. 21 

Of Greek Nouns, 

1. Greek Nouns have sometimes their Genitive in os : And these are, 
1. Such as increase their Genitive with d; as, Areas, Arcadis vel Arca- 
dos, an Arcadian ; Briseis, -eidis vel -eidos, a Woman's Name. 2. Such 
as increase in os pure, i. e. with a vowel before it ; as, Haeresis, -eos vel 
-ios, an Heresy. 3. To these add Sphyngos, Strymonos, and Panos. 

Note, That is is more frequent, except in the second kind, and pa- 
tronymics of the first. 

II. 1. Greek words which increase their Genitive in is or os not pure, 
(i. e. with a consonant before it) have frequently their Accusative sing, in a, 
and plural in as; as, Lampas, lampadis, lampada, lampadas ; also Minos, 
Minois, Minoa ; Tros, Trois, Troa, Troas ; Heros, herois, heroa, heroas. 

2. Words in is or ys, whose Genitive ends in os pure, have their Ac- 
cusative in im or in, and ym or yn; as, Haeresis, -eos, haeresim or -in ; 
Chelys, -lyos, a Lute ; chelym or -lyn. Of words in is, which have their 
Genitive in dis or dos, Masculines have their Accusative for the most part 
in im or in, seldom in dem, and never in da, that I know of; as Paris, 
Parim, vel Parin, vel Paridem : Feminines have most commonly dem or 
da, and seldom im or in ; as, Briseis, Briseidem, vel Briseida. 

III. Feminines in o have us in their Genitive, and o in their other Cases; 
as, Dido, Didus, Dido, &c. or they may be declined after the Latin form Di- 
donis, Didoni, &c. which Juno (as being of a Latin original) always follows. 

IV. Greek Nouns in s frequently throw away s in their Vocative ; as, 
Calchas, Achilles, Paris, Tiphys, Orpheus ; Caleha,Achille, Pari, Tiphy, 
Orpheu. 

V. Greek Nouns have um (and sometimes on in their Genitive Plural ; 
as, Epigrammaton, Haereseon, ) and very rarely ium. 

VI. Greek Nouns in ma have most frequently is in their Dative and 
Ablative plural ; as, Poema, Poematis, because of old they said Poematum, 
-ti, JBos has bourn, and bubus or bubus. 



QUARTA DECLINATIO. 

M, , Quomodo dignoscitur 
Quarta Declinatio? 

D, Per Genitivum singula- 
rem in us, et Dativum in ui. 

M. Quot habet Termina- 
tiones? 

J). Duas; us et u; ut, 

Fructus, Fmdt; 



THE FOURTH DECLENSION. 

M. How is the Fourth Declen- 
sion known ?. 

S. By the Genitive singular 
in us, and the Dative in ui. 

M. How many Terminations 
hath it? 

S. Two; us and u; as, 
Cornu, a Horn, 






Fructus, Fruit, Masc, 



Nom, fructus, 

j Gen, fructus, 

^d J JDat, fructui, 

s§ ^ Ace, fructum, 

Voc, fructus, 

Abl. fructu: 



KJ i 



Mas< 




Terminations 


Nom 


fructus, 


us, 


us, 


Gen, 


fructuum, 


us, 


uum, 


Bat, 


fructibus, 


ui, 


ibus, 


Ace, 


fructus, 


um, 


us, 


Voc, 


fructus, 


us, 


us, 


Abl, 


fructibus. 


u; 


ibus. 



22 



fcrv 



Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 
Cornu, a Horn, Neut. As Fructus, so Vul- 



Nom. cornu, 
Gen. cornu, 
cornu, 
cornu, 
cornu, 
cornu : 



Dat. 
Ace. 
Voc. 
All 



:]..[ 



Nom. cornua, 
Gen. 



cornuum. 



m 



j Dat. cornibus, 



Ace. 
Voc. 
Abl. 



cornua, 
cornua, 
cornibus. 



tus, the Countenance, 
Manus, the Hand, Fern. 
Casus, zFall or Chance. 

As Cornu, so Genu, 
the Knee; Veru, a Spit ; 
Tonitru, Thunder. 






Nouns'in us of this Declension are generally Masculine, and those in u 
all Neuter, and indeclinable in the singular number. 

Rule, Some Nouns have ubus in their Dative and Ablative plural, viz. 
Arcus, a Bow ; Artus, a Joint; Lacus, a Lake ; Acus, a Needle ; Portus, 
a Port or Harbour; Partus, a Birth ; Tribus, a Tribe ; Veru, a Spit. 

Note, That of old, Nouns of this Declension belonged to the third, 
and were declined as Grus, grids, a Crane ; thus, Fructus, fructuis, fruc- 
tui, fructuem, fructue : Fructues, fructuum, fructuibus, fructues, fruc- 
tues, fructuibus : So that all the cases are contracted, except the Dative 
sing, and Genitive plural. There are some examples of the Genitive in 
uis yet extant ; as, on the contrary, there are several of the Dative in i*. 

The blessed Name Iesus Domus, a House, Fern, is thus declined : 

is thus declined : Sing. Plur. 

''Nom. Iesus, ~\ t°c fNom. domus, Nom. domus, 

Gen. Iesu, | 'js Gen. domus, v. -mi, Gen. domorum, v. -uum, 
Iesu, I § J Dat. domui, v. -mo, Dat. domibus, 
Iesum, 1,1 Ace. domum, Ace. domos, v. -us, 

Iesu, h | Voc. dunus, Voc. domus, 

Iesu. J ^ \_Abl. domo : Abl. domibus. 

[Note, That the Genitive domi is only used when it signifies at home; 
domo the Dative is found in Horace, Epist. I. 10. 15.] 



Dat. 

Ace. 
Voc. 
AM. 



QUINTA DECLINATIO. 

M. Quomodo dignoscitur 
Quinta Declinatio ? 

D. Per Genitivum et Dati- 
vum singular em in ei. 

M. Quot habet Terminatio- 
nes ? 

D. Unam, nempe, es : ut, 

Res, a Thing, Fern. 

f Nom. res, 

I Gen. rei, 
ti J Dat. rei, 
jg ', Ace. rem, 

1 Voc. res, 

I Abl. re: 



THE FIFTH DECLENSION. 

M. How is the Fifth Declen- 
sion known f 

S. By the Genitive and Da- 
tive singular in ei. 

M. How many Terminations 
hath it? 

S. One, namely, es : as, 

Terminations. 

es, es, 

ei, erum, 

ei, ebus, 

em, es, 

es, es, 

e : ebus. 



f Nom. res, 

I Gen. rerum, 
. Hat. rebus, 
£j ] Ace. res, 
I Voc. res, 
L Abl. rebus. 



Part II.— Chap. I.— Of Noun. 23 

Nouns of the Fifth Declension are not above fifty ; and are all Femi- 
nine, except Dies, a Day, Masc. or Fern, and Meridies, the Mid-day or 
Noon, Masc. 

All Nouns of this Declension end in ies, except three ; Fides, Faith ; 
Spes, Hope ; Res, a Thing. 

And all Nouns in ies, are of the Fifth, except these four; Abies, a Fir-tree; 
Aries, a Ram ; Paries, a Wall ; and Quies, Rest ; which are of the Third. 

Most Nouns of this Declension want the Genitive, Dative and Abla- 
tive Plural, and many of 'them want the Plural altogether. 
General Remarks on l 11 the Declensions. 

1. The Genitive Plural of the first four is sometimes contracted, espe- 
cially by Poets ; as, Coelicolum, Deum, Mensum, Currum ; for Coelico- 
larum, Deorum, Mensium, Curruum. 

2. When the Genitive of the Second ends in ii, the last i is sometimes 
taken away by Poets ; as, Tuguri for TuguriL We read also Aulai for 
AxdcB in the First, and Fide iaxjidei in the Fifth ; and so of other like words. 



DECLINATIO ADJECTIVORUM. 

Adjectiva sunt vel primae et 
secundae Declinationis, vel ter- 
tiae tantum. 

Omnia Adjectiva habentia 
tres Terminationes, praeter 
*undecim, sunt primae et se- 
cundae: At quae unam vel 
duas Terminationes habent, 
sunt teniae. 

Adjectiva primae et secun- 
dae habent Masculinum in us 
fveler; Foemininum semper 
in a ; Neutrum semper in um; 
ut, j ways in um ; as, 

Bonus, bona, bonum, good ; Tener, tenera, tenerum, tender. 
Si?ig. Bonus, bona, bonum, good. Plur. 

Nom. bon-i, -ae, -a, 

Gen. bon-orum, -arum, -orum, 
Bat. bon-is, -is, -is, 
Ace. bon-os, -as, -a, 
Voc. bon-i, -ae, -a, 
Abl. bon-is, -is, -is. 

* Viz. acer, alacer, celer, celeber % saluher, volucer, campester, eques- 
ter, pedester, paluster, silvester; which are of the Third, and have their 
Masculine in er or is, their Feminine in is, and Neuter in e. 

f For satur, full, was of old saturus. 



THE DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES, 

Adjectives are eitlier of the 
first and second Declension, or 
of the third only. 

All Adjectives having three 
Terminations, except * eleven, 
are of the first and second : 
But those which have one or 
two Terminations are of the 
third. 

Adjectives of the first and se- 
cond have their Masculine in us 
f or er ; their Feminine al- 
ways in a ; and their Neuter al- 



Nom 


bon-us, 


-a, 


-um, 


Gen. 


bon-i, 


-ae, 


-h 


Dat. 


bon-o, 


-ae, 


-o, 


Ace. 


bon-um, 


-am, 


-um, 


Voc. 


bon-e, 


-a, 


-um, 


Abl 


bon-o, 


-a, 


-o: 



24 Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 

Tener, tenera, tenerum, tender. 
Sing. 
N. ten-er, -era, -erum, 
G. ten-eri, -erae, -eri, 
JD. ten-ero, -erae, -ero, 
A. ten-erum, -eram, -erum, 
V. ten-er, -era, 
A. ten-ero, -era, 



Plur. 

N. ten-eri, -erae, -era, 
G. ten-er orum, -erarum, -erorum, 

JD. ten-eris, -eris, -eris, 

A. ten-eros, -eras, -era, 

erum, V. ten-eri, ' -erae,- -era, 

-ero: A. ten-eris, -eris, -eris. 



Adjectives are declined as three Substantives of the same Terminations 
and Declensions: As in the examples above, bonus like dominus ; tener 
like gener ; bona and tenera, like penna; bonum and tenerum, like reg- 
7ium. Therefore the ancients, as is clear from Varro, lib. o. de Anal, de- 
clined every Gender separately, and not all three jointly, as we now com- 
monly do : And perhaps it may not be amiss to follow this method at first, 
especially if the boy is of a slow capacity. 

Of Adjectives in er, some retain the e, as tener. So miser, -era, -erum, 
wretched ; liber, -era, -erum, free ; and all compounds in ger, and fer. 
Others lose it; as, pulcher, pulclira, pulchrum, fair; niger, -gra, -grum, 
black. 

These following Adjectives, iinus, one ; totus, whole ; solus, alone ; ul- 
lus, any ; nulfus, none ; alius, another of many ; alter, another, or one of 
two; neuter, neither; uler, whether, with its compounds ; uterque, both; 
uterlibet, utervis, winch of the two you please ; alteruter, the one or the 
other; have their Genitive singular in ins, and Dative in I. 



Adjectiva Teniae Declina- 
tionis. 

1. Unius Terminationis. 



Adjectives of the Third De- 
clension. 

1. Of one Termination. 







Felix, happy. 








Sing. 






Plur. 




N, fel-ix, 


-ix, 


4a, 


iV. fel-ices, 


-ices, 


-icia, 


G. fel-icis, 


-icis, 


-icis, 


G. fel-icium, 


-icium, 


-icium, 


D, fel~ici, 


-ici, 


-ici, 


D. fel-icibus, 


-icibus, 


-icibus, 


A. fel-icem 


, -icem, 


-ix, 


A. fel-ices, 


-ices, 


-icia, 


V. fel-ix, 


-ix, 


-ix, 


V. fel-ices, 


-ices, 


-icia, 


A. fel-ice, vel -ici, Sfc 




A. fel-icibus, 


-icibus, 


-icibus. 


2. Duarum Terminationum, \ 2. Of two Terminations. 






Mitis 


, mite, meek. 








Sing. 






Plur. 




N. mitis, 


mitis, 


mite, 


N. mites, 


mites, 


mitia, 


G. mitis, 


mitis, 


mitis, 


G. mitium, 


mitium, 


mitium, 


JD. miti, 


miti, 


miti, 


D . mitibus, 


mitibus, 


mitibus, 


A. mitem, 


mitem 


mite, 


A. mites, 


mites, 


mitia, 


V. mitis, 


mitis, 


mite, 


V, mites, 


mites, 


mitia, 


A. miti, 


miti, 


miti: 


A, mitibus, 


mitibus, 


mitibus. 



Part IL—Chap. I.—Of Noun. 
Mitior, mitius, meeker. 



25 



Sing. 
miti-or, -or, -us, 
miti-oris, -oris, -oris, 
miti-ori, -ori, -ori, 
miti-orem, -orem, -us, 
miti-or, -or, -us, 
A. miti-or e, vel -ori, fyc. 
S. Trium Terminationum. 



N. 
G. 
D, 
A. 
V. 



Plur. 
N. miti-or es, -ores, 
G. miti-orum, -orum, 
D. miti-oribus, -oribus, 
A. miti-ores, -ores, 

V. miti-ores, -ores, 
A. miti-oribus, -oribus, 

| 3. Of three Terminations. 



-ora, 

-orum, 

-oribus, 

-ora, 

-ora, 

-oribus. 



Acer vel acris, acris, acre, sharp. 



Sing, 

N. a-cerv6?/-cris,-cris, -ere, 

G. a-cris, -cris, -cris, 

D. a-cri, -cri, -cri, 

A. a-crem, -crem, -ere, 

V. a-certfe/-cris,-cris, -ere, 

A. a-cri, -cri, -cri: 

KEGULAE. 

1. Adjectiva tertiae Decli- 
nationis habent e vel i in Ab- 
lativo singulari. 

2. At si Neutrum sit in e, 
Ablativus habet i tantum. 

3. Genitivus pluralis desi- 
nit in turn; et Neutrum No- 
minated, Accusativi, et Vo- 
cativi, in ia. 

4. ExcipeComparativa, quae 
um et a postulant. 



N. a-cres, 


-cres, 


-cria, 


G. a-crium, 


-crium, 


-crium, 


D. a-cribus, 


-cribus, 


-cribus, 


A. a-cres, 


-cres, 


-cria, 


V. a-cres, 


-cres, 


-cria, 


A. a-cribus, 


-cribus, 


-cribus. 



Plur. 
-cr 
-cr: 
-cr 
-cr 
-cr 
-ci 

RULES. 

1 . Adjectives of the third De- 
clension have e or i in the Abla- 
tive singular. 

2. But if the Neuter be in e, 
the Ablative has i only. 

3. The Genitive plural ends 
in ium; and the Neuter of the 
Nominative, Accusative, and 
Vocative, in ia. 

4. Except Comparatives, 
which require um and a. 



EXCEPTIONS. 

1. Dives, hospes, sospes, super stes, juvems, senex, and pauper, have e 
m the Ablative singular, and consequently um in the Genitive plural. 

2. Compos, impos, consors, inops, vigil, supplex, uber, degener,a.ndpuber: 
also compounds ending in ceps, fex, pes, and corjwr ; as, Princeps, ar- 
tifex, bipes, tricorpor, have um, not. ium. 

Note, That all these have seldom the Neut. sing, and never almost 
the Neut. plur. in the Nom. and Ace. To which add memor, which has 
memori and memorum ; and locuples, which has locupletium ; also, deses, 
reses, hebes, perpes, praepes, teres, concolor, versicolor ,- which being hard- 
ly to be met with in the Genitive plural, it is a doubt whether they should 
have um or ium, though I incline most to the former. 

3. Par has pari, vetus, Vetera and veterum ; plus, which hath only the 
Neut. in the sing, has plure and plures, plura or pluria, plurium. 

B 



Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 



26 

Note 1. That Comparatives and Adjectives in ns have more frequent- 
ly e than i; and Participles, in the Ablatives called Absolute, have ge- 
nerally e ; as Carolo regnante, not regnanti. 

Note 2. That Adjectives joined with Substantives Neuter, hardly ever 
have e, but i; as, victrici ferro, not victrice. 

Note 3. That Adjectives, when they are put substantively, have oft- 
times e; as, qffinis, familiaris, rivalis, sodalis, &c. So £>ar, a match ; 
as, Cum pare quaeque suo coeunt. Ovid. 

OF NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. 
1. The Ordinal and Multiplicative Numbers (see Chap. IX.) are regu- 
larly declined. The Distributive wants the singular, as also doth the 
Cardinal, except Unus, which is declined as in p. 24. and has the plural, 
when joined with a Substantive that wanteth the sing. ; as, JJnae literae, 
one letter ; Una moenia, one wall : Or when several particulars are 
considered complexly as making one compound ; as, Uni sex dies, i. e. 
One space of six days ; Una vestimenta, i. e. One suit of apparel. Plaut. 
Duo and Tres are declined after this manner : 






Nom. tres, tres, tria, 
Gen. trium, trium, trium, 
tribus, tribus, tribus, 
tres, tres, tria, 
tres, tres, tria, 
tribus, tribus, tribus. 



Dat. 
Ace. 

Voc. 
[_Abl. 



"Nom. duo, duae, duo, 

Gen. duorum, duarum, duorum, 
Dat. duobus, duabus, duobus, 
Ace. duos vel -o, duas, duo, 
Voc. duo, duae, duo, 

^Abl. duobus, duabus, duobus. 
Ambo, both, is declined as duo. 

2. From Quatuor to Centum are all indeclinable. 

3. From Centum to Mille they are declined thus : ducenti, ducentae, 
ducenta ; ducentorum, ducentarum, ducentorum, &c. 

4. As to Mille, Varro, and all the grammarians after him down to the 
last age, make it (when it is not before a Gen. plur.) a Substantive inde- 
clinable in the sing., and in the plur. declined, Millia, millium, millibus ; 
but when it hath a Substantive joined to it in any other case, they make 
it an Adjective plur. indeclinable. But Scioppius, and after him Grono- 
vius, contend, that mille is always an Adjective plural ; and, under that 
termination, of all cases and genders : But that it hath two Neuters, had 
mille, and haec millia; that the first is used when one thousand is signi- 
fied, and the second when more than one ; and that where it seems to be 
a Substantive governing a Gen. multitudo, numerus, manus, pecunia, 
pondus, spatium, corpus, or the like, are understood. I own, that for- 
merly I was of this sentiment ; but now the weighty reasons adduced by 
the most accurate Perizonius incline me rather to follow the ancient gram- 
marians. 

After the declension of Substantives and Adjectives separately, it may 
not be improper to exercise the learner wdth some examples of a Substan- 
tive and Adjective declined together ; which will both make him more 
ready in the Declensions, and render the dependence of the Adjective upon 
the Substantive more familiar to him. Let the examples at first be of the 
same terminations and declensions ; as, Dominus Justus, a just Lord ; 
Penna bona, a good Pen ; Ingenium eximium, an excellent wit. After- 
wards let them be different in one or both ; as, Puer probus, a good boy ; 
Lectio facilis, an easy Lesson; Poeta optimus, an excellent Poet; Fruc- 
tus dulcis, sweet fruit; Dies faustus, a happy Day, &c. And if the boy 
has as yet been taught writing, let him write them either in the school or 
ai home, to be revised by the master next day. 



Part II.— Chap. I.— Of Noun. 



27 



OF IRREGULAR NOUNS. 

These (for we cannot here make a full enumeration of them) may be 
reduced to the following Scheme : 



P 

O 

< 

D 
O 
N 



> 
M 



1. Number^ 



CSing. as, Liberi, Minac, Anna. 
1 £Plur. as, ^gr, Humus, Aevum. 



1. Gender, * 



2. Number, 
5. Case, 




"Nom. and Voc.' 
Gen. 

'vot 

Gen. Dat and Abl. Plural, as, Mel. 
r Three; as, Dica, dicam, dicas. 
or having only 4. Two ; as, Suppetiae, Suppetias. 

One ; as, Diets, Inficias, Noctu. 
j'Masc. as, Caetera, caeterum. 

Fern, as, Quisguis, quicquid. 

Neut as, Compos. 

Masc. and Fem. as, Plus. 

Mase. and Neut. as, Sicelis. 

Fem. and Neut. as, Tros. 

Sing, as, Centum. 

Plur. as, Unusquisque. 
J Voc. as, Nullus. 
£Dat and Abl. as, Tantundem. 
^or having the Vocative only ; as, Made, Macti. 



n 

el 






Masc' 

Masc. 

Fem. 

Neut. 

Neut. 

Neut 



>M 



In Declension, be- 
ing of the 



'Neut as, Maenalus, Maenala. 
Masc. and Neut as, Locus,-ci, and ca. 
Neut. as, Carbasus, Carbasa. 
Masc. as, Coelum, coeli. 
Fem. as, Epulum, epulae. 
Mas. etNeut. &s,Fraenum,-ni,8c-na. 
2. and 1. as, Delictum, deliciae. 
2. and 4. as, Laurus, -ri, and -rits. 
,3. and 2. as, Fhs, -s/$; -sa, -sorum. 



2. Too little, as, hide- C altogether; as, Fas. 
clinables, \m the sing, as, Cornu. 



In Termination 
In Gender 
In Declension 



"only; as, Helena, Helene. 
| and Gender; as, JVgnws, lignum. 
) and Decl. as, Materia, mater ies. 
_Gend. and Decl. as, Aether, aethra. 

only i as, hie et hoc Valgus. 
"only; as, Fames, famis, of the 3d; 
\ Ablative, fame, of the 5th, because 
I the last Syllable is always long with 
[ the Poets. 



Note 1. That the Defective Nouns are not so numerous as is com- 
monly believed. 

B 2 



23 Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 

Note 2. That those which vary too little, may be ranked under the 
Defective; and those which vary too much, under the Redundant ; e. g. 
Coeli, coelorum, comes not from Coelum, but from Coelus ; and Vasa, 
Vasorum, not from Vas, Vasts, but from Vasum, Vast: But custom, 
which alone gives laws to all languages, has dropped the Singular, and re 
tained the Plural ; and so of others. 



DE COMPARATIONE. 

JT4*. Quot sunt Gradus Coin- 
parationis ? 

D. Tres; Positivus, Corn-pa- 
rativus, et Superlativus, 

M, Quotae Declinationis 
sunt hi Gradus? 

D, Positivus est Adjectivum 
Primae et Secundae Declina- 
tionis, vel Tertiae tantum; 
Comparativus est semper Ter- 
tiae; Superlativus semper Pri- 
mae et Secundae. 

M. Unde formatur Compa- 
rativus Gradus? 

D, A proximo Casu Positivi 
in i, addendo pro Masculino et 
Foeminino Syllabam or, et us 
pro Neutro : ut, 



OF COMPARISON. 

M. How many Degrees of Com- 
parison are there? 

S. Three; the Positive, Com- 
parative, and Superlative. 

M. Of what Declension are 
these Degrees ? 

S. The Positive is an Adjec- 
tive of the First and Second 
Declension, or Third only ; the 
Comparative is always of the 
Third; the Superlative always 
of the First and Second, 

M. Whence is the Compara- 
tive Degree formed ? 

S. From the next Case of the 

Positive in i, by adding for the 

Masculine and Feminine the 

j Syllable or, and us for the Neu- 



| ter; as, 
Doctus, learned; Gen. docti, doctior, et doctius, more learned. 
Mitis, meek; Dat. mitt; mitior, et mitius, more meek. 



M. Whence is the Superla- 
tive formed ? 

S. 1. If the Positive ends in 
er, the Superlative is formed by 
adding rimus : as, 
Pulcher, fair: p.ulcher rimus, most fair; Pauper, poor; pau- 
perrimus, most poor. 



M, Unde formatur Super- 
lativus? 

D. 1. Si Positivus desinat 
in er, Superlativus formatur 
addendo rimus: ut, 



2. Si Positivus non desinat 
in er, Superlativus formatur a 
proximo Casu in i, addendo 
ssimus: ut, 



2. If the Positive ends not in 
er, the Superlative is formed 
from the next Case in i, by ad- 
ding ssimus : as, 



Part II.— Chap. I.—Of Noun. 29 

Gen. docti ; doctissimus, most learned : Dat. miti ; mitissi- 
mus, most meek. 

By Grammatical Comparison we understand three Adjective Nouns, 
of which the two last are formed from the first, and import comparison 
with it, that is, the heightening or lessening of its signification. 

Consequently those Adjectives only which are capable of having their 
signification increased or diminished, can be compared. 

The POSITIVE signifies the quality of a thing simply and absolute- 
ly ; as, Durus, hard ; Parvus, little. 

The COMPARATIVE heightens or lessens that quality ; as, Bwrior, 
harder ; Minor, less. 

The SUPERLATIVE heightens or lessens it to a very high or very low 
degree ; as, Durissimus, hardest, or most hard ; Minimus, very little, or least. 

The Positive hath various terminations ; the Comparative ends always 
in or and us ; the Superlative always in mus, ma, mum. 

[The Positive, properly speaking, is no degree of comparison, for it 
does not compare things together : However, it is accounted one, because 
the other two are founded upon and formed from it.] 

The sign of the Comparative in our language is the syllable er added 
to an Adjective, or the word more put before it. 

The sign of the Superlative is the syllable est added to an Adjective, 
or the words very ox most put before it. 

Note, That when the Positive is a long word, or would otherwise sound 
harsh, by having er or est added to it, we commonly make the Compara- 
tive by the word more, and the Superlative by most or very put before it. 

And for the like reason, the Latin Comparative is sometimes made by 
magis, and the Superlative by valde or maxime, put before the Positive. 
And these are particularly used when the positive ends in us, with a vowel 
before it ; as, Pius, godly ; Arduus, high ; Idoneus, fit ; though not always. 

IRREGULAR COMPARISONS. 

1. Bonus, melior, optimus: Good, better, best. 

Malus, pejor, pessimus : Evil, worse, worst. 

Magnus, major, maximus : Great, greater, greatest. 
Parvus, minor, minimus: Little, less, least. 

Multus, plurimus; multa, plurima; multum, plus, plurimum : much, 
more, most. 

2. Facilis, easy ; Humilis, low ; Similis, like ; make their Superlative 
by changing is into limus ; thus, facillimus, humillimus, simillimus. 

3. Exter, outward; Citer, hither; Superus, above; Inferus, below, 
Posterns, behind ; have regular Comparatives : But their Superlatives 
are, extremus, or extimus, uttermost ; citimus, hithermost ; supremus, or 
summus, uppermost, highest, last ; infimus, or imus, lowest ; jwstremus, 
or postumus, latest or last. 

4. Compounds in dicus, loquus, jicus, and volus, have entior and £n- 
tissimus ; as, maledicus, one that raileth ; magniloquus, one thatboasteth ; 
beneficus, beneficent ; malevolus, malevolent. But these seem rather to 
come from Participles or Nouns in ens. Besides, the Comparatives and 
Superlatives of Adjectives derived from loquor and facio are very rare, 
and Terence has mirificissimus. and Plautus has mendaciloquius. 

B3 



30 Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 

5. Prior, former, has jirimus, first ; Ulterior, farther, ultimus, farthest 
vr last ; Propior, nearer, proximv -, nearest or next ; Ocior, swifter, ocis- 
simus, swiftest ; their Positives bei ig out of use, or quite wanting. Proxi- 
mus has also another Comparative formed from it, viz. proximior. 

6. There are also a great many other Adjectives capable of having their 
signification increased, which yet want one or more of these degrees of 
comparison ; as, Almus, gracious, without Comparative and Superlative ; 
Ingens, great; ingentior, greater, without the Superl. ; Sacer, holy; sa- 
cerrimus, most holy, without the Compar. ; Anterior, former, without 
Posit, and Superl. 

^ These three Degrees of Comparison being nothing else but three 
distinct Adjectives, may be declined either severally each by itself, or 
jointly together ; respect still being had to their Declensions. But the 
first way is much easier, and will answer all the purposes of Comparison 
as well as the other. 



CAP. II. 

DE PRONOMINE. 

M. Quot sunt Pronominaf 
simplicia ? 

D. Octodecim; Ego, Tu, 
Sui; Hie, Ipse, Iste, Hie, Is, 
Quis, Qui; Meus, Tuus, Suus, 
Koster, Fester; Nostras, Ves- 
tras, et Cujas. 

^f Ex his, tria sunt Substan- 
tiva, Ego, Tu, Sui; reliqua 
quindecim sunt Adjectiva. 

Ego 
f Nom. ego, I, 
i Gen. mei, of me. 
t& I Dat, mihi, to me, 
H i Ace. 

Voc. 

All. me, with me : J 

Tu, 



sa 



♦ l.'.'l 

"* MM 



CHAP. II. 

OF PRONOUN. 

M. How many simple j- Pro- 
nouns are there? 

S. Eighteen; Ego, Tu, Sui; 
Ille, Ipse, Iste, Hie, Is, Quis, 
Qui ; Meus, Tuus, Suus, Nos- 
ter, Vester ; Nostras, Vestras, 
and Cujas. 

^[ Of these, three are Sub- 
stantives, Ego, Tu, Sui ; the 
other fifteen are Adjectives. 

I. 

Nom. nos, we, 

Gen. nostrum v. nostri, of us t 

Dat. nobis, to us, 

Ace. nos, us, 

I Voc. 

L AM. nobis, with us. 

Thou. 






" N. tu, thou, 
G. tui, of thee, 
D. tibi, to thee, 
A. te, thee, 
V. tu, O thou, 
A. te, with thee : 



" N. vos, ye, you, 

G. vestrum, v. vestri, of y<>u y 

D. vobis, to you, 

A. vos, you, 

V. vos, ye, you, 
^ A. vobis, with you. 



f See Chap. IX. 



IP 

S3 



Part II. — Chap. II. — Of Pronoun. 
Sui, of himself, of herself of itself 



31 



G. sui, of himself, &c. 
D. sibi, to himself, 
A. se, himself, 

V. 

A. se, with himself: 



1, 



G. sui, of themselves, 
D. sibi, to themselves, 
A. se, themselves, 

V. 

A. se, with themselves. 



A PRONOUN is an irregular kind of Noun : Or, it is a part of 
Speech, which has respect to, and supplies the place of a Noun ; as, in- 
stead of your name, I say, Tu, Thou or You ; instead of Jacobus fecit, 
James did it, I say, Hie fecit, He did it, viz. James. 

Note 1. That the Dat. mihi is sometimes by the poets contracted into mi. 

Note 2. That of old the Gen. plur. of ego was nostrorum and nos- 
trarura ; of tu, vestrorum and vestrarum, (of which there are several ex- 
amples in Plautus and Terence) which were afterwards contracted into 
nostrum and vestrum. 

Note 5. That we use nostrum and vestiwm after Numerals, Partitives, 
Comparatives, and Superlatives ; and nostri and vestri after other Nouns, 
and Verbs ; though there want not some examples of these last with no- 
strum and vestrum, even in Cicero himself, as Vossius shows. 
Ille, ilia, illud; He, she, that or it. 



■ 



iV. ille, ilia, illud, 
G. illius, illius, illius, 
D.illi, illi, illi, 
A. ilium, illam, illud, 
V. ille, ilia, illud, 
[ A. illo, ilia, illo: 



N. illi, illae, ilia, 
G. illorum, illarum, illorum, 
D. illis, illis, illis, 
A. illos, illas, ilia, 
V. illi, illae, ilia, 

L A. illis, illis, illis. 



Ipse, ipsa, ipsum, he himself, she herself, it itself ; and iste, 
ista, istud, he, she, that ; are declined as ille; save only that 
ipse hath ipsum in the Nom. Ace. and Voc. sing. Neuter. 
Hie, haec, hoc; This. 



Si 

* 1 



| A T . hie, haec, hoc, 

G. hujus, hujus, hujus, 

Z). huic, huic, huic, 

A. hunc, hanc, hoc, 

• V. hie, haec, hoc, 

L A. hoc, hac, hoc : 



r -ZV. hi, hae, haec, 

G. horum, hai'um, horum, 



D. his, 
A. hos, 
F.hi, 
A. his, 



Is, ea, id; He, she, it or that. 



his, 
has, 
hae, 
his, 



•1 



r n. is, 


ea, 


G. ejus, 


ejus, 


D.ei, 


ei, 


I A. eum, 


earn 


jr.— 

L A. eo, 




ea, 



id, 
ejus, 
ei, 
id, 



** 

># 



N. ii, eae, 

G. eorum, earum, 
Z). iis vel eis, &c. 
^ A. eos, eas, 

I F -. 

^ ^4. iis vel eis, &c. 
B4 



his, 
haec, 
haec, 
his. 

ea, 
eorum. 



S2 Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 

Quis, quae, quod vel quid? Who, which, what? 
Sing. Plur. 

N. quis, quae, quod v. quid, N, qui, quae, quae, 

G. cujus, cujus, cujus, G. quorum, quarum, quorum, 

D. cui, cui, cui, D. queis vel quibus,&c. 

A. quem, quam, quod v. quid, ^4. quos, quas, quae, 

A. quo, qua, quo: A. queis iW quibus,&c. 
Qui, quae, quod; W^o, which, that. 
Sing. Plur. 

N. qui, quae, quod, N. qui, quae, quae, 

G. cujus, cujus, cujus, G. quorum, quarum, quorum, 

D. cui, cui, cui, D. queis vel quibus,&c. 

A. quem, quam, quod, A. quos, quas, quae, 

A. quo, qua, quo: A. queis vel quibus,&c. 

Meus, my or mine ; Tuns, thy or thine ; jSW-j, his own, her 
own, its own, their own ; are declined like Bonus, -a, -urn : 
and Koster, our or ours ; Vester, your or yours ; like Pulcher, 
-chra, -chrum, of the first and second Declension. But Tuus, 
Suu-s, and Vester want the Vocative ; Koster and Mens have 
it, in which this last hath mi, and sometimes meus, in the Masc. 
singular. 

Nostras, of our country ; Vestras, of your country ; Cujas, 
of what or which country ; are declined like Felix, of the 
third Declension, Gen. Xostratis, Dat. Nostrati. 

Note 1. That all Nouns and Pronouns which one cannot call upon 
or address himself unto, want the Vocative. In consequence of which 
rule, many Nouns, as, melius, nemo, qualis, quantns, quot, Sec. and several 
Pronouns, as, ego, sui, quis, &c. want the Vocative ; but not so many, 
either of the one or the other, as is commonly taught. For which reason, 
we have given Vocatives to ille, ipse, hie, and idem, therein following the 
judgment of the great Vossius, Messieurs de Port Royal, and Johnson, 
which they support by the following authorities : 

Esto nunc, Sol, testis, et haec mihi terra precanti. Virg. Aen. 12. 

Tu mihi libertas ilia paterna vale. Tibul. lib. 1. El. 4. 

O nox ilia, quae pene aeternas huic urbi tenebras attulisti. Cic.pro Flac. 

Ipse meas aether accipe summe preces. Ovid, in Ibin. 
And the Vocative of Idem seems to be confirmed by that of Ovid. Met. 15. 

■ quique fuisti 

Hippolytus, dixit, nunc idem Virbius esto. 
Though all authors before them will only allow four Pronouns, viz. Tu, 
Mens, Noster, and Nostras, to have the Vocative. 

Note 2. That Qui is sometimes used for Quis ; as, Cic. Qui tantus 
fuit labor ? Ter. Qui erit rumor populi, si id feceris ? 



Part IL—Chap. II*— Of Pronoun. 33 

Note 3. That Quod, with its compounds, aliquod, quodvis, quoddam, 
&c. are used when they agree with a Substantive in the same Case ; Quid, 
with its compounds, aliquid, quidvis, quiddam, &c. either have no Sub- 
stantive expressed, or govern one in the Genitive : Whence it is that these 
last are commonly reckoned Substantives. But that quid, as well as quod, 
is originally an Adjective, its signification plainly shows ; otherwise we 
shall make multum, plus, tantum, quantum, &c. also Substantives, when 
they govern the Genitive ; which yet most grammarians agree to be Ad- 
jectives, having the common word negotium understood. 

Note 4. That Qui the Relative hath oftentimes qui in the Ablative, 
and that (which is remarkable) in all Genders and Numbers, as Mr. John- 
son evinces by a great many examples out of Plautus and Terence ; to 
which he might have added one out of C. Nepos, in. 3. 

Note 5. That nostras, vestras, and cujas, are declined like Gentile or 
National Nouns in as of the Third Declension, in imitation of which 
they are formed ; as, Arpinas, Fidenas, Privernas, a man, woman, or 
thing, of or belonging to the towns of Arpinum, Fidenae, or Privernum, 
and may have the Neuter as well as these : For as Cic. has Iter Arpinas, 
and Liv. Bellum Privernas ; so Colum. has Arbustum nostras, and Cic. 
Nostratia verba ; contrary to what Linacer teaches. 

[I pass over taking notice, that in old authors, especially Plautus, we 
find quis and quisquis sometimes of the Fern. Gender ; mis and tis, for 
viei and tui ; hisce for hi ; hibus, ibus, for his, Us ; illae, ipsae, istae, 
quae, in the Gen. or Dat. Sing. Fem. ; em for eum ; istes for istos; 
quoius, quoi, for cujus, cui, because they are extraordinary.] 

OF COMPOUND PRONOUNS. 

I. Some are compounded of Quis and Qui, with some other word or 
syllable. In these, quis is sometimes the first and sometimes the last part 
of the word compounded : But qui is always the first. 

1. The compounds of quis, when it is put first, are, quisnam, who? 
quispiam, quisquam, any one ; quisque, every one ; quisquis, whosoever : 
Which are thus declined : Nom. Gen. Dat. 

Quisnam, quaenam, quodnam vet quidnam ; cujusnam, cuinam. 

Quispiam, quaepiam, quodpiam vel quidpiam ; cujuspiam, cuipiam. 

Quisquam, quaequam, quodquam vel quidquam ; cujusquam, cuiquam. 

Quisque, quaeque, quodque vel quidque ; cujusque, cuique. 

Quisquis, ■ quidquid vel quicquid ; cujuscujus, cuicui. 

And so forth in their other Cases, according to the simple quis. But 
quisquis has no Feminine at all, and the Neuter only in the Nom. and 
Ace. Quisquam has also quicquam for quidquam. Ace. quenquam, 
without the Fem. The Plural is scarcely used. 

2. The compounds of quis, when it is put last, are, aliquis, some ; ec- 
quis, who ? To which some add, nequis, siquis, and numquis ; but these 
are more frequently read separately, ne quis, siquis, num quis. They are 
thus declined : Nom. Gen. Dat. 

Aliquis, aliqua, aliquod vel aliquid ; alicujus, alicui. 

Ecquis ecqua vel ecquae, ecquod vel ecquid ; eccujus, eccui. 
Si quis, si qua, si quod vel si quid ; si cujus, si cui. 

Ne quis, ne qua, ne quod vel ne quid ; ne cujus, ne cui. 

Num quis,num qua, num quod vel num quid; num cujus,numcui. 

Note, That these, and only these, have qua in the Nom. Sing. Fem, 
and Nom. and Ace. Plur. Neut. 

B5 



34 Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 

3. The compounds of qui, are quicunque, whosoever ; quidam, some ; 
quilibet, quivis, any one, whom you please ; and are thus declined : 
Nom. Gen. Dat. 

Quicunque, quaecunque, quodcunque ; cujuscunque, cuicunque. 

Quidam, quaedam, quoddam vel quiddam ; cujusdam, cuidam. 

Quilibet, quaelibet, quodlibet vel quidlibet ; cujuslibet, cuilibet. 

Quivis, quaevis, quodvis t;^quidvis; cujusvis, cuivis. 

Some of these are twice compounded ; as, ecquisnam, who ? unusquis- 
que, every one. The first is scarce declined beyond its Nom, and the 
second wants the Plur. 

Note 1. That all these compounds want the Vocative, except quisque, 
aliquis, quilibet, unusquisque, and perhaps some others. Vid. Voss. p. 335. 

Note 2. That all these compounds have seldom or never queis, but 
quibus, in their Dat. and Abl. Plur. 

Note 3. That quidam hath quendam, quandam, quoddam vel quid- 
dam, in the Ace. Sing, and quorundam, quarundam, quorundam, in the 
Gen. Plural, n being put instead of m for the better sound, as it is for the 
same reason in the Cases of Idem. 

II. Some reckon among Compound Pronouns, ego, tu, and sui, with 
ipsi ; but in the best books they are generally read separately; which 
seems necessary, because of te ipse and se ipse where the two words are 
of different Cases. 

III. Is is compounded with the syllable dem, and contracted into idem, 
the same ; which is thus declined : 

Sing. Plur. 

Nom. idem, eadem, mem, Nom. iidem, eaedem, eadem, 

Gen. ejusdem, ejusdem, ejusdem, Gen. eorundem, earundem, eorundem, 
Dat* eidem, eidem, eidem, Dat. eisdem vel iisdem, &c. 
Ace. eundem, eandem, idem, Ace. eosdem, easdem, eadem, 
Voc. idem, eadem, idem, Voc. iidem, eaedem, eadem, 

Abl. eodem, eadem, eodem : Abl. eisdem vel iisdem, &c. 

IV. Most of the other Compound Pronouns are only to be found in 
certain Cases and Genders ; as, 

1. Of iste and hie is compounded, Nom. isthic, isthaec, isthoc vel ist- 
huc. Ace. isthunc, isthanc, isthoc vel isthuc. Abl. isthoc, isthac, isthoc. 
Nom. and Ace. Plur. Neut. isthaec. 

2. Of ecce and is is compounded eccum, eccam ; Plur. eccos, eccas : 
And from ecce and ille, ellum, ellam ; ellos, ellas, in the Accusatives. 

3. Of modus and is, hie, iste, and quis, are compounded these Genitives, 
ejusmodi, hujusmodi, istiusmodi, cujusmodi ; and sometimes with the 
syllable ce put in the middle, ejuscemodi, hujuscemodi, &c. 

4. Of cum, and these Ablatives, me, te, se, nobis, vobis, qui or quo, and 
quibus, are compounded, mecum, tecum, secum, nobiscum, vobiscum, qui- 
cum or quocum, and quibuscum. 

5. To these add some Pronouns compounded with these syllabical ad- 
jections, met, te, ce, pte, cine, to make their signification more pointed 
and emphatical ; as, egomet, tute, hujusce, meapte, hiccine. 

REMARKS ON ENGLISH PRONOUNS. 
1. In the Nominative, or Foregoing State, (as the English Gramma- 
rians call it) we use I, Thou, He, She, We, Ye, They, and Who ; But 
in the other Cases, (which they name the Following State) we use Me, 
Thee, Him, Her, Us, You, Them, and Whom. 



Part II. — Chap. II. — Of Pronoun. 35 

2. When we speak of a Person, we use Who and Whom, whether we 
ask a question or not ; as, Who did it ? The man who did it. But if we 
speak of a Thing, with a question, we use What; as, What book is that? 
Without a question, we use Which ; as, The book which you gave me. 
And then it is frequently understood ; as, The book you gave me. 

Note, That What is often used, even without a question, instead of The 
thing which, or That which ; as, I know what you design, i. e. The thing 
which, or That which you design. As, on the contrary, when it refers to 
some particular thing mentioned before, we make use of Which, even with 
a question ; as, Give me the book ? Which book ? Which of the books ? 

3. This makes in the Plural These, and That makes Those. 

Note, That That is frequently used instead of Who, Whom, or Which; 
as, The man that told you, The man that we saw, The book that I lent you. 

4. We use My, Thy, Her, Our, Your, Their, when they are joined 
with Substantives, or the word Own ; and Mine, Thine, Hers, Ours, 
Yours, Theirs, when the Substantive is left out or understood; as, My 
book, This book is mine, &c. 

Note, That with Own, or a Substantive beginning with a vowel, we 
sometimes use Mine and Thine ; as, My eye, or Mine eye ; Thy own, or 
Thine own. 

5. We often use Here, There, Where, compounded with these Parti- 
cles, Of, By, Upon, About, In, With, instead of This, That, Which, and 
What, with these same Particles ; as, Hereof, Hereby, Hereupon, Here- 
abouts, Herein, Herewith ; for Of this, By this, Upon this, About this 
place, In this, With this, &c. 

6. Whose and Its are Genitives, instead of Of whom, Of it ; and it is 
a fault to use Its for 'Tis or It is, as some do. 



CAP. III. 

DE VERBO. 

M. Quomodo declinatur Ver- 
bum ? 

D. Per Voces, Modos, Tem- 
pora, Numeros, et Personas. 

M. Quot sunt Voces ? 

7). Duae ; Ac+iva et Passiva. 
M. Quot suU Modi ? 

D. Quatuor ; Indicative, 
Subjunctivus, Imperativus, et In- 
Jinitivus. 

M. Quot sunt Numeri ? 



CHAP. III. 

OF VERB. 

M. How is a Verb declined? 

S. By Voices, Moods Reuses, 
Numbers, and Persons. 

M. How many Voices are 
there f 

S. Two; the Active and 
Passive. 

M. How many Moods are 
there t 

S. Four; Indicative, Sub- 
junctive, Imperative, and In- 
finitive. 

M. How many Numbers are 
there ? 

Be 



36 Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 



D. Duo ; Singularis et Plu- 
ralism 

M. Quot sunt Tempora? 

D. Quinque; Praesens,Prae- 
teritum-imperfectum, Prar *eri- 
tum-perfectum, Praeteruam- 
plusquam-perfectum, et Futu- 
rum. 

M. Quot sunt Personae ? 

D. Tres; prima, Secunda, 
Tertia. 



S. Two ; Singular and Plu- 
ral. 

M. How many Tenses are 
there ? 

S. Five; The Present, the 
Preter-imperfect, the Preter- 
perfect, the Preter-pluperfect, 
and the Future. 

M. How many Persons are 
there ? 

S. Three ; First, Second, 
Third. 



A VERB is a Part of Speech which signifies to be, to do, or to suffer: 
Or, a Verb is that Part of Speech which expresses what is affirmed or 
said of things. 

A Verb may be distinguished from any other part of Speech these two 
ways : — 1. A Verb being the most necessary and essential part of a sen- 
tence, without which it cannot subsist, whatever word with a Substantive 
Noun makes full sense, or a sentence, is a Verb ; and that which does 
not make full sense with it, is not a Verb. 2. Whatever word with HE 
or IT SHx^LL before it, makes sense, is a Verb ; otherwise not. 

I. In most Verbs there are two forms of VOICES ; the Active, end- 
ing in o, and the Passive in or. The former expresses what is done by the 
Nominative or Person before it ; the latter what is suffered by or done to 
the Nominative or Person before it ; as, Amo, I love ; Amor, I am loved. 

II. The Moods are divided into Finite and Infinite. The first three 
viz. the Indicative, Subjunctive, and Imperative, are called Finite, be- 
cause they have certain fixed terminations, answering to certain persons 
both singular and plural. The last is called Infinitive, or Infinite, be- 
cause it is not confined to one Number or Person more than another. 

1. The Indicative Mood affirms or denies positively; as, Amo, I love; 
Won amo, I do not love : Or else asks a question ; as, An amas ? Dost 
thou love ? Annon amas ? Dost thou not love ? 

2. The Subjunctive Mood generally depends upon another Verb in the 
same sentence, either going before or coming after; as, Si me ametis, 
praecepta mea servate, If ye love me, keep my commandments. 

[This Mood is commonly branched out into three Moods, viz. the Op- 
tative, the Subjunctive more strictly taken, arid the Potential. 1. It is 
called Optative when a word importing a wish, as, Utinam, Would to 
God, si, if, goes before it. 2. It is named Subjunctive, when it is 
subjoined to some other Conjunction or Adverb, or to Interrogatives be- 
coming Indefinites. (See Chap. IX.) 3. It is called Potential, when 
with the simple affirmation of the Verb is also signified some modification 
or affection of it, such as a Power, Possibility, Liberty, Duty, Will, &c. 
the signs whereof in our language are, May, Can, Might, Could, Would, 
Should, and Had,^?* Would have or Should have ; as, They had repent- 
ed, for would have. But because the terminations of these Moods are 



Part II.— Chap. III.— Of Verb. 37 

the same we have comprehended them all under one, viz. the Subjunc- 
tive, to which, with small difficulty, they may be reduced. Otherwise, if 
we will constitute as many Moods as there are various modifications where- 
with a Verb or affirmation can be affected, we must multiply them to a far 
greater number, and so we shall have a Promissive, Hortative, Precative, 
Concessive, Mandative, Interrogative, Mood ; nay, a Volitive and Debi- 
tive, which are commonly included in the Potential. As for the Optative, 
it is plain that the wish is not in the Verb itself, which signifies only the 
matter of it, or what is wished, but in the Verb Opto, which is under- 
stood, with ut, uti, or utinam, which really signify no more but that. 
And it is very probable that, in like manner, some Verb, or other word, 
may also be understood to what is called the Potential Mood, such as ita 
est, res ita est, fieri potest ut, &c. as Vossius, Sanctius, Perizonius, and 
others, do contend, though Mr Johnson is of another opinion.] 

3. The Imperative Mood commands, exhorts, or entreats; as, Ama, 
Love thou. 

4. The Infinitive Mood expresses the signification of the Verb in ge- 
neral, and is Englished by TO ; as, Amare, To love. 

III. The Tenses are either Simple or Compound. The Simple Ten- 
ses are, the Present, the Preter-perfect, and Future. 

1. The Present ^ C Present 

2. The Preter-perfect > Tense speaks of Time now -< Past. 

3. The Future j L.To come. 

The Compound Tenses are, the Preter- imperfect and the Preter-plu- 
perfect. 

4. The Preter-imperfect refers to some past time, and imports that the 
thing was present and unfinished then ; as, Amabam, I did love, viz. then. 

5. The Preter-pluperfect refers to some past time, and imports that the 
thing was past at or before that time ; as, Scripseram epistolam, I had 
written a letter, i. e. before that time. 

There is also a Compound Future Tense, called the Future- perfect, 
or Exact, which refers to some time yet to come, and imports that a 
thing as yet future shall be past and finished at or before that time ; as, 
Cum coenavero, tu leges ; When I shall have supped, i. e. after supper, you 
shall read. This Future is only in the Subjunctive Mood, and the sign of 
it is Shall have ; as the other Future, called the Future-imperfect, is only 
in the Indicative, which, when joined with another Future, imports that 
two things yet future shall be cotemporary, or exist at one time ; as, Cum 
coenabo, tu leges; When I shall sup, i. e. in time of supper, you shall read. 

[And not only the Tenses, but even the Moods themselves, may be di- 
vided into Simple and Compound. I call the Indicative a Sample Mood, 
because it simply affirms something of its Person or Nominative ; but the 
other three Moods I call Compound, because they have some other ideas 
or modifications of our thoughts superadded to the simple signification of 
the Verb ; such as, a Command, a Desire, Prohibition, Possibility, Liber- 
ty, W r ill, Duty, Wish, Concession, Supposition, Condition, Purpose, &c. 
These modifications are either really included in the Verb; as, a Com 
mand, &c. in the Imperative, and, according to Johnson, Power, Will, 
Duty, &c. in the Mood called Potential ; or closely interwoven with it 
by the help of a Conjunction. Adverb, or other Verb, expressed or under- 
stood : And because these also generally denote time, they very frequently 



38 Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 

make all the Tenses of these Moods to become Compound Tenses. For, 
with respect to their execution, they are generally future ; but with res- 
pect to their Modal signification, they may fall under any of the other 
distinctions of time as well as the future. Thus, for instance, Lege, Read 
thou, with respect to its Execution, is Future ; but with respect to the 
Command, it is Present. Again, in Legam, I may or can read, the Action, 
(if done at all) must be Future ; but the Liberty or Possibility is Present : 
And so of others. Now, as it seems evident, that from these modifications 
of the Verb, more than from the bare execution of it, the Tenses of these 
Moods have at first been distinguished ; so I am of opinion, that had 
grammarians taken their measures accordingly, they had not rendered 
this matter so intricate as they have done. For some of them, as Sanc- 
tius, &c. determining the times of these Moods by the execution only, 
have made the whole Imperative and Subjunctive of the Future Time, 
and the Infinitive and Participles of all times, or rather of no time : 
Others, viz. Vossius, Linacer, Alvarus, Verepaeus, &c. though they will 
not go so far as Sanctius, yet upon the same grounds make Utinam legam 
the Future of the Optative, Utinam legerem the Present of it. By the 
same rule they make a Future of the Potential in rim ; as, citius credide- 
rim, I should or shall sooner believe : And another of the Subjunctive in 
issem,- as, Juravit se ilium statim interfecturum, nisijusjurandum sibi de- 
disset ; He swore he would presently kill him, if he should not swear to him. 
Cic. But. with all imaginable deference to these great men, I humbly think 
that these Tenses may be more easily accounted for, if we consider them as 
Compound, i. e. respecting one time as to their execution, and another as 
to the various modifications superadded to, or involved in their significa- 
tion. To instance in the two last examples, (because they seem to have 
the greatest difficulty) citius crediderim seem to import these two things 
1st, That I have and continue to have a reason why I should not believe 
it, whieh reason is of the Imperfect or Past Time ; and, 2d, That I shall 
sooner have believed it, than another thing, with respect to which it shall 
be Past : For there are a great many examples where the Preterite in 
rim hath the same signification with the Future-perfect in ro; as, Si te 
inde exemerim, Terent. for exemero. See Voss. fib. v. cap. 15. and Aul. 
Gell. lib. xviii. cap. 2. As to the other example, the composition of two 
times is yet more evident : For though jusjurandum dedisset be poste- 
rior, and consequently future with respect to juravit, yet it is prior not 
only to the time of the relation, but to interfecturum ; to prevent which 
it behoved it necessarily to be past : And so of others. The same rule, 
in my opinion, will likewise hold in the Infinitive and Participles, which 
of themselves have always one fixed time ; and when they seem to be of 
another time, that is not in them, but in the Verb that goes before them 
or comes after them. Thus, for instance, scribere is always present or co- 
existent with the Verb before it, and scripsisse is always prior to the same 
Verb in all its Tenses ; as, Dicit, dixit, or dicet ; juvat,juvit, or juvabit, me 
scribere, and me scripsisse. So also the Participles have a fixed time, present 
past, or future ; and when any part of the Verb sum is joined with them, 
they retain their own times, and have those of that Verb superadded to 
them. But because there are innumerable occasions of speaking, wherein 
the nice distinctions of times are not necessary, therefore it frequently hap- 
pens that they are promiscuously used, as I could evince by a great many 
examples, not only in the Passive but Active Voice, both in the Latin and 



Part II.— Chap. IIL—Of Verb. 39 

other languages, if there were place for it ; which yet in my judgment does 
not hinder but that every part of a Verb hath formally, and of its own na- 
ture, a certain time, simple or compound, to which it is fixed and determined. 

IV. There are two Numbers, the Singular and the Plural, answering 
to the same Numbers of a Noun or Pronoun. 

V. There are three Persons in each Number ; the First speaks of it- 
self, the Second is spoken to, and the Third is spoken of. The First hath 
only ego and nos, the Second only tu and vos, and the Third any Substantive 
Noun Singular and Plural, put before the respective terminations of the 
Verb, answering to them through all Voices, Moods, and Tenses. 

[A Verb hath the same respect to its Nominative that an Adjective hath 
to its Substantive ; and therefore, as an Adjective hath not properly either 
Genders or Numbers, but certain terminations fitted for those of its Sub- 
stantive, so a Verb hath properly neither Persons nor Numbers, but certain 
terminations answering to the Persons and Numbers of its Nominative.] 

Note 1. That ego and tu are seldom expressed, because the terminations 
of the Verb immediately discover them, without any hazard of a mistake. 

Note 2. That if a Substantive Noun be joined with ego or tu, the 
Verb is of the Person of these Pronouns, not of the Noun. 

Note 5. That in the continuation of a discourse, the third person is 
also frequently understood, because easily known by what went before ; 
and these Pronouns, ille, ipse, iste, hie, is, idem, quis, and qui, do often 
supply the place of it. 

The ENGLISH SIGNS of the TENSES are : 
C Act. the Theme of the Verb, and est, eth or s ; or, for the 



Present 



Imperf. 
Perfect 



< greater emphasis, do, dost, doth or does before it. 
C.Pass. Am, art, is, are, be, beest, with a word in ed, en, t, &c. 
C Act. ed, edst, &c. or, for the greater emphasis, did, didst, before it 
\ Pass, was, wast, were, wert, with a word in ed, en, &c. 
C Act. have, hast, hath or Aas, with a word in ed,en,&c. or as the Imp. 
£ Y&ss.have been,hast been,hath or has been,m.th a wordin ed,en,8ic. 



■cm j>^ Act. had, hadst, with a word in ed, en, &c. 
Pluperf.£ pa ^ 



Future 



. had been, hadst been, with a word in ed, en, &c. 
C Act. shall, will, shalt, wilt, with the Verb. 
I Pass, shall be, will be, shalt be, wilt be, with a word in ed, en, &c. 
The Subjunctive Mood Active has frequently these signs : 
Present, may or can. 
Imperf. might, could, would, should. 

Perfect, may have or might have, could have, would have, should have. 
Pluperf. might have, could have, would have, should have or had. 
Future, shall have. 

The Passive has frequently the same signs, with be or been. 



DE CONJUGATIONIBUS. 
M. Quot sunt Conjugationes? 

D. Quatuor; Prima, Se- 
crtnda, Tertia, et Quarta. 



OF CONJUGATIONS. 
M. How many Conjugations 
are there $ 

S. Four ; First, Second, 
Third, and Fourth. 



40 



Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 



ha- 



M. Quae sunt Notae 
rum Conjugationum ? 
JD. Prima"! TA longum*} „ .^ 
Secunda f "8 \ E longum I ** *43 

Tertia f J 1 E breve (II 
Quarta J O longum J rt J5 



M. What are the Marks of 
these Conjugations ? 



S. First^ 




r^ /o??g 


Second ( 


J3 


j E long 


Third ( 


J= 


j E short 


Fourth 




LJ fang 



The common characteristic or Mark by which these Conjugations are 
distinguished from one another, is one of these three Vowels, a, e, i, be- 
fore the re of the Infinitive Active, though they also may be known by 
the same vowels in several other parts of them ; for a long is most fre- 
quent in the first, e long in the second, e or i short in the third, and i long 
in the fourth : Only e before bam, bas, bat, &c. and before mus and tis, 
and mur and mini, is always long in whatever Conjugation it is found. 

But it is to be observed that the Preterites and Supines, and all the 
parts formed from them, (because of the great irregularity of their mid- 
dle syllables, and constant agreement in their last vowel, and in the ter- 
minations arising from it in all Conjugations) cannot properly be said to 
be of any one Conjugation more than another ; for there is nothing, for 
example, mfricui, docui, elicui, amicui, or in frictum, doctum, elicitum, 
amictum, or in the parts that come from them, whereby to distinguish 
their Conjugations. 



PRIMA CONJUGATIO. 

AMO. 

Vox Activa. 
Praecipuae Partes. 
Praes. Indie. Perfect. 

Ara-o, am-avi, 

INDICATIVUS MODUS. 

Praesens. 

r l Am-o, 

3 2 Am-as, 

C 3 Am-at : 

( 1 Am-amus, 

1 2 Am-atis, 

C 3 Am-ant. 

Tmperfectum. 
r 1 Am-abam, 
) 2 Am-abas, 
C 3 Am-abat : 
f 1 Am-abamus, 
< 2 Am-abatis, 
C 3 Am-abant. 






a 






THE FIRST CONJUGATION. 

TO LOVE. 

The Active Voice. 
The Principal Parts. 
Sup. Praes. Infin. 

am-atum, am-are. 

THE INDICATIVE MOOD. 

The Present. 

1 1 Love, or do love, 

2 Thou lovest, or dost love, 

3 He loveth, or doth love : 

1 We love, or do love, 

2 Ye (or you) love, or do love, 

3 They love, or do love. 

The Imperfect. 

1 I loved, or did love, 

2 Thou lovedst, or didst love, 

3 He loved, or did love: 

1 We loved, or did love, 

2 Ye loved, or did love, 

3 They loved, or did love. 



1° 

CO 



tiO 



co 



Part II. — Chap, 

Perfectum, 

1 Am-avi, 
1 2 Am-avisti, 
. 3 Am-avit : 

1 Am-avimus, 
' 2 Am-avistis, 
, 3 Am-averunt vel -avere. 

Plusquamperfectum. 

1 Am-averam, 
1 2 Am-averas, 
. 3 Am-averat : 

1 Am-averamus, 

2 Am-averatis, 
. 3 Am-averant. 

Futurum, 

1 Am-abo, 

1 2 Am-abis, 

3 Am-abit : 

' 1 Am-abimus, 

2 Am-abitis, 
. 3 Am-abunt. 



III.— Of Verb. 

The Perfect. 

1 I have loved*, 

2 Thou hast loved, 

3 He hath loved : 

1 We have loved, 

2 Ye have loved, 

3 They have loved. 

The Plunerfect. 

1 I had loved, 

2 Thou hadst loved, 

3 He had loved : 

1 We had loved, 

2 Ye had loved, 

3 They had loved. 

The Future. 

1 I shall or will love, 

2 Thou shalt or wilt love, 

3 He shall or will love : 

1 We shall or will love, 

2 Ye shall or will love, 

3 They shall or will love. 



41 



SUBJUNCTIVUS MODUS. THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Praesens. The Present. 

' 1 Am-em, 1 I may or can love, 

} 2 Am-es, 2 Thou mayst or canst love 9 

' 3 Am-et : 3 He may or can love : 

" 1 Am-emus, 1 We may or can love, 

I 2 Am-etis, 2 F<e may or can love, 

[ 3 Am-ent. 3 T%ey way or can love, 

Imperfectum. The Imperfect. 

' 1 Am-arem, 1 / might, could, would, or s£ow/d 

} 2 Am-ares, 2 T%ow mightst, couldst, wouldst,&c. 

I 3 Am-aret : 3 He might, could, would, or should 
r 1 Am-aremus, 1 We might, could, would, or should 

1 2 Am-aretis, 2 Ye might, could, would, or should 

C 3 Am-arent. 3 They might, could, would, or should 



to 



3 

s; 



CO 



§ 



* Or, I loved or aVd /oa>e, 2% oh lovedst or g 7 /^ /owe, &c. as in the 
Imperfect 



3q 



42 Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 

Perfection. The Perfect. 

1 Am-averim, I I may have loved, 

2 Am-averis, 2 Thou mayst have loved, 
C 3 Am-averit : 3 He may have loved : 
C 1 Am-averimus, 1 We may have loved, 

< 2 Am-averitis, 2 Ye may have loved, 
C 3 Am-averint. 3 They may have loved. 

Plusquamperfectum. The Pluperfect. 

r 1 Am-avissem, 1 I might, could, woidd, &c. have or 

< 2 Am-avisses, 2 T7zow miglitst, couldst, &c. ^«y^ or 
C 3 Am-avisset : 3 He might, could, &c. have or 
C 1 Am-avissemus,l We might, could, &c. have or 

< 2 Am-avissetis, 2 Fe might, could, &c. /zat'e or 
' 3 Am-avissent. 3 They might, could, &c. have or 

Futurum. The Future, 

r 1 Am-avero, 1 / shall have loved, 

< 2 Ara-averis, 2 7%cw afoz// have loved, 
C 3 Am-averit : 3 i?i? s^«# /jai^ loved : 
r 1 Ani-averimus, 1 We shall have loved, 
} 2 Am-averitis, 2 Ftf shall have loved, 
C 3 Am-averint. 3 They shall have loved. 



5> 



IMPERATIVUS MODUS. THE IMPERATIVE MOOD. 






Praesens. 

2 Am-a vel am-ato, 

3 Am-ato : 

2 Am-ate re/ am-atote, 

3 Am-anto. 

INFINITIVUS MODUS. 

Pr^s. Am-are, 

Perf. Am-avisse, 

Fut. Am-aturumesseue/fuisse, 

PARTICIPIA. 
Praes. Am-ans, 
Fut. Am-aturus, -a, -urn, 

GERUNDIA. 

Norn. Am-andum, 
Gen. Am-andi, 



The Present. 

2 Love thou, or do thou love, 

3 Let him love ." 

2 Love ye, or do ye love, 

3 Let them love. 

THE INFINITIVE MOOD. 
Pres. To love. 
Perf. To have or had loved. 
Put. To be about to love. 

THE PARTICIPLES. 
Of the Present, Loving. 
Of the Future, About to love. 

THE GERUNDS. 

Nom. Loving. 
Gen. Of lovbig. 



Part IL—Chap. IIL—Of Verb. 43 

JDat. Am-ando. Dat. To loving. 

Ace. Am-andum. Ace. Loving. 

Abl. Am-ando. Abl. From, in or by loving. 

SUPINA. THE SUPINES. 

Prius, Am-atum. First, To love. 

Posterius, Am-atu. Last, To love, or to be loved. 



VOX PASSIVA. 



THE PASSIVE VOICE. 



Amor, 



amatus, 



I 3 



INDICATIVUS MODUS, 
Praesens. 

1 Am-or, 

2 Am-aris vel -are, 

3 Am-atur: 

1 Am-amur, 

2 Am-amini, 

3 Am-antur. 
Imperfectum. 

1 Am-abar, 

2 Am-abaris vel -abare, 

3 Am-abatur : 

1 Am-abamur, 

2 Am-abamini, 

3 Am-abantur. 
Perfectum. 

C 1 sum vel fui, 
Amatus s 2 es vel fuisti, 
3 est vel fuit : 
* 1 sumus vel fuimus, 
5 Amati < 2 estis vel fuistis, 

(_3 sunt, fuerunt v. fuere. 
Plusq uamperfectum. 
C 1 eram vel fueram, 
.gf < Amatus < 2 eras vel fueras, 
/ 3 erat vel fuerat : 

eramus vel fueramus, 

2 eratis vel fueratis, 

3 erant vel fuerant 
Futurum. 

1 Am-abor, 

2 Am-aberis vel -abere, 

3 Am-abitur : 



f! 

ii 
ii 



i 1 2 

lusq 

M i Amati ■? 2 i 
Ri l h 



THE INDICATIVE MOOD. 
The Present. 

1 I am loved, 

2 Thou art loved, 

3 He is loved: 

1 We are loved, 

2 Ye are loved, 

3 They are loved. 
The Imperfect. 

1 I was 

2 7%ow w«s£ [wert] 

3 iife was 

1 We were 

2 Fe w/^re 

3 Tliey were 
The Perfect. 

1 I have been 

2 Thou hast been 

3 He hath been 

1 We have been 

2 Ye have been 

3 They have been 



The Pluperfect. 



/ loved. 

J 



co 



1 i" had been 

2 Thou hadst been 

3 He had been 

1 We had been 

2 Ye had been 

3 They had been 
The Future. 

1 I shall or will be 

2 Thou shalt or wilt be 

3 Ife shall or wi// 6e 



^ loved. 



loved. 



44? Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 

. r 1 Am-abimur. 
,.» < 2 Am-abimini, 
^ Cs Am-abuntur. 

SUBJUNCTIVUS MODUS. 
Praesens. 



loved. 






1 Am-er, 

2 Am-eris vel -ere, 
S Am-etur : 

1 Am-emur, 

2 Am-emini, 

3 Am-entur. 
Imperfectum. 

1 Am-arer, 

2 Am-areris tW -arere, 

3 Am-aretur : 

1 Am-aremur, 

2 Am-aremini, 

3 Am-arentur. 



1 



j 



Perfectum. 

C 1 sim vel fuerim, 
! Amatus < 2 sis vel fueris, 
(_3 sit vel fuerit : 
^. ^ CI simus i'gZ fuerimus, 

<* < Amati < 2 sitis vel fueritis, 
^ *• f5 sint vel fuerint. 



to 



1 We shall or w/z'// fe 

2 Fe sA«// or zfi// be 

3 JVzej/ *Aa// or will be ) 
THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD 

The Present. 

1 i" may or can be 

2 Thou mayst or crt?z,?£ fo? 

3 He may or <?«« be 

1 JFtf ???#?/ or can be 

2 Fe ??zot/ or can be 

3 Z7z<?j/ may or c«?z fo 

The Imperfect. 

1 I might, could, would, &c. 1 

2 Thoumightst,couldst,S:c. I 

3 i/e? might, could, &c. 

1 JFtf might, could, &c. 

2 Fe might, could, Sec. 

3 7%cy might, could, Szc. J 

The Perfect. 

1 I may have been 

2 TA(m mayst have been 

3 He may have been 

1 We may have been 

2 Ye may have been 

3 They may have been J 

The Pluperfect. 

1 I might, could, &c. ha vs cr~) t: 



"1 

u 



Tft<m mightst, &e. ktv" or [ 
i7<? might, f.:c. hare or I ~^ 



Plusquamperfectum. 
~ C\ essem vel fuissem, 

.g 4 Amatus < 2 esses ueZ fuisses, 
02 *• £o esset re/ fuisset : 

. f ri essemus vel fuissemus, 1 We might, &c. have or 

,s ^ Amati <2 essetis vel fuissetis, 2 Ye might, &c. A«ye or 
fc* ' C^ essent i>e/ fuissent. 

Futurum. 

. C Cl fuero, 

.s fl -J Amatus -< 2 fueris, 
^ C C^ fuerit: 

. C Cl fuerimus, 

J < Amati -< 2 fueritis, 
^ £ £5 fuerint. 

IMPERATIVUS MODUS. 
Praese?is. 



i\ 



2 Am-are vel -ator, 

3 Am-ator : 



3 They might, Sec. have or J ^ 
The Future. 

1 I shall have been 

2 Thou shalt have been 

3 He shall have been I "$? 

1 We shall have been f ,© 

2 Ye shall have been 

3 They shall have been J 

THE IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
The Present. 

2 Be thou loved. 

3 Let him be loved : 



Part II.— Chap. IIL—Of Verb. 45 

» 2 Am-amini, 2 Be ye loved, 



3^ ( 3 Am-antor. 3 Let them be loved. 

INFINITIVUS MODUS. THE INFINITIVE MOOD. 
Praes. Am-ari. To be loved. 

Per/. Am-atum esse vel fuisse. To have or had been loved. 
Fut. Am-atum iri. To be about to be loved. 

PARTICIPIA. THE PARTICIPLES. 

Per/, temporis, Am-atus, -a, -urn. Of the Perfect, Loved. 
Futuri, Am-andus,-a,-um. Of the Future, To be loved. 



SECUNDA CONJUGATIO. 
VOX ACTIVA. 

Doceo, docui, doctum, docere. 
INDICATIVUS. 



Sing 






Plur. 




1 


2 


3 


1 


2 


3 


P^r. Doc-eo, 


-es, 


ret: 


-emus, 


-etis, 


-ent. 


Imp. Doc-ebam, 


-ebas, 


-ebat : 


-ebamus, 


-ebatis, 


-ebant. 


Per/. Doc-ui, 


-uisti, 


-uit : 


-uimus, 


-uistis, ) 


-uerunt, 
-uere. 


Plus. Doc-ueram, 


-ueras, 


-uerat : 


-ueramus, 


-ueratis, 


-uerant. 


Fut. Doc-ebo, 


-ebis, 


-ebit : 


-ebimus, 


-ebitis, 


-ebunt. 




SUBJUNCTIVUS. 






Pr. Doc-eam, 


-eas, 


-eat : 


-eamus, 


-eatis, 


-eant. 


Imp. Doc-erem, 


-eres, 


-eret : 


-eremus, 


-eretis, 


-erent. 


Perf. Doc-uerim, 


-ueris, 


-uerit : 


-uerimus, 


-ueritis, 


-uerint. 


Plus. Doc-uissem, 


-uisses, 


-uisset : 


-uissemus, 


-uissetis, 


-uissent. 


Fut. Doc-uero, 


-ueris, 


-uerit : 


-uerimus, 


-ueritis, 


-uerint. 



IMPERATIVUS. 

Praes. Doc- 5 " e ' -eto: 5 ' ete > -ento. 

( -eto, ( -etote, 

INFINITIVUS. SUPINA. PARTICIPIA. GERUNDIA. 

Pr. Doc-ere. 1 Doc-tum. Pr. Doc-ens. Doc-endum, 

Perf. Doc-uisse. 2 Doc-tu. Fut. Doc-turus. Doc-endi, 
Fut. Doc-turum Doc-endo. 

esse vel fuisse. 



46 Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 

VOX PASSIVA. 

Doceor, doctus, doceri. 

INDICATIVUS. 

Sing. Plur. 

Pr. Doc-eor, ; * » -etur : -emur, -emini, -entur. 
( -ere, 

Im. Doc-ebar, ) " e ans > -ebatur : -ebamur, -ebamini, -ebantur. 
Fut. Doc-ebor, 5 " G b enSj -ebitur : -ebimur, -ebimini, -ebuntur 

SUBJUNCTIVUS. 

Pr. Doc-ear, S- (an ^ -eatur: -eamur, -eamini, -eantur. 
( -eare, ' 

1m. Doc-erer, ) > -eretur: -eremur, -eremini, -erentur. 

( -erere, ' 

IMPERATIVUS. 

Praes. Doc- 5 " ere > -etor : -emini, -entor. 

( -etor, ' 

INFINITIVUS. PARTICIPIA. 



Praes. Doc-eri. 

Perf. Doc-tum esse vc/fuisse. 

Fut. Doc-tum iri. 



Perf. Doc-tus, -a, -urn. 
Fut. Doc-endus, -a, -um, 



TERTIA CONJUGATIO. 

VOX ACTIVA. 

Lego, legi, lectunu legere. 

INDICATIVUS. 

Sing. Plur. 

1 2 3 I 2 s 

Praes. Leg-o, -is, -it : -imus, -itis, -unt. 
Imp. Leg-ebam, -ebas, -ebat : -ebamus, -ebatis, -ebant. 

Perf. Leg-i, -isti, -it : -imus, -istis, -erunt, -ere. 

Plus. Leg-eram, -eras, -erat : -eramus, -eratis, -erant. 

Fut. Leg-am, -es, -et: -emus, -etis, -ent. 

SUBJUNCTIVUS. 

Praes. Leg-am, -as, -at: -amus, -atis, -ant, 

Imp. Leg-erem, -eres, -eret : -eremus, -eretis, -erent. 



Part II*— Chap. III.— Of Verb. 
Perf. Leg-erim, -eris, -erit : -erimus, -eritis, -erint. 
Plus. Leg-issem, -isses, -isset : -issemus, -issetis, -issent. 
Put. Leg-ero, -eris, -erit : -erimus, -eritis, -erint. 
IMPERATIVUS. 

p rr »* toff. 5 * e > jfr» • S "^ e ' 



47 



Leg- 5 "?' 



-lto : 



-unto. 



-ltote, 

INFINITIVUS. SUPINA. PARTICIPIA. GERUNDIA. 
Praes. Leg-ere. 1 Lec-tum. Pr. Leg-ens. Leg-endum, 
Perf. Leg-isse. 2 Lec-tu. Fut. Lec-turus. Leg-endi, 



Fut. Lec-turum 
esse vel fuisse. 



Leg-endo. 



VOX PASSIVA. 

Legor, lectus, 

INDICATIVUS. 

Sing. 

Pr. Leg-or, 5 ■ eris> -itur : 
( -ere, , 

Im. Leg-ebar, ) '-ebatur : -ebamur, -ebamini, -ebantur. 

/ -eDare, 

Fut. Leg-ar, 5 ~ eris > -etur : -emur, -emini, -entur. 
( -ere, 



legi. 

Plur. 
-imur, -imini, 



-untur. 



SUBJUNCTIVUS. 

-amur, -amini, -antur. 



Pr. Leg-ar, \ " ans ' -atur 
( -are, 

Imp. Leg-erer, J } -eretur : -eremur, -eremini, -erentur 

^ — ei ere, 



Praes. 



Leg- 5 " ere ' 
8 I -ltor, 



IMPERATIVUS. 

-itor : -imini, 



-untor. 



INFINITIVUS. 
Praes. Leg-i. 

Perf. Lec-tum esse vel fuisse. 
Fut. Lec-tum iri. 



PARTICIPIA. 

Perf Lec-tus, -a, -um. 
Fut. Leg-endus, -a, -um. 



48 Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 

QUARTA CONJUGATIO. 

VOX ACTIVA. 

Audio, audivi, auditum, audire. 

IXDICATIVUS. 

Si?ig. Plur. 

1 2 3 1 2 3 

Pr. Aud-io, -is, -it : -imus, -itis, -iunt. 

Im. Aud-iebam, -iebas, -iebat : -iebamus, -iebatis, -iebant. 

Perf. Aud-ivi, -ivisti, -ivit : -ivimus, -ivistis,5; verun ' 

6-ivere. 

Plus. Aud-iveram, -iveras, -iverat : -iveramus, -iveratis,-iverant. 

Fut. Aud-iam, -ies, -iet : -iemus, -ietis, -ient. 

SUBJUNCTIVUS. 
Pr. Aud-iam, -ias, -iat : -iamus, -iatis, -iant. 
Im. Aud-irem, -ires, -iret : -iremus, -iretis, -irent. 
Perf. Aud-iverim, -iveris, -iverit : -iverimus, -iveritis, -iverint. 
Plus. Aud-ivissem, -ivisses,-ivisset :-ivissemus,-ivissetis,-ivissent. 
Fut. Aud-ivero, -iveris, -iverit : -iverimus, -iveritis, -iverint. 

IMPERATIVUS. 

Pr. Aud- 5 1' -ito : 5 "! te > -iunto. 

I -ito, I -ltote, 

INFINITIVUS. SUPINA. PARTICIPIA. GERUNDIA. 

Pr. Aud-ire. 1 Aud-itum. Pr. Aud-iens. Aud-iendum, 

Perf. Aud-ivisse. 2 Aud-itu. Fut. Aud-iturus. Aud-iendi, 

Fut. Aud-iturum Aud-iendo. 

esse vel fuisse. 



VOX PASSIVA, 

Audior, auditus, audiri. 

IXDICATIVUS. 

Sing. Plur. 

Pr. Aud-ior, ) "! ns ' -itur : -imur, -imini, -iuntur. 
( -ire, 

Im. Aud-iebar, ) . _ J -iebatur:-iebamur,-iebamini,-iebantur. 
( -lebare, 



.FW.Aud-iar, 5 "* ens > -ietur: -iemur, -iemini, -ientur. 
( -lere, 

SUBJUNCTIVUS. 

Pr. Aud-iar, 5 m ] ans > -iatur : -iamur. -iamini, -iantur. 
( -lare, 

Im. Aud-irer, > . * -iretur : -iremur, -iremini, -irentur. 
{ -irere, 



Part II.— Chap. III.— Of Verb. 49 

IMPERATIVUS. 



\ -* ire > 
' c -itor, 



Praes. Aud- ] ? ' itor : -lmmi, -mntor. 



INFINITIVUS. PARTICIPIA. 

Praes. Aud-iri. I Perf. Aud-itus, -a, -urn. 

Per/. Aud-itumessew?/fuisse. Fut. Aud-iendus, -a, -um. 
Put. Aud-itum iri. 1 

^f Note, That in the Examples of the Second, Third, and Fourth 
Conjugations, we have omitted such parts of the Passive Voice 
as are supplied by the Participle Perfect with the Verb Sum, 
viz. The Perfect and Pluperfect of the Indicative, and the Per- 
fect, Pluperfect, and Future of the Subjunctive, as being the 
same in all Conjugations with the Example of the First, the 
change of the Participle only excepted : But it is carefully to 
be observed, that the Participle being an Adjective, must agree 
in Gender, Number, and Case, with its Substantive, or, which 
is the same thing, with the Person before it. 

I. REMARKS showing when a LATIN VERB is to be ren- 
dered otherwise in ENGLISH than in the foregoing Examples. 

1. VV hen the continuation of a thing is signified, the English Verb 
may be varied in all its Tenses by the Participle in ing, with the Verb 
am; as, 

Pres. I am reading, 

Imp. I was reading, 

Perf. I have been reading, 

Plup. I had been reading, 

Fut. I shall be reading, J 

So likewise in the Passive Voice, The House is building, Domus aedi- 
jicatur ; The Lesson was prescribing, Lectio praescribebatur. Some- 
times a is set before the Participle ; as, While the House is a-building. 
It is a-doing. He is a-dying. 

2. When a Question is asked, the Nominative Case or Person is set 
after the Verb, or the sign of the Verb ; as, Love I ? Do I Love ? Can 
I Love ? Should he be loved ? 

3. We have made thou the second Person Singular, to distinguish it 
from the Plural : But it is customary with us, (as also with the French, 
and others,) though we speak but to one particular person, to use the plu- 
ral you, and never thou, but when we address ourselves to Almighty God, 
or otherwise when we signify familiarity, disdain, or contempt. 

4. The Perfect of the Indicative is often Englished as the Imperfect ; 
as, Nunquam amavi hunc hominem, I never loved, or did love, this man. 
See a train of Examples in Ovid. Metamorph. lib. 1. from v. 21. to 39. 

5. The Perfect Tense is frequently Englished by had after antequam, 

C 



fl read. 
j I did read. 
for ^ I have read. 
J I had read. 
LI shall read. 



50 Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 

postquam, ubi or ut, for postquam : as, Postquam superavimus Isth- 
mum, After we had [were] passed over the Isthmus, Ovid. Haec ubi dic- 
ta dedit, When he had spoken these words, Liv. Ut me salutavit, statim 
Romam prqfectus est, After he had saluted me, ^-c. Cic. 

6. We have chosen may, can, might, could, &c. for the English of the 
Subjunctive Mood, because these are the most frequent signs of it, and 
distinguish it best from other Moods : But very often it is the same with 
the Indicative, save only that it hath some Conjunction or Indefinite word 
before it ; such as, if, seeing, lest, that, although, I wish, <%c. ; as, Si a- 
mem, If I love ; Ne amem, Lest I love ; Causa est cur amem, It is the 
cause why I love, Ovid. And frequently it hath both ; as, Oro ut ames, 
I entreat that you may love, Idem. 

7. The Present of the Subjunctive after quasi, tanquam, and the like, 
is sometimes Englished as the Imperfect; as, Quasi intelligant qualis sit, 
As if they understood what kind of person he is, Cic. 

8. When a question is asked, the Present of the Subjunctive is fre- 
quently Englished by shall or should; as, Eloquar an sileam? Shall I 
speak or be silent ? Virg. Singula quid referam, Why should I mention 
every thing? Ovid. Likewise after Non est quod; as, Non est (supple 
causa) quod eas, There is no reason why you should go, or you need not 
go. Sometimes it is Englished by would ; as, In f acinus jurasse putes, 
You would think they had sworn to [commit] wickedness, Ovid. 

9. We have Englished the Perfect of the Subjunctive in rim, by may 
have, (as, Nefrustra hi tales viri venerint, That such men as these may 
not have come in vain, Cic. ; Forsitan audieris, You may perhaps have 
heard it,) to distinguish it from the Present and Pluperfect, by the signs of 
which it is also most frequently Englished ; as, Ut sic dixerim, That I may 
so speak. Ubi ego audiverim ? Where should I have heard it? Unushomo 
tantas strages ediderit? Could one man make so great a slaughter? Virg. 
Fortasse errarim ? Perhaps I might be in an error ? Plin. Oratores quos 
viderim peritissimi, The ablest orators I have seen [or could see,] Quinctil. 

10. This Perfect in rim sometimes inclines very much to a future sig- 
nification ; and then it is Englished by should, would, could, can, will, 
shall; as, Citius crediderim, I should sooner believe, Juv. ; Libenter au- 
dierim, I would gladly hear, Cic. ; Ciceronem cuicunque eorum facile op- 
posuerim, I could easily match Cicero with any of them, Quinctil. ; Non 
facile dixerim, I cannot well tell, Cic. ; Nee tamen excluserim alios, And 
yet I will not exclude others, Plin. ; Si paululum modo quid te fugerit, e- 
go perierim, If you but trip in the least, I shall be undone, Ter. But all 
these ways of speaking, though indeed they respect the future as to the exe- 
cution, yet they seem also to look a little beyond it, to a time when their 
futurity shall be past ; and so come near in signification to the future in ro. 

11. The Perfect of the Subjunctive after quasi, tanquam, and the like, 
may sometimes be Englished by had; as, Quasi affuerim, As if I had 
been present, Plaut. ; Perinde ac si jam vicerint, As if they had already 
overcome, Cic. 

12. The Pluperfect in issem is sometimes Englished by should : as, 
Imperaret quod vellet ; quodcunque imperavisset, se esse facturos : He 
might command what he pleased ; whatever he commanded [should com- 
mand] they would do, Caes. Foedus ictum est his legibus, ut cujus po- 
puli cives eo certamine vicissent, is alteri imperaret, An agreement was 
made on these terms, that that people whose countrymen should be vie- 



Part II.— Chap. III.— Of Verb. 51 

torious in that combat, should have the sovereignty over the other, Liv. 
And this happens when a thing is signified as future at a certain past time 
referred to ; and commonly takes place, when what was formerly said di- 
rectly is afterwards recited indirectly ; as, Ne dubita, dabitur quodcunque 
optaris, Doubt not, whatsoever thou shalt choose shall be given thee, Ovid. 
Sol Phaethonti facturum se esse dixit, quicquid optasset ; The Sun told 
Phaeton, that he would do whatsoever he should choose, Cic. ; where it is 
worth noticing, That what was the Future of the Subjunctive in the direct 
speech, becomes the Pluperfect in the indirect recital of it. See Turner's 
Exercises, p. 21. &c. But, as we have said, p. 38. the Pluperfect, not- 
withstanding its coming in the place of a Future, still retains its own pro- 
per compound time, that is, it was prior to a thing now past at the time of 
the recital by Cicero, though it was future when first spoken by the Sun. 
And therefore there is no reason for making this termination in issem, a 
Future tense, as Mr. Turner does. 

13. Though the proper English of the Future in ro be shall have, yet 
generally the have or the shall, and frequently both, are omitted ; as, 
Qui Antonium oppresserit^ is bellum confecerit, He who shall cut off An- 
tony, shall put an end to the war, Cic. ; Hand desinam donee perfecero 
hoc, I will not give over till I have effected this, Ter. ; Si negaverit, If 
he denies it, Cic. Sometimes it is Englished by will; as, Dixerit fortasse 
aliquis, Somebody will perhaps say, Cic. ; Aut consolando, aut consilio, 
aut re,juvero, I will assist you either by comforting you, or with counsel, 
or with money, Idem. But though we thus render the Future in ro in 
our language, and though (which is more material) very frequently it and 
the Future of the Indicative are used promiscuously ; yet I cannot be 
persuaded, that in any instance, the formal significations of these are the 
same, as Mr. Johnson contends, p. 339. but still think, with the great Vos- 
sius, that the future in ro is always a Future-perfect, that is, that there is 
a time insinuated when a thing yet future shall be finished or past, and that 
even when a Future of the Indicative is joined with it, which in order of 
time should be done before it ; as, Pergratum mihi feceris si disputabis, 
You shall have done [shall do] me a great favour, if you shall dispute, Cic. 
For what hinders that we may not faintly hint at the finishing of an action 
yet future, without formally considering the finishing of another action on 
which it depends ; and on the contrary ? But if the promiscuous usage of 
Tenses one for another be sufficient to make them formally the same, then 
we shall confound all Tenses, and overthrow the very arguments Mr. 
Johnson makes use of against Sanctius, with respect to the Tenses of the 
Infinitive. 

14. The to of the Infinitive is generally omitted after May, Can, Might, 
Would, Could, (which are sometimes Verbs themselves, and not the bare 
signs of them : ) also after Must, Bid, Dare, Let, Help, and Make. 

15. But what is most to be regarded in the Infinitive is, that when it 
hath an Accusative before it, it is commonly Englished as the Indicative 
Mood, the Particle that being sometimes put before it, but oftener under- 
stood. And it is carefully to be remarked, that the same Tenses of the 
Infinitive are differently Englished, according as the preceding Verb va- 
ries its Tenses, — as will appear in the following Scheme ; 

C 2 



52 Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 

r Dicit me scribere, He says [that] I write. 

< Dixit me scribere, He said [that] I was writing. 
CDicet me scribere, He shall say [that] I am writing. 

f" Dicit me scripsisse, He says [that] I wrote, or did write. 

< Dixit me scripsisse, He said [that] I had written. 

£Dicet me scripsisse, He shall say[that]I have written,or did write 

C Dicit me scripturum [esse] He says [that] I will write. 
■< Dixit me scripturum [esse] He said [that] I would write. 
CDicet me scripturum esse] He shall sav [that] I will write. 
TDicit me scripturum fuisse] He says [that] I would have written. 

< Dixit me scripturum [fuisse] He said [that] I would have written. 
CDicet me scripturum [fuisse] He shall say [that] I would have written. 

It will be of great use to accustom the learner to render the Infinitive 
after this manner, both in English and Latin, especially after he has been 
taught something of construction : And then to cause him vary the Accu- 
sative me into te, se, ilium, hominem, foeminam, &c. and these again into the 
Plural, nos, vos, se, illos, homines, foeminas, &c. But he must be careful 
to make the Participles agree with them in Gender, Number, and Case. 

Note 1. That when the preceding Verb is of the Present or Future 
Tense, the Fut. of the Infinit. with esse, is rendered by shall or will; and 
when it is of the Perfect Tense, the Fut. of the Infinit. is rendered by 
would, as in the examples above; and sometimes by should; as, Dixi te 
sciturum esse, I said that you should know. 

Note 2. That when the preceding Verb is of the Imperfect or Pluper- 
fect Tense, the English of the Infinitive is the same as when it is of the 
Perfect. 

16. The Perfect of the Indicative and Subjunctive Passive, made up 
with Sum or Sim, are Englished by am, art, is, are, instead of have been, 
when the thing is signified to be just now past ; as, Vulneratus sum, I 
am wounded ; Opus jinitum est, The work is finished ; Cum tempora mu- 
tata sint, Since the times are changed. 

17. When it is made up by fui, it is frequently Englished by was, wast, 
were, wert ; as, Roma fuit capta, Rome was taken : As is also what is 
called the Pluperfect with eram and essem ; as, Labor Jinitus erat, The 
labour was finished ; Si labor Jinitus esset, If the labour were finished. 



II. REMARKS on the LATIN CONJUGATIONS. 

1. A. great part of the Passive Voice, and some of the Active, is made 
up of two of its own Participles and the auxiliary Verb Sum, (of which 
you have the full Conjugation, p. 60.) after this manner : 
^Sum or fui "*| 

eram or fueram 
The Participle . sim or fuerim 
Perfect with ] essem or fuissem j 
fuero 
esse or fuisse 




i 



esse or fuisse £ Fut. Infinit. Active. 



The Participle 
Fut. Act. with 

2. Having, p. 38. laid it down as a probable opinion, that every part of 
a Verb, with all its Participles, have a certain fixed time, simple or com- 
pound, which thev formally and of their own nature signify, it will perhaps 
be here expected that I should account for that great variety that is found 



Part IL— Chap. III.— Of Verb. 53 

in the Passive Voice. To put this matter in the clearest light I am able, 
I must premise another division of the Tenses, viz. into passing and past ; 
or, into such as import the continuance of an action or thing, without re- 
gard to the ending or finishing of it ; and such as import that the thing 
is finished (or to be finished) and done. Of the first sort are the Present, 
Imperfect, and Future- imperfect ; of the second sort are the Perfect, Plu- 
perfect, and Future-perfect. See p. 37. From this division of the Tenses, 
together with what we have formerly said, we are. furnished with an easy- 
method of distinguishing all the parts of the Passive. Thus, for instance, 
let the subject of discourse be the building of a house. 1. When I say, 
Domus aedificatur, I mean that it is just now a-building, but not finished. 
2. When Aedijicabatur ; that it was then, or at a certain past time^ a-build- 
ing, but not then finished. 3. Aedificabitur ; that some time hence it shall 
be a-building, without any formal regard to the finishing of it. But 
when I make use of the Participle-perfect, I always signify a thing com- 
pleted and ended; but with these subdistinctions : 1. Aedificata est; I 
mean simply, that it is finished, without any regard to the time when. 2. 
Aedificata fuit ; it is finished, and some time since has intervened. 3. Ae- 
dificata erat ; it was finished at a certain past time referred to, with which 
it was cotemporary. 4. Aedificata fuerat ; it was finished before a cer- 
tain past time referred to, to which it was prior. 5. Aedificata erit ; it 
shall be finished some time hereafter, either without regard to a particular 
time when, or with respect to a certain time yet future, with which its 
finishing shall be cotemporary. 6. And lastly, Aedificata fuerit ; it shall 
be finished and past before another thing yet future, to which its finishing 
shall be prior. And thus we have nine different times, or complications of 
times without confounding them with one another. But then how comes 
it to pass, that these are so frequently used promiscuously ? I answer, That 
this proceeds from one or more of these four reasons : 1. Because it very 
frequently happens in discourse, that we have no occasion particularly to 
consider these various relations and complications of times ; and it is the 
same thing to our purpose, whether the thing is, or was done, or a-doing ; 
or whether it was done just now, or some time ago ; or whether another 
thing was (or shall be) cotemporary with, or prior to it ; and the matter 
being thus, we reckon ourselves at liberty to take several parts of the Verb 
at random, as being secure not only of being understood, but also, that in 
these circumstances, whatever we pitch on, even when examined by the 
rules above, shall be found literally true. 2. It is usual with us to state our- 
selves as present with, and as it were eye-witnesses of, the things we relate, 
though really they were transacted long before ; whence it is that we fre- 
quently use the Present instead of some past time. 3, It is to be remarked, 
that there are some Verbs, the action whereof is in some sense finished 
when begun ; in which case it will sometimes be all one whether we use 
the passing or past Tenses. And, 4. The Present Tense (which, strictly 
speaking is gone before we pronounce it) is generally taken in a large ac- 
ceptation, and sometimes used for the Future, when we signify that the ex- 
ecution is very near, or (according to Perizonius) when, together with the 
action, we take in also the preparation to it. The brevity we are confined 
to will not allow us to illustrate these things with examples : But by them, 
I thkik we may account for the promiscuous usage of the Tenses, in both 
Voices ; and what cannot be reduced to these, seems to be an abuse of the 

C 3 



54? Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 

language, and being very rarely to be met with, and perhaps only among 
the poets, ought not to be made a common standard. I shall only add, 
for a proof that these Tenses are not always to be used indifferently, that 
when we signify a thing to be just now finished, we cannot use fui, or 
fuerim, oxfuisse, but sum, sim, and esse. 

3. Whether the learner should be obliged to get by heart these parts of 
the Passive that are supplied by Sum, or if they should be referred to con- 
struction (to which they seem more naturally to belong,) I leave to the dis- 
cretion of the master, and therefore have put them in a smaller character. 

4. Besides these parts which are thus made up, all the other parts may 
be resolved into its own Participles, and the verb Sum, though their sig- 
nifications are not precisely the same ; as, 

Amo, amabam, amavi, amaveram, amabo. 

c - c 9 ero amans, or 

bum amans, eram amans, fui amans, fueram amans, < 

£sum amaturus. 

Amor, amabar, amabor, amer, amarer. 

Sum amatus, eram amatus, ero amatus, amatus sim, amatus essem. 

5. The Participle in rus with the Verb Sum is frequently used instead 
of the Future of the Indicative, especially if purpose or intention is sig- 
nified ; as, Profecturus sum, or Proficiscar, I will go, or I am to go : 
And with sim and essem, instead of the Future- imperfect or Pluperfect 
of the Subjunctive ; as, Non dubito quia sit fact urus, I doubt not but he 
would do it ; A r o» dubitavi quin esset facturus, I doubted not but he 
would do it ; and not quin fecerit, ox facer et, oxfecisset. 

6. We have not joined ero with fuero for the Future of the Subjunctive, 
because we thought it incongruous to couple words of different moods : 
Though it must be owned, that it comes nearer in signification to the Fut. 
of the Subjunctive than that of the Indicative ; as, Ovid. Qui cum victus 
erit, is much the same as victus fuerit : And so these ancient Lawyers, 
Scaevola, Brutus, and Manilius, understood the words of the Atinian 
Law, Quod subreptum erit, ejus rei aeterna auctoritas esto. But that a 
a Preterite time is there insinuated, is owing not to the word erit, but to 
the Preterite Participle with which it is joined, as they learnedly argue. 
See Aulus Gellius, lib. XVII. cap. 7. 

7. We have omitted the termination minor in the second person Plural 
of the Imperative, not thinking it fit to make that an ordinary standard 
(as the common Rudiments do) which is to be found only once or twice 
in Plautus, Epid. 5. 2. Facto opere arbitraminor ; and Pseud. 2. 2. Pa- 
riter progrediminor. 

8. For the same reason we have excluded the ancient termination asso 
in the Future Subjunctive of the first conjugation ; as, excantasso, in the 
laws of the 12 tables; levasso, in Ennius; abjurasso, invitasso, coenasso, 
irritasso, servasso, &c. in Plautus : for excantavero, levavero, &c. To 
which may be added esso of the second conjugation ; as, licessit, Idem ; 
prohibessit, Cic. for licuerit, prohibuerit : To these some ad&jusso, for 
jussero, in that of Virg. Aen. 11. v. 467. 

Caetera, qua jusso, mecum manus inferat arma. 
But though I was once of that opinion, yet I now incline with Vossius 
to think that it is only a Syncope ; but not for the reason brought for it 
by him, namely, that the other examples in sso change r into ss, as, levaro, 
levasso ; but because I believe these old Futures were formed, not from the 
common Futures in ero, as he supposes, but from the second Person Sing. 



Part II.— Chap. III.— Of Verb. 55 

of the Present of the Indie, by adding so; as, levas, levasso ; prohibes, pro- 
hibesso : According to which rule, jubeo must have formedjubesso, notjusso. 

9. Upon the same account we have omitted the future of the Infinitive 
in assere, formed from asso ; as, impetrassere, reconciliassere, expugnas- 
sere, in Plautus, for impetraturum esse, &c. 

10. Though we frequently meet with amaturus and amatus esse velfuis- 
se, &c. in the Nom. as, Dicitur amaturus esse ; yet we have contented our- 
selves with the Accusative amaturum and amatum, as most common, re- 
serving the distinction between these to construction. [See p. 85.] 

11. The Future of the Infinitive Passive is made up of the First Supine 
and iri the Infinitive Passive of eo ; and therefore it is not varied in Num- 
bers and Genders, as the parts made up of the Participle with Sum, 

12. But the Supine with ire is not the Future of the Infinitive Active, 
as some teach ; for such phrases as these, Amatum ire, Doctum ire, are 
rather of the Present than Future Tense. 

13. The Participle in dus with esse zxidfuisse, is not properly the Fu- 
ture of the Infinitive Passive, as is commonly believed : For it does not so 
much import futurity, as necessity, duty, or merit. For there is a great 
difference between these two sentences, Dicit literas a se scriptum iri, and 
Dicit literas a se scribendas esse ; the first signifying, That a letter will 
be written by him, or, That he will write a letter ; and the second, That a 
letter must be written by him, or, He is obliged to write a letter. For 
though Sanctius and Messieurs de Port Royal contend that this Partici- 
ple is sometimes used for simple futurity, yet I think Perizonius and 
Johnson have clearly evinced the contrary. 

14. It is to be noted, that the Imperative Mood wants the first Person 
both Singular and Plural, because no man can or needs command or ex- 
hort himself: Or, if he does, he must justle himself out of "the first into 
the second Person ; as in that of Catullus speaking to himself, At iu, Ca- 
tulle, destinatus obdura ; But you, Catullus, continue obstinate. 

15. The Present of the Subjunctive is most frequently used instead of 
the Imperative, especially in forbidding, after Ne, nemo, nullus, &c. : as 
valeas, farewell, for vale: Ne facias, Do it not, rather than nefac. And 
sometimes the Future of the Subjunctive ; as, Tu videris, See you to it; Ne 
dixeris, Don't say it. And sometimes also the Future of the Indicative ; 
as, Non occides, Thou shalt not kill, for Ne occide, or occidito. Sed valebis, 
meaque negotia videbis, Cic. ; i. e. Sed vale, meaque negotia vide. Referes 
ergo kaec et nuncius ibis Pelidae genitori, Virg. ; i. e. refer et ito. But it 
is to be remarked, that none of these are proper Imperatives : For to the 
first is understood, oro, rogo, peto, or the like, with ut ; as also to the second, 
with ut understood, or ne expressed ; and the third is only a command by 
consequence, because of the authority, influence, or power of the speaker : 
For which reason, and to keep the Moods from interfering with one 
another, we have excluded these from the Imperative ; though the com- 
mon Rudiments take in the first, and Alvarus the second and third. 
However, it is observable, that we show most civility and respect when 
we use the Subjunctive, and most authority by the Future of the Indica- 
tive, and nto of the Imperative ; which last is the ordinary strain in which 
laws are delivered. But this rule is not always followed. 

16. The ris of the second Person Passive is more usual than re ; and 
erunt of the Perfect of the Indicative Active than ere; especially in prose ; 
in wnich, if a vowel follow, they are very rarely to be met with. 

C4 



56 



Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 



III. REMARKS upon ENGLISH VERBS. 

1. An English Verb hath only two Tenses, distinguished by different Ter- 
minations, and both in the Active Voice, viz. the Present and Preterite. 
The Present is the Verb itself, and the Preterite is commonly made by 
adding ed to it, or d, when it ends in e; as, Fill, filled; Love, loved. 

2. All the other parts of the Active, and the whole Passive, is made up 
©f the auxiliary verbs, Do, have, shall, will, may, can, and am ; as in page 
59, and in the example, To love, page 40, &c. 

3. An English Verb hath different terminations for the Persons of the 
Singular Number. The Present hath three or four. The First Person is 
the Verb itself ; the second ends in est or st ; the third in eM, es, ors. The 
Preterite hath only two ; the first commonly ending in ed, and the second 
in est or st. But the third Pers. Sing, of the Pret. and all the Persons Plur. 
both of it and the Pres. cannot otherwise be distinguished than by the 
Nom. before them : which therefore can never be omitted, as in the Latin. 

4. We have two Participles, the Present ending always in ing, and the 
Preterite ending regularly in ed, but very frequently in en and t. 

5. There are a great many Irregular English Verbs ; but it is to be not- 
ed, 1. That that Irregularity relates only to the termination of the Pre- 
terite Tense, and the Passive Participle. 2. That it reaches only such 
words as are native, and originally English. 3. That it is to be found 
only in words of one syllable, or derived from words of one syllable. 4. 
That where the Preterite is regular, the Passive Participle is the same 
with it Except hewed, mowed, showed, snowed, sowed; which have hewn, 
mown, shown, snown, sown. 

6. These Irregularities may be reduced to the following heads : 

(1.) The d is changed into t after c, ch, sh, f, k, p, x, and after s and 
th, when pronounced hard ; and sometimes after I, m, n, r, when a short 
vowel goes before it ; as, plac't, snatch'^fish't, walk't, dwelt, smelt. But 
when a long vowel goes before p, it is either shortened, or changed into 
a short one ; as, kept, slept, wept, crept, swept, leapt, from keep, sleep, 
weep, creep, sweep, leap : As also sometimes before I, m, n, r, and v turned 
into/, Q.S, feel, felt ; dream, dreamt; mean, meant ; leave, left. 

(2.) When the Present ends in d or t, the Preterite is sometimes the 
same with it ; as, read, cast, hurt, burst, hit, quit : And when two vowels 
precede, the last is left out ; as, spread, spred; lead, led ; feed, fed ; bleed, 
Med; meet, met. When a consonant comes before d, it is sometimes 
changed into t; as, bend, bent ; lend, lent; send, sent.; rend, rent; gird, girt. 

(3.) Most of the other Irregular Verbs may be comprehended under 
the following lists : 

I. Such as have their Preterite and Participle Passive the same. 
Awake, awoke. Find, found. Pay, paid. Sting, stung. 
Abide, abode. Flee, fled. Say, said. Swing, swung. 
Beseech, besought. Fling, flung. Seek, sought. Swim, swum. 



Bind, 


bound. 


Grind, 


ground. 


Sell, 


sol^. 


Teach, 


taught. 


Bring, 


brought. 


Gild, 


gilt. 


Sit, 


sat. 


Tell, 


told. 


Buy, 


bought. 


Hang, 


hung. 


Shine, 


shone. 


Think, 


thought. 


Catch, 


caught. 


Hear, 


heard. 


Spin, 


spun. 


Work, 


wrought. 


Big, 


dug. 


Lay, 


laid. 


Spring, 


sprung. 


Win, 


won. 


Drink, 


drunk. 


Lose, 


lost. 


Stand, 


stood. 


Wind, 


wound. 


Fight, 


fought. 


Make, 


made. 


Stick, 


stuck. 


Wring, 


wrung. 



Part II.— Chap. III.— Of Verbs. 
II. Such as have the Preterite and Participle different; as, 



Bear, 


bore, 


born. 


Freeze 


, froze, 


frozen. 


Shrink, shrank,shrunk. 


Begir-, 


began, 


begun. 


Get, 


got, 


gotten. 


Sink, sank, sunk. 


Bid, 


bade, 


bidden. 


Give, 


gave, 


given. 


Slay, slew, slain. 


Beat, 


beat, 


beaten. 


Go, 


went, 


gone. 


Slide, slid, slidden. 


Bite, 


bit, 


bitten. 


Grow, 


grew, 


grown. 


Smite, smote, smitten. 


Blow, 


blew, 


blown. 


Hew, 


hewed, hewn. 


Speak, spoke, spoken. 


Chide, 


chid, 


chidden. 


Hide, 


hid, 


hidden. 


Spit, spat, spitten. 


Choose, 


chose, 


chosen. 


Hold, 


held, 


holden. 


Strike, struck, stricken. 


Cleave, 


clove, 


cleft. 


Know, 


knew, 


known. 


Strive, strove, striven. 


Come, 


came, 


come. 


Lie, 


lay, 


lain. 


Swear, swore, sworn. 


Crow, 


crew, 


crow'd. 


Ride, 


rode, 


ridden. 


Swell, s wdl' d, s woln . 


Dare, 


durst, 


dared. 


Ring, 


rang, 


rung. 


Take, took, taken. 


Do, 


did, 


done. 


Rise, 


rose, 


risen. 


Tear, tore, torn. 


Draw, 


drew, 


drawn. 


Run, 


ran, 


run. 


Thrive, throve, thriven. 


Drive, 


drove, 


driven. 


See, 


saw, 


seen. 


Throw, threw, thrown. 


Eat, 


ate, 


eaten. 


Seeth, 


sod, 


sodden. 


Tread, trod, trodden. 


Fall, 


fell, 


fallen. 


Shake, 


shook. 


, shaken. 


, Wear, wore, worn. 


Fly, 


flew. 


flown, 


Shear, 


shore, 


shorn. 


Weave,wove, woven. 



Forsake, forsook, forsaken, Shoot, shot, shotten. Write, wrote, written. 

These Preterites, bare, share, sivare, tare, ware, clave, gat, begat, for- 
gat, brake, spake, slang, sprang, swang, wan, stank, swank, are seldom 
used: But beseech' 'd, catch' d, work'd, digged, gilded, girded, hang'd, swam, 
writ, for besought, caught, &c. are frequently to be met with. 

Note 1. That when the Verb ends in one Consonant, that consonant 
is for the most part doubled before ing, ed, est, edst, and eth ; as, worship, 
worshipping, worshipped, worshippest, worshippedst, worshippeth : As 
also before en ; as, bid, bidden. 

Note 2. That the Apostrophus (which was become too common in 
English Verbs, as lovd, lovst, for loved, lovest,) begins now to be disused 
by the most polite writers in prose ; but poets still use it, though not so 
much as formerly. 

Note 3. That the Preterite Active, and the Participle Passive (when 
one word serves for both) are thus distinguished : When it hath nothing 
before it but the Nominative alone or have or had with it, it is the Pre- 
terite Active ; but when it hath any part of the helping verb am, it is 
the Participle Passive. 

Except come, gone, run, set, risen, fallen, grown, withered, and such like 
Intransitive Verbs, which have frequently the Passive signs, am, art, &c. 
instead of have in the Perfect Tense, and was, wast, &c. instead of had 
in the Pluperfect ; as, Veni, I am come ; Veneram, I was come. 

Note 4. That though the Latin Perfect frequently answers both to . 
have anddz'd, (or the Preterite termination ed, See.) yet they seem to be 
thus distinguished : did or ed, &c. respects a certain Past time, in which 
the thing was finished or a- finishing; as, I wrote, or did write yesterday: 
have either speaks of a thing as but just now past, or at least does not re- 
fer to any particular time that it happened at ; as, I have written my 
letter, i. e. just now; I have read of Julius Caesar, i. e. some time or 
other. The first of these is called the Preter- Perfect Definite, and the 
other the Preter-perfect Indefinite. 

Note 5. That shall and will, by Mr. Brightland, are thus distinguish- 
ed 

C5 



58 Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 

In the First Person simply shall foretels: 
In will a threat, or else a promise, dwells : 
Shall in the Second and the Third does threat : 
Will simply then fortels the future feat. 

By Mr. Turner thus : 
Will imports the Will or Purpose of the person it is joined with ; shall 
implies the Will of another, who promises or threatens to do the thing, or 
causes it to be done, permits it, commands it, or the like. 

DE FORMATIONE VEBBOBUM. 

Quatuor sunt Terminationes 
Verbi, a quibus reliquae om- 
nes formantur ; sciz. o Prae- 
sentis, i Praeteriti, um Supini, 
et re Infinitivi, hoc modo : 



1. Ab o formantur am et 
em. 

2. Ab i formantur ram, rim, 
ro f sse, et ssem. 

3. Ab urn formantur u, us, 
et rus. 

4. A re formantur reliquae 
omnes ; nempe, bam, bo, rem, 
a, e> i, ns, dus, dum, di, do. 



OF THE FOBMATION OF VEBBS. 

There are four Terminations 
of a Verb, from ivhich all the rest 
are formed ; namely, o of the 
Present, i of Hie Preterite, um 
of the Supine, and re of the In- 
finitive, after this manner : 

1. From o are formed am 
and em. 

2. From i, ram, rim, ro, sse, 
and ssem. 

3. U, us, and rus, are form- 
ed from um. 

4. All other parts from re 
do come ; as, bam, bo, rem, a, 
e, and i, ns, and dus, dum, do, 
and di. 



In every complete Verb there are commonly four Principal Parts, viz. 
the Present of the Indicative in o, the Preterite or Perfect in i, the first 
Supine in um, and the Present of the Infinitive in re. The first, which 
is therefore called the Theme or Root of the Verb, gives origin to the 
whole Verb, either mediately or immediately. The Preterite, the first 
Supine,, and the Present of the Infinitive, come from it immediately, and 
all the rest from them ; except the Future of the Indicative in am, and 
the Present of the Subjunctive in em or in am, which, by this scheme, are 
also formed immediately from the Present in o. 

It is to be noted, that the Preterites and Supines of the First Conjuga- 
tion end commonly in avi and atum ; of the Second ui and itum ; and of 
the Fourth in ivi and itum. But the Third Conjugation cannot be redu- 
ced to any general rule, and there are a great many exceptions in the 
other three, which are therefore to be learned by daily practice, till the scho- 
lar is advanced to that part of Grammar that treats particularly of them. 

But the Present of the Infinitive, and all the other parts of the Verb, 
are regularly formed after one fixed and uniform manner. 

In the foregoing rules of Formation, I have, for the ease of the me* 
mory, put the Terminations instead of the Moods and Tenses ; but for 
tlie greater plainness, they may be thus expressed : 



Part II.— Chap. IIL—Of Verb. 59 

I. From the Present of the Indicative are formed the Future of the In- 
dicative of the Third and Fourth Conjugations in am; and the Present ' 
of the Subjunctive of the First in em, and of the other three in am. 

II. From the Perfect of the Indicative are formed the Pluperfect of it ; 
the Perfect, Pluperfect, and Future of the Subjunctive, and the Perfect 
of the Infinitive. 

III. From the First Supine are formed the Last Supine, the Participle 
Perfect, and the Future Active. 

IV. From the Present of the Infinitive are formed the Imperfect of the 
Indicative, the Future of the same when it ends in bo (viz. in the first 
and second Conjugations), the Imperfect of the Subjunctive, the Impera- 
tive, the Participles Present and Future Passive, and the Gerunds. 

Note 1. That Verbs in io of the Third Conjugation retain i before 
unt, unto, ebam, am, ens, endus, endum ; but lose it in the Present of 
the Infinitive and Imperfect of the Subjunctive. 

Note 2. That the last Person Plural of the Imperative may be form- 
ed by adding o to the same Person of the Present of the Indicative ; as, 
amant, amanto ; docent, docento. 

Note 3. That the Passive Voice is formed from the same Tenses of the 
Active, except where Sum is used, by adding r to o, or changing m into r. 

Note 4. That the Present of the Infinitive Passive of the Third Con- 
jugation may be formed by taking s from the Second Person of the Pre- 
sent of the Indicative Active ; as, legis, legi : Or when the Verb is Depo- 
nent, by changing or, or tor, into i; as, projiciscor, proficisci; morior, morL 

Note 5. That the Present of the Infinitive Active, and the Second 
Person of the Indicative and Imperative Passive in re, are always the same. 

Note 6. That the Second Person Plural of the Present of the Indica- 
tive, and of the Imperative, are the same in the Passive Voice. 

Note 7. That where any of the principal Parts are wanting, those parts 
are commonly wanting that come from them. For which reason, gram- 
marians give Supines to a great many Verbs, which yet are not to be 
found in any author, because the Participles formed from them are found ; 
and they suppose likewise all Deponent Verbs of old to have had the Ac- 
tive Voice, and consequently Supines, though now lost. 

Note 8. That all Verbs of the Second Conjugation end in eo, and all 
Verbs of the Fourth in io, except eo and queo. There are eight Verbs in 
eo of the First Conjugation, viz. Beo, creo, screo, meo, calceo, laqueo, 
nauseo, nucleo. There are twenty-four in to of the First, viz. Amplio, 
basio, brevio, concilio, crucio, furio, glacio, hio, lanio, luxurio, macio, nun- 
cio, pio, propitio, radio, repudio, satio, saucio, socio, somnio, spolio, sua- 
vio, or rather suavior, vario, vitio ; with some others less common, as, 
Decurio, succenturio, fascio, retalio, strio, tertio, $c. : And twelve of the 
Third, viz. capio, facio, jacio, lacio, specio, fodio, fugio, cupio, rapio, sa- 
pio, pario, quatio, with their compounds. 

It is not, in my opinion, necessary to trouble the learner with a parti- 
cular account how the respective changes in the Moods, Tenses, Num- 
bers, and Persons, are made ; they being obvious from the examples a- 
bove, in which I have distinguished them from the Body or Essential Part 
of the Verb, by a Division or Hyphen. And perhaps this alone, without any 
other particular rule, might be a sufficient direction. For to conjugate 
one Verb by the example of another, we have no more to do, but in- 
stead of the Essential Part of the one, (which is all that stands before o, 

C6 



60 



Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 



eo, or io, of the Present of the Indicative) to substitute the Essential Part 
of the other, and then to add to it the additional syllables it receives in 
conjugation, as before. Only we are to advert, 1. That in the Preterites 
and Supines, and the Parts that come from them, we are to reckon all be- 
fore i and urn, for the body of the Verb, adding the usual syllables to it, 
as in the Active Voice of Lego. 2. In Verbs in io, we are to retain or 
omit the i, as in Note 1. 

There is yet another way of the Formation of Verbs, differing only 
from the first method in this, that what parts according to it are formed 
from the Infinitive, are by this formed from the First or Second Person 
of the Present of the Indicative. But though this maybe the more natural 
way, yet the other is more easy and uniform. 



DE VEREIS IRREGULARIBUS. 

Irregularia Verba vulgo re- 
censentur octo, viz. Sum, Eo, 
Queo, Volo, NgIo, Malo, Fero, 
et Fio, cum compositis. 



OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 

JL he Irregular Verbs are com- 
monly reckoned eight, viz. Sum, 
Eo, Queo, Volo, Nolo, Malo, 
Fero, and Fio, with their com- 
pounds. 

SUM. 

Sum, fui, esse, To be. 



INDICATIVUS. 




SUBJUNCTIVUS. 






Praesens. 




Sum, 


I am, 


Sim, 


/ may or can be, 


Es, 


Thou art, 


Sis, 


Tliou mayst or canst be, 


Est: 


He is : 


Sit: 


He may or can be : 


Sumus, 


We are, 


Simus, 


We may or can be, 


Estis, 


Ye are, 


Sitis, 


Ye may ov can be, 


Sunt. 


They are. 


Sint. 
Tmperfectum 


They may or can be 


Eram, 


I was, 


Essem, 


I might, &c. be, 


Eras, 


TJiou wast, 


Esses, 


Thou mightst be, 


Erat: 


He was : 


Esset : 


He might be ; 


E ramus, 


We icere, 


Essemus, 


We might be, 


Eratis, 


Ye were, 


Essetis, 


Ye might be, 


Erant. 


They were. 


Essent. 
Perfectum. 


They might be. 


Fui, 


I have been, 


Fuerim, 


I may have been, 


Fuisti, 


Thou hast been 


, Fueris, 


Thou mayst have been, 


Fuit: 


He hath been : 


Fuerit : 


He may have been : 


Fuimus, 


We have been, 


FuerimuSj 


We may have been, 


Fuistis, 


Ye have been, 


Fueritis, 


Ye may have been, 


Fuerunt 
v. -ere 


>J They have been. 7wTinU 


They may have been. 



Part II.— Chap. III.— Of Verb. 
Blusquam-perfectum. 



61 



I had been, Fuissem, I might, &c. have 

Thou hadst been, Fuisses, Thou mightst have 
He had been : Fuisset : He might have 
Fuissemus, We might have 
Fuissetis, Ye might have 
Fuissent. 



n 



Fueram, 

Fueras, 

Fuerat : 

Fueramus, We had been, 

Fueratis, Ye had been, 

Fuerant. They had been 

Futurum. 

Ero, I shall or will be, Fuero, 

Eris, Thou shalt or wilt be, Fueris, 

Erit : He shall or will be : Fuerit : 

Erimus, We shall or will be, Fuerimus, We shall have been, 

Eritis, Ye shall or will be, Fueritis, Ye shall have been, 

Erunt. They shall or will be. Fuerint. They shall have been. 



They might have j 

i" shall have been, 
Thou shalt have been, 
He shall have been : 



IMPERATIVUS. 
' Es vel 



Esto, 
Esto: 
Este vel 
Estote, 
Sunto. 



> Be thou, 
Let him be : 
Be ye, 
Let them be. 



INFINITIVUS. 
Braes. Esse, To be. 

Berf. Fuisse, To have been. 

But. Futurum ) To be about 
esse vel fuisse. ) to be. 
PARTICIPIUM. 
Fut. Futurus, About to be. 

The Compounds of Sum are, adsum, absum, desum, intersum, praesum, 
obsum, subsum, supersum, insum, prosum, and possum. The first eight 
are conjugated as the simple sum ,- insum wants the Preterite and its de- 
scendants, for we do not use infui, infuistt, znfueram, &c. 

^ PRO SUM, To do good, has a d where SUM begins 

with e ; as, 

TNH SBr. Pro-sum, prod-es, prod-est: pro-sumus, prod-estis,pro- 

* \lm. Prod-eram, prod-eras, prod-erat: prod-eramus, fyc. [sunt. 
SUB. Im. Prod-essem,prod-esses,prod-esset:prod-essemus, $c. 
IMPER. Prod-esto, prod-este. INFIN. Praes. Prod-esse. 

POSSUM should be pot-sum (as biing compounded ofpotis, able, and 
sum) ; but for the better sound, t is changed into s before another s, and 
retained before any other letter : And for the same reason, s is always 
taken away. Possem and posse are contracted for jiotessem, potesse, which 
are yet to be found in some old authors : Thus, 

^f Possum, potui, posse, To be able. 
INDICATIVUS. 

Braes. Possum, potes, potest: possumus. potestis, possunt." 
Imp. Poteram, poteras, poterat: poteramus, poteratis, poterant. 

Berf. Potui, potuisti, potuit: potuimus, potuistis, <*? 

Plus. Potueram, potueras, potuerat: potueramus, potueratis, potuerant 
Fut. Potero, poteris, poterit: poteriraus, poteritis, poterunt. 



62 Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 

SUBJUNCTIVUS. 
Praes. Possim, possis, possit : possimus, possitis, possint. 
Imp. Possem, posses, posset : possemus, possetis, possent. 
Perf. Potuerim, potueris, potuerit: potuerimus, potueritis, potuerint 
Plus. Potuissem, potuisses, potuisset : potuissemus, potuissetis, potuissent 
put. Potuero, potueris, potuerit : potuerimus, potueritis, potuerint. 

INFINITIVUS. 

Praes. Posse. Perf- Potuisse. The rest wanting. 





E 0. 






Eo, ivi, itum, ire, To go. 






INDICATIVUS. 




Praes. Eo, 


is, it: imus, itis, 


eunt. 


Imp. Ibam, 


ibas, ibat: ibamus, ibatis, 


ibant. 


Perf. Ivi, 


ivisti, ivit : ivimus, ivistis, 


C iverunt, 



Plus. Iveram, iveras, iverat : iveramus, iveratis, iverant. 
Fut. Ibo, ibis, ibit : ibimus, ibitis, ibunt. 

SUBJUNCTIVUS. 

Praes. Earn, eas, eat : eamus, eatis, eant. 

Imp. Irem, ires, iret : iremus, iretis, irent. 

Perf. Iverim, iveris, iverit: iverimus, iveritis, iverint. 

Plus. Ivissem, ivisses, ivisset : ivissemus, ivissetis, ivissent. 

Fut. Ivero, iveris, iverit : iverimus, iveritis, iverint. 

IMPERATIVUS. INFINITIVUS. 

Praes. Ire. 



( Ito, ( itote, 




Perf. Ivisse. 

Fut. Iturum esse v. fuisse. 


PARTICIPIA. 
Praes. lens, Gen. euntis. 
Fut. Iturus, -a, -um. 


SUPINA. 

1. Itum. 

2. Itu. 


GERUNDIA. 

Eundum, 

Eundi, 

Eundo. 



Note 1. That in general EO is a Verb of the Fourth Conjugation. 

Note 2. That of old, Verbs of the Fourth had their Imperfect in ibam 
and Future in ibo ; of which there are many examples in Plautus and Te- 
rence, and some in Virgil and Horace. 

After the same manner the compounds of Eo are conjugated, viz. ad- 
eo, abeo, exeo, obeo, redeo, subeo, pereo, co'eo, ineo, praeeo, anteeo, prodeo y 
jyraetereoj transeo ; adibam, adibo, adiens, adeuntis, adeundum, &c. But 
umbio is a regular Verb of the Fourth Conjugation. 



Part II.— Chap. III.— Of Verb. 63 

Note, That in the Compounds, ivi, ivisti, &c. are seldom used, but 
they are contracted into ii, iisti ; as, adii, adiisli, and sometimes adisti : 
So adieram, adierim, &c. 

Queo, I can, and Nequeo, I cannot, are conjugated the same way as eo ; 
they only want the Imperative and the Gerunds ; and the Participles are 
scarcely in use. 



VOLO. 

Volo, volui, velle, To will or be willing. 
INDICATIVUS. 



Praes. 
Imp. 


Volo, 
Vol-ebam, 


vis, vult : 
-ebasj -ebat : 


volumus, vultis, 
-ebamus, -ebatis, 


volunt. 
-ebant. 


Perf. 


Vol-ui, 


-uisti, -uit : 


-uimus, -uistis, ) 


-uerunt, 
v. uere. 


Plus. 
Fut. 


Vol-ueram, 
Volam, 


-ueras, -uerat : 
voles, volet : 


-ueramus, -ueratis, 
volemus, voletis, 


-uerant. 
volent. 


Praes 
Imp. 


Velim, 
Vellem, 


SUBJUNCTIVUS. 
velis, velit : velimus, velitis, 
velles, vellet : vellemus, velletis, 


velint. 
vellent. 


Perf. 


Vol-uerim, 


-ueris, -uerit : 


-uerimus, -ueritis, 


-uerint. 


Plus. 


Vol-uissem 


-uisses, -uisset 


: -uissemus, -uissetis 


-uissent. 


Fut. 


Vol-uero, 


-ueris, -uerit : 


-uerimus, -ueritis, 


-uerint. 


Praes 


INFINITIVUS. 

. Velle. Perf. Voluisse. 


PARTICIPIUM. 
Praes. Volens. 








The rest are wanting. 





Praes. 
Imp. 

Perf 

Plus. 
Fut. 

Praes, 

Imp. 



NOLO 

Nolo, nolui, nolle, To be unwilling. 
INDICATIVUS. 
Nolo, non-vis,non-vult: nolumus, non-vultis, nolunt. 

Nol-ebam, -ebas, -ebat: -ebamus, -ebatis, -ebant. 



Nol-ui, -uisti, -uit: 

Nol-ueram,-ueras, -uerat : 
Nolam, noles, nolet : 



-uimus, -uistis, 



\: 



-uerunt, 
uere. 

-ueramusj-ueratis, -uerant. 
nolemus, noletis, nolent. 



SUBJUNCTIVUS. 
Nolim, nolis, nolit : nolimus, nolitis, nolint. 
Nollem, nolles, nollet: nollemus,nolletis, nollent. 



64< Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 

Perf. Nol-uerim, -ueris, -uerit : -uerimus, -ueritis, -uerint. 
Plus. Nol-uissem, -uisses, -uisset : -uissemus, -uissetis, -uissent. 
Fut. Nol-uero, -ueris, -uerit : -uerimus, -ueritis, -uerint. 
IMPERATIVUS. INFINITIVUS. PARTICIPIUM. 

Noli, $ nolite, | Pr. Nolle. | Praes. Nolens. 

The rest wanting. 



y Noli, C nolite, I Pr. Nolle. 
\ Nolito: c nolitote. | Perf. Noluisse. 



M A L O. 

Malo, malui, malle, To be more willing. 

INDICATIVUS. 

Praes. Malo, mavis, mavult : malumus, mavultis, malunt. 

Imp. Mal-ebam, -ebas, -ebat: -ebamus, -ebatis, -ebant. 

Perf. Mal-ui, -uisti, -uit: -uimus, -uistis, < " ' 

J \ v. uere. 

Plus. Mal-ueram, -ueras, -uerat : -ueramus,-ueratis, -uerant. 

Fut. Malam, males, malet, $c. This is scarcely in use. 

SUBJUNCTIVUS. 

Praes. Malim, malis, malit : malimus, malitis, malint. 

Imp. Mallem, malles, mallet: mallemus, malletis, mallent. 

Perf. Mal-uerim, -ueris, -uerit : -uerimus, -ueritis, -uerint. 

Plus. Mal-uissem, -uisses ; -uisset : -uissemus, -uissetis, -uissent. 

Fut. Mal-uero, -ueris, -uerit : -uerimus, -ueritis, -uerint. 

INFINITIVUS. 

Praes. Malle. Perf. Maluisse. 

Note, That Volo, Nolo, and Malo, retain something of the Third 
Conjugation ; for vis, vult, vultis, are contracted of volis, volit, volitis ; 
and o is changed into u ; for of old they said volt, voltis. 

Nolo is compounded of non volo, and Malo of magis volo. 



FERO, 

VOX ACTIVA. 

Fero, tuli, latum, ferre, To bring or suffer 

INDICATIVUS. 
Praes. Fero, fers, fert: ferimus, fertis, ! ferunt. 
Imp. Ferebam, ferebas, ferebat : ferebamus, ferebatis, ferebant. 

Perf. Tuli, tulisti, tulit : tulimus, tulistis, < , ' 

J ' ' ( v. tulere. 

Plus. Tuleram, tuleras, tulerat : tuleramus, tuleratis, tulerant. 

Fut. Feram, feres, feret : feremus, feretis, ferent. 



Part IL—Chap. III.— Of 
SUBJUNCTIVUS. 
Praes. Feram, feras, ferat : feramus, 
Imp. Ferrem, ferres, ferret : ferremus, 
Perf. Tulerim, tuleris, tulerit : tulerimus, 
Plus. Tulissem, tulisses, tulisset : tulissemus 
Fut. Tulero, tuleris, tulerit: tulerimus 



Verb. 



65 



Praes. 



IMPERATIVUS. 

^ er > ferto: \ f rte > ferunto. 
( Ferto, c iertote, 



PARTICIPIA. SUPINA. 

Praes. Ferens. 1. Latum. 

Fut. Laturus, -a, -um, j 2. Latu. 



VOX PASSIVA. 

Feror, latus, 

INDICATIVUS. 

Praes. Feror, ) * ems 5 fertur : ferimur, ferimini, feruntur. 
( ferre, 

C — pbfiris 
Imp. Fer-ebar, < " , '-ebatur : -ebamur, -ebamini, -ebantur. 
( -ebare, 



feratis, ferant. 
ferretis, ferrent. 
tuleritis, tulerint. 
, tulissetis, tulissent. 
tuleritis, tulerint. 

INFINITIVUS. 

Praes. Ferre, 

Perf. Tulisse. 

Fut. Laturum 
esse vel fuisse. 
GERUNDIA. 

Ferendum, 

Ferendi, 

Ferendo. 



ferri. 



Perf. Latus sum vel fui, 
Plus. Latus eram vel fueram, 



latus es vel fuisti, fyc. 
latus eras vel fueras, <$r. 



Fut. Ferar, ) ' feretur : feremur, feremini, ferentur. 

SUBJUNCTIVUS. 
Pr. Ferar, ) ' feratur : feramur, feramini, ferantur, 

Im. Ferrer, < n ' ferretur : ferremur, ferremini, ferrentur 

' ( ferrere, 



Perf. Latus sim vel fuerim. 
Plus. Latus essem vel fuisserrij 
Fut. Latus fuero, 



latus sis vel fueris, fyc. 
latus esses vel fuisses, ($*c, 
latus fueris, fyc. 

IMPERATIVUS. 
Ferre, 
Fertor, 

INFINITIVUS. PARTICIPIA. 

Praes. Ferri. | Perf. Latus, -a, 

Perf. Latum esse vel fuisse. Fut. Ferendus, -a, 
Fut. Latum iri. 



Praes 



■\ 



fertor : 



ferimini, 



feruntor. 



-um. 
-um. 



66 Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 

Note, That Fero is a Verb of the Third Conjugation ; fers, fert, fer- 
tis, ferto, ferte, f err em, ferre, ferris, fertur, fertor, being contracted of fe- 
ris, ferit, feritis, ferito, ferite, fererem, ferere, fereris, feritur, and feritor. 

Also fer is contracted of fere ; which, in like manner, has happened 
to the Imperatives of dico, duco, facto, they .aaving die, duc,fac, instead 
of dice, duce,face. 

The compounds of Fero are conjugated the same way as the simple ; 
as, affero, attuli, allatum ; aufero, abstuli, ablatum • differo, distuli, di- 
latum ; confero, contuli, collatum ; infero, intuli, illatum ; offero, obtuii, 
oblatum ; effero, extuli, elatum : So, circumfero, perfero, transfero, de- 
fero, profero, antefero, praefero. 



FI O. 

Fio, factus, fieri, To be made or to become. 
INDICATIVUS. 
Praes. Fio, fis, fit : fimus, fitis, fiunt. 

Imp. Fiebam, fiebas, fiebat : fiebamus, fiebatis, fiebant. 
Perf. Factus sum vet fui, factus es vel fuisti, fyc. 

Plus* Factus eram vel fueram, factus eras vel fueras, <f*c. 
Fut. Fiam, fies, fiet : fiemus, fietis, fient. 

SUBJUNCTIVUS. 
Fiam, fias, fiat : fiamus, fiatis, fiant. 
Fierem, fieres, fieret : fieremus, fieretis, fierent. 
Factus sim vel fuerim, factus sis vel fueris, §c. 
Factus essem vel fuissem, factus esses vel fuisses, <$-c. 



Praes, 

Imp. 

Perf 

Plus. 

Fut. 



Pr '\ 



Factus fuero, 
IMPERATIVUS. 

*M* te > fiunto. 
Fito, ( fitote, 



factus fueris, fyc. 

INFINITIVUS. 
Praes. Fieri. 

Perf. Factum esse v. fuisse. 
Fut. Factum iri. 



PARTICIPIA. 
Perf. Factus, -a, -um. 
Fut. Faciendus, -a, -um. 



SUPINUM. 



Factu. 



* Though Fi is rejected by some grammarians of great note, yet we 
have given it place here, not only because it is to be found in Plautus, 
but also in Horace, lib. 2. Sat. v. ver. 38. Fi cognitor ipse, according to 
ike best MSS. and Editions. 



Part IL—Chap. IIL—Of Verb. 67 

Note 1. That Fio is the Passive of facto, to make, (which is regular) 
instead of factor, which is not in use : Yet the compounds of facto, which 
change a into i, are regular; as, afficior, affectus, qffici; perficior, 
perfectus, perfici. 

Note 2. That the compounds of facto, with Verbs, Nouns, or Ad- 
verbs, retain the a, and have their imperat. Act. fac, and their Passive 
Form (when used^o; as, calefacio, lucrifacio, benefacio; calefac, calefio, 
&c. But those compounded with a Preposition change the a into i, and have 
Jice and ficior. There are some compounded of facto and a Noun where 
facto is changed 'mtofco of the First Conjugation ; as, magnifico, signify 
co, &c. 

To the Irregular Verbs may be reduced EDO, To eat, which in some 
of its parts falls in with the Verb Sum : Thus, 

IND. Praes. Edo, es, est: ... estis, . . . 

SUB. Imp. Essem, esses, esset: essemus, essetis, essent. 

IMP. Praes. Es vel esto, . . . este vel estote. INFIN. Esse. 

Likewise its compounds, comedo, comes, comest,8tc. axia\exedo, exes, exest, 
&c. But all these may likewise be regularly conjugated ; edo, edis, edit, 
&c. ederem, ederes, ederet, &c. 



OF DEFECTIVE VERBS. 
X hough some of the Irregular Verbs already mentioned want some 
of their parts, and upon that account may be called also Defective Verbs, 
yet by Defective Verbs here we chiefly understand such as want consi- 
derable branches, or are used only in few Tenses and Persons. 
We shall set down those that most frequently occur. 
1. AIO, I say; INQUAM, I say; FOREM, I should be; AUSIM, I 
dare; FAXIM, I'll see to it, or I will do it; AVE and SALVE, God save 
you, Hail, Good morrow; CEDO, Tell or Give me; QUAESO, I pray. 

C Praes. Aio, ais, ait: aiunt. 

IND. < Imp. Ai-ebam,-ebas, -ebat : -ebamus, -ebatis, -ebant. 

C.Perf . . . aias, 

SUB. Praes.. . . aisti, aiat :, . . . aiatis, aiant. 
IMPER. ai. [PARTICIP. Praes. aiens.] 

^j C Praes. Inquam, inquis, inquit : inquimus, inquitis, inquiunt. 

** J Imp inquiebat: inquiebant 

9 jPerf. . . . inquisti, 

►h (^Fut. . . . inquies, inquiet : 

IMPER. Inque, -ito. PARTICIP. Praes. inquiens. 

SUB. } ™"' f Forem, fores, foret : foremus, foretis, forent. 

INF. Fore, to be, or to be about to be; the same mth futurum esse. 

C Praes. Ausim, ausis, ausit : 

SUB. -< Perf. Faxim, faxis, faxit : ........ faxint. 

(_Fut. Faxo, faxis, faxit : faxitis, faxint. 

Note, That Faxim and Faxo are used instead of Fecerim and Fecero. 
("Ave, 7 avete, ? TXT1 -, 

imper. W ' Ittm 

1 Salve, 7 salvete, 1 TVTT ^ , 

CSalv*to,$salvetot4 *NF. nlvem. 
Cedo, cedite. ' • , 

IND. Praes, Quaeso, quaesumus. 



68 Rudiments of the Latin Tongue^ 

II. These three Verbs, ODI, MEMINI, COEPI, have only tire Pre- 
terite Tense, and what is formed from it; and therefore are by some 
called PRETERITIVE Verbs : Thus, 

Odi, oderam, oderim, odissem, odero, odisse. 

Memini, memineram, meminerim, meminissem, meminero, meminisse. 

Coepi, coeperam, coeperim, coepissem, coepero, coepisse. 

But under these they comprehend also the significations of the other 
Tenses ; as, memini, I remember, or I have remembered ; memineram, I 
remembered, or I had remembered, &c. So odi, I hate or I have hated ; 
coepi, I begin, or I have begun : Though I am not fully satisfied as to this 
last ; for I do not know any example where coepi doth clearly signify the 
Present Tense. 

Memini hath also the Imperative, memento, remember thou ; memen- 
tote, remember ye. Some add meminens, remembering, which is scarcely 
to be imitated. 

To these some add novi, because it frequently hath the signification of 
the Present, I know, as well as i" have knoivn, though it comes from nos- 
co, which is complete. 

Note 1. That odientes is to be found in Petronius ; odiatur in Seneca; 
coepio in Plautus and Terence. See Voss. Analog, lib. iii. cap. 59. 

Note 2. That the Participles coeptus, and osus, with its compounds, 
perosus, exosus, are in use among the best authors, but perodi and exodi 
are not. 

III. Faris, to speak, wants the first Pers. Pres. of the Indie, and per- 
haps the whole Pres. of the Subjunctive ; for we do not say for orfer, and 
rarely fer is, fertur, &c. So likewise daris and deris, but not dor, or der, 
to be given. The compound of the first ; as, effor, affor, are rare ; but 
the compounds of the other, as addor, reddor, are common. 

IV. Most of the other Defective Verbs are but single words and rare- 
ly to be found but among Poets ; as, infit, he begins ; defit, it is wanting. 
Some are compounded of a Verb with the Conjunction si ; as, sis for si vis, 
if thou wilt ; sultis for si vultis, if ye will ; sodes for si audes, if thou darest. 



OF IMPERSONAL VERBS. 

These are also a kind of Defective Verbs, which for the most part are 
used only in the Third Person Singular. They have the sign it before 
them in English ; as, poenitet, it repents ; placet, it pleases ; and are 
thus conjugated : 

Praes. Imperf. Perfect. Plusquam. Fut. 

IND. Poenitet, poenitebat, poenituit, poenituerat, poenitebit. 
SUB. Poeniteat, poeniteret, poenituerit, poenituisset, poenituerit. 
INF. Poenitere, .... poenituisse. 

Most Verbs may be used impersonally in the Passive Voice, especially 
such as otherwise have no Passive ; as, 

Praes. Imperf. Perfect. Plusquam. Fut. 

Ind. Pugnatur, pugnabatur, pugnatum A r • ' -atum j f ' * P u g na -bitur. 
Sub. Pugnetur, pugnaretur, pugnatum < r ' • -atum 3^. ' -atumfuerit 
Inf. Pugnari, pugnatum Y^se, pugnatum iri. 



Part II.— Chap. III.— Of Verb. 69 

Note 1. That Impersonate are applied to any Person or Number, by- 
putting that which stands before other Verbs, after the Impersonate, in 
the Cases which they govern ; as, poenitet me, te, ilium, I repent, thou re- 
pentest, he repenteth ; instead of ego poeniteo, &c. which is scarcely Latin. 
Placet mihi, tibi, Mi, It pleases me, thee, him ; or, I please, thou pleasest, 
fyc. Pugnatur a me, a te, ab Mo, I fight, thou tightest, he fighteth, $c. 

Note 2. That Impersonate are not used in the Imperative, but instead 
of it we take the Subjunctive. 

Note 3. That Impersonal Verbs are very often used personally, espe- 
cially in the Plural Number ; as, accidit, contingit, evenit, pertinet, decet, 
dolet, licet, nocet, patet, placet, praestat, &c. For we say, Tu mihi sola 
places ; Nulli noceo ; Multa homini accidunt, contingunt, eveniunt ; Par- 
vum parva decent, fyc. But it is to be remarked that they are generally 
Impersonal, when an Infinitive or Subjunctive Mood follows : For though 
I can say, Tu places mihi ; yet I cannot say, Si places audire, but Si pla- 
cet tibi audire. Again, we cannot say, Ego contigi esse domi ; but Me 
contigit esse domi, or Mihi contigit esse domi. Likewise, Evenit ilium 
mori, or Ut ille moreretur ; but not Ille evenit mori. 

[I shall not here inquire what is the word understood to Impersonal 
Verbs, whether it is a Noun of the like signification, as Pugna, pugnatur, 
or the word res or negotium, or the Infinitive Mood ; though I incline to 
think that any one of these will not answer to them all, but that there are 
some to which the first, to others the second, and to others the third, may 
be most fitly understood, as the nature of the Verb and good sense shall 
direct us. This we are sure of, that the word understood can never be a 
Person properly so called, but a Thing : for which reason, and the want 
of the two primary Persons, viz. the First and Second, they are called 
Impersonal, though some are much offended with the name.] 



CHAP. IV. 

rjl OF PARTICIPLE. 

JL here are three things espe- 
cially to be considered in a Par- 
ticiple, viz. Time, Signification, 
and Declension. 1 

I. The Tenses of Participles 
are three; the Present, Prete- 
rite, and Future. 
Pres. 



CAP. IV. 

™ DE PARTICIPIO. 

JLria sunt praecipue consi- 
derandain Participio,viz. Tern- 
2^us, Signification et Declinatio. 
I. Tempora Participiorum 
sunt tria : Praesens, Praeteri- 
tum, et Futurum. 




•g ^ Praet.<! &% 4 tus,sus,xus. 

I Fut. [_ E" 1 I rus, dus. 
II. Significatio Participio- 
rum est vel Activa vel Passiva, 
vel Neutra, ad modum verbo- 
rum a quibus descendunt. 



as O 



.1 JJ < tus,sus,x 



Pret. 

1 1 1 

Fut. L ^ L rus ' ^ us * 

II. The signification of Par- 
ticiples is either Active or Pas- 
sive, or Neuter, after the man- 
ner of the Verbs from which 
they come. 



70 



Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 



'in ns et rus, plerumque 
sunt Activa. 
in das, semper Passiva. 
.- <j in tus, sus, xus, plerum- 
que sunt Passiva y in- 
terdum vero Activa, vel 
etiam Commimia. 
III. Omnia Participia sunt 
adjectiva : quae desinunt in ns 
sunt Tertiae Declinationis ; re- 
liqua autem omnia Primae et 
Secundae. 



" in ns and rus, are gene- 
rally Active. 
in dus, always Passive. 
<j in tus, sus, xus, are gene- 
rally Passive, sometimes 
Active, or also Com- 
mon. 

III. All Participles are Ad- 
jectives : Those which end in 
ns are of the Third Declension; 
but all the rest are of the First 
and Second. 



A PARTICIPLE is a kind of Adjective formed from a Verb, which 
in its signification always imports some time. 

It is so called because it partakes of a Noun and a Verb, having Gen- 
ders and Cases from the one, Time and Signification from the other, and 
Number from both. 

1. Active Verbs [See Chap. IX.] have two Participles ; one of the 
Present Time ending in ns ; as amans, loving : And another of the Fu- 
ture ending in rus ; as amaturus, about to love. 

2. Passive Verbs have likewise two Participles ; one of the Preterite, 
ending in tus, sus, or xus; as, amatus, loved; visits, seen; flexus, bowed; 
(to which some add one in uus, viz. mortuus, dead : ) And another of the 
Future ending in dus ; as, amandus, to be loved. 

3. Neuter Verbs have two Participles, as the Active ; as, sedens, sit- 
ting; sessurus, about to sit. 

4. Active Intransitive Verbs have frequently three Participles; as, 
carens, wanting ; cariturus, about to want ; carendus, to be wanted : Do- 
lens, grieving ; doliturus, about to grieve ; dolendus, to be grieved : And 
sometimes four; as, vigilans, watching; vigilaturus, about to watch; vi- 
gilatus, watched; vigilandus, to be watched. 

5. Deponent and Common Verbs have generally four Participles ; as, 
loquens, speaking ; locuturus, about to speak ; locutus, having spoken ; lo- 
quendus, to be spoken : Dignans, vouchsafing ; dignaturus, about to 
vouchsafe ; dignatus, having vouchsafed, or being vouchsafed ; dignandus, 
to be vouchsafed. 

Note 1. That in some Deponent Verbs, the Participle Perfect has 
both an Active and Passive signification, though that of the Verb itself is 
only Active ; as, testatus, having testified, or being testified. So menti- 
tus, meditatus, oblitus, &c. 

Note 2. That it is essential to a Participle, 1. That it come imme- 
diately from a Verb ; 2. That in its signification it also include Time. 
Therefore, tunicatus, coated ; larvatus, masked ; and such like, are not 
Participles, because they come from Nouns, and not from Verbs : And, 
ignarus, ignorant; elegans, neat; circumspectus, circumspect; tacitus t 
silent ; falsus, false ; profusus, prodigal, <£c. are not Participles, because 
thev do not signify Time. 



Part II.— Chap. IV.— Of Participle. 7 1 

There are a kind of Adjective Nouns ending in unclus, which approach 
very near to the nature of Participles ; such as, errabundus, ludibundus, 
populabundus. They are formed from the Imperf. of the Indicative, 
and their signification is much the same with the Participle of the Present 
Time ; only they signify abundance, or a great deal of the action, accord- 
ing to A. Gellius, lib. xi. cap. 15. ; or, according to others, they signify 
the same with the Participles of Frequentative Verbs, when these are not 
in use. See Gronovius on Gellius, as above cited. 

APPENDIX of Gerunds and Supines. 

GERUNDS and SUPINES, which, because of their near relation to 
Verbs, are by some not improperly called Participial words, are a sort of 
Substantive Nouns, expressing the action of the Verb in general, or in the 
abstract. Gerunds are Substantives of the Second Declension, and com- 
plete in all their Cases, except the Vocative. Supines are Substantives of 
the Fourth Declension having only two Cases ; the Accusative in urn, 
which makes the First Supine ; and the Ablative in u, which makes the 
Second. 

[Vossius, lib. viii. cap. 54. thinks that the Last Supine may sometimes 
be a Dative; as, Durum tactu, i. e. tactui ; for the Datives of the Fourth 
Declension of old ended in it. Also, lib. vii. cap. 8. he takes notice, that 
though these Supines have sometimes other Cases, (as irrisui esse) yet 
they are only reckoned Supines by Grammarians, when the First comes 
after Verbs of Motion, and the Second after Adjective Nouns : Thus, 
dignus irrisu, is a Supine, according to them ; non sine irrisu audienti- 
um, is not] 



De Indeclinab'xlibus Partibus 
Orationis. 
CAP. V. 

DE ADVERBIO. 

In Adverbio potissimum spec- 
tanda est ejus Significatio. 

Adverbiorum Signification es 
variae sunt : earum vero prae- 
cipuae ad sequentia capita re- 
vocari possunt. 



Of the Indeclinable Parts of 

Sjicech. 

CHAP. V. 

OF ADVERB. 

In an Adverb is chiefly to be 
considered its Signification. 

The Significations of Ad" 
verbs are various : but the chief 
of them may be reduced to the 
following heads. 



An ADVERB is an indeclinable Part of Speech, which being joined 
to a Noun, Verb, or other Adverb, expresses some circumstance, quality, 
or manner of their signification. 

I. Adverbs denoting Circumstance, are chiefly those of Place, Time, 
and Order. 



Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 



72 

I. Adverbs of Place are fivefold, 
viz. Adverbs signifying Motion, 



Ubi? 
Hie, 

Illic, 
Istic, 
Ibi, 
Intus, 
Foris, 
Ubique, 
Nusquam, 
Alicubi, 
Alibi, 
Ubivis, 
Ibidem, 
"Quo? 
Hue, 

Illuc, 1 

Istuc, \ 

Intro, 
Foras, 
Eo, 
Alio, 
Aliquo, 
Eodem, 

("Q.UORSUM? 

Versus, 

Horsum, 

Illorsum, 

Sursum, 

Deorsum, 

Antrorsum, 

Retrorsum, 



Where ? 
Here. 

There. 

Within. 
Without. 
Every where. 
No where. 
Some where. 
Else where. 
Any where. 
In the same place. 
Whither ? 
Hither. 

Thither. 



To within. 
To without. 
To that place. 
To another place. 
To some place. 
Tothe same place. 
Whitherward ? 
Towards. 
Hitherward. 
Thitherward. 
Upward. 
Downward. 
Forward. 
Backward. 
Dextrorsum, To the righthand. 
^Sinistrorsum, To the left hand. 



*, 

^ 



fUNDE? 

Hinc, 

Illinc, 

Isthinc, 

Inde, 

Aliunde, 

Alicunde, 

Sicunde, 

Utrinque, 

Superne, 

Inferne, 

Coelitus, 

Funditus, 

« ram? 

"& § \ Hac, 
I'M Iliac, 

< e I Isthac, 
^•^LAUa, 



From whence ? 
From hence. 

> From thence. 

From elsewhere. 
From some place. 
If from anyplace. 
On both sides. 
From above. 
From below. 
From Heaven. 
From the ground. 
Which way f 
This way. 

> That way. 
Another way. 



2. Adverbs of Time are threefold, 

viz. Such as signify, 

1. Being in Time, either, 



ft, 1§ CNunc, 
„■ 8 £Hodie, 
"Tunc, 
Turn, 
Heri, 
Dudum, 
Pridem, 
Pridie, 



Now. 
To-day. 

Then. 

Yesterday. 

f Heretofore. 

The day before. 



Nudiustertius, Three days ago. 






_Nuper, 

. TJamjam, 
| \ Mox, 
s 1 Statim, 
^1 Protinus, 
» Llllico, 
TCras, 
I jPostridie, 
S y Perendie, 
*» (^Nondum, 

QUANDO? 

Aliquando, 
Nonnunquam, 
Interdum, 
Semper, 
Nunquam, 
Interim, 
^Quotidie, 



Lately. 

Presently. 

Immediately. 

By and by 

Instantly. 

Straightway. 

To-morrow. 

The day after. 

Two days hence. 

Not yet. 

When? 



■} 



Sometimes. 



Ever. 

Never. 

In the mean time. 

Daily. 



2. Continuance of Time. 
Diu, Long. 

Quamdiu ? How long ? 

Tamdiu, So long. 

Jamdiu, *} 

Jamdudum, > Long ago. 

Jampridem, j 

5. Vicissitude or repetition of Time. 



"Quoties? 
Saepe, 
Raro, 
Toties, 
Aliquoties, 
Vicissim, 
Alternatim. 
Rursus, 
Iterum, 
Subinde, 7 

w Identidem, J 

•■g £ fSEMEL, 



How often ? 
Often. 
Seldom. 
So often. 
For several times. 



> Again 



turns. 



I 



Ter, 

Quater, 



Ever and anon. 

Once. 

Twice. 

Thrice. 

Four times, &c. 



Part II.— Chap. V.—Of Adverb. 73 

3. Adverbs of Order ; as, 
Inde, Then, Deinceps, So forth. Primo, -urn, First. 

Deinde, Thereafter. Denuo, Of new. Secundo, -urn, Secondly. 
Dehinc, Henceforth. Denique, Finally. Tertio, -urn, Thirdly. 
Porro, Moreover. Postremo, Lastly. Quarto, -urn, Fourthly. 
II. The other Adverbs expressing Quality, Manner, &c. are either 
Absolute or Comparative. 

"1. QUALITY, simply ; as, Bene, well ; male, ill; fortiter, bravely : 
And innumerable others that come from Adjective Nouns or 
Participles. 

2. CERTAINTY ; as, Profecto, certe, sane, plane, nae, utique, ita, 
etiam, truly, verily, yes ; quidni ? why not ? omnino, certainly. 

3. CONTINGENCY ; as, Forte, forsan, fortassis, fors, haply, 
perhaps, by chance, peradventure. 

4. NEGATION; as, Non, haud, not; nequaquam, not at all; neu- 
tiquam, by no means ; minime, nothing less. 

5. PROHIBITION; as, Ne, not. 

6. SWEARING ; as, Hercle, Pol, Edepol, Mecastor, by Hercules, 
by Pollux, $c. 

7. EXPLAINING ; as, Utpote, videlicet, scilicet, nimirum, nempe, 
to wit, namely. 

8. SEPARATION; as, Seorsum, apart; separatim, separately ; 
sigillatim, one by one ; viritim, man by man ; oppidatim, toivn by 
town, §c. 

9. JOINING TOGETHER; as, Simul, una, pariter, together; ge- 
neraliter, generally ; universaliter, universally ; plerumque, for 
the most part. 

10. INDICATION or POINTING OUT; as, En, ecce, lo, behold. 

11. INTERROGATION; as, Cur, quare, quamobrem ? why, 
wherefore? num, an? whether? quomodo, qui? how? To whidi 

L add, Ubi, quo, quorsum, unde, qua, quando, quamdiu, quoties. 

"1. EXCESS; as, Valde, maxime, magnopere, summopere, admo- 
dum, oppido, perquam, longe, very much, exceedingly ; nimis, ni- 
mium, too much ; prorsus, penitus, omnino, altogether, wholly; ma- 
gis, more; melius, better ; pejus, worse; fortius, more bravely : And 
optime, best; pessime, worst; fortissime, most bravely : And innu- 
merable others of the Comparative and Superlative Degrees. 

2. DEFECT; as, Ferme, fere, prope, propemodum, pene, almost ; 
parum, little ; paulo, paululum, very little. 

3. PREFERENCE; as, Potius, satius, rather; potigsimum, prae- 
cipue, praesertim, chiefly, especially ; imo, yes, nay, nay rather. 

4. LIKENESS or EQUALITY; as, Ita, sic, adeo, so; ut, uti, sic- 
ut, sicuti, velut, veluti, ceu, tanquam, quasi, as, as if; quemadmo- 
dum, even as; satis, enough ; itidem, in like manner. 

5. UNLIKENESS or INEQUALITY; as, Aliter, secus, other- 
wise; alioqui or alioquin, else; nedum, much more or muck less. 

6. ABATEMENT; as, Sensim, paulatim, pedetentim, by degrees, 
piece-meal ; vix, scarcely; aegre, hardly, with difficulty. 

7. EXCLUSION ; as, Tantum, solum, modo, tantummodo, duntax- 
at, demum, only. 

D 



W 

$* 



74 Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 

Note 1. That Adverbs seem originally to have been contrived to 
express compendiously in one word what must otherwise have required 
two or more; as, sapi enter, wisely, for cum sapientia; hie for in hoc loco ; 
semper, for in omni tempore; semel, for una vice,- bis, for duabus vici- 
bus; Hercule, for Hercules me juvet, <|-c. Therefore many of them 
are nothing else but Adjective Nouns or Pronouns, having the Preposi- 
tion and Substantive understood ; as, quo, eo, eodem, for ad quae, ea, ea- 
dem, [loca], or cui, ei, eidem, [loco] ; for of old these Datives ended in o. 
Thus, qua, hac, iliac, &e. are plain Adjectives in the Abl. Sing. Fern, 
the word via, a way, and in, being understood. Many of them are 
compounds ; as, quomodo, i. e. quo modo ; quemadmodum, i. e. ad quern 
modum ; quamobrem, i. e. ob quam rem ; quare, i. e. [pro] qua re ; 
quorsum, j. e. versus quern [locum] ; scilicet, i. e. scire licet ; videlicet, 
i. e. videre licet ; ilicet, i. e. ire licet ; illico, i. e. in loco ; magnopere, 
i. e. magno opere ; nimirum, i. e. ni [est] mirum. 

Note 2. That of Adverbs of Place, those of the first kind answer to 
the question ubi ? the second to quo P the third to quorsum ? the fourth 
to unde ? and the fifth to qua ? To which might be added a sixth, quous- 
que, how far ? answered by usque, until ; hucusque, hitherto ; eousque, so 
far ; hactenus, hitherto, thus far ; eatenus, so far as ; quadantenus, in 
some measure. But these are equally applied to Place and Time. 

Note 3. That Adverbs of Time of the first kind, answer to quando ? 
of the second, to quamdiu and qnamdudum or quampridem ? of the 
third, to quoties ? 

Note 4. That Adverbs of Quality generally answer to the question 
quomodo ? 

Note 5. That some Adverbs of Time, Place, and Order, are frequent- 
ly used the one for the other ; as, ubi, where and when ? inde, from that 
place, from that time, thereafter, next ; hactenus, thus far, with respect to 
place, time, or order, &c. Other Adverbs also may be classed under dif- 
ferent heads. 

Note 6. That some Adverbs of Time are either past, present, or future ; 
as, jam, already, now, by and by ; olim, long ago, some time hereafter. 

Note 7. That Interrogative Adverbs of Time and Place doubled, or 
with the Adjection cunque, answer to the English Adjection soever ; as, 
ubiubi or ubicunque, wheresoever ; quoquo or quocunque, whithersoever,&c. 
And the same holds also in other Interrogative words ; as, quisquis or qui' 
cunque, whosoever ; quotquot or quotcunque, how many soever ; quantus- 
quantus or quantuscunque, how great soever; qualisqualis or qualiscunque, 
of what kind or quality soever ; utut or utcunque, however or howsoever, &c. 



CAP. VI. CHAP. VI. 

DE PRAEPOSITIONE. ^^ OF PREPOSITION. 

I. Jl RAEPosiTioNEsquaeregunt 

Accusativum sunt viginti octo, 

viz. 

Ad, To. Adversus, 

Apud, At. Adversum, J- Against 

Ante, Before. Contra, 



I. A. he Prepositions which go- 
vern the Accusative are twenty- 
eight, viz. 



1 



Part II. — Chap. VI. — Of Preposition. 



75 



Cis, 


> On this side. 


D ropter, 


For, hard by. 


Citra, 


>er, 


By, through. 


Circum, 


i About. £ raeter > 
J Penes, 


Besides, except. 


Circa, 


In the power of 


Erga, 


Towards. Post, 


After. 


Extra, 


Without. Pone, 


Behind. 


Inter, 


Between, among. Secus, 


By, along. 


Intra, 


Within. Secundum, According to. 


Infra, 


Beneath. Supra, 


Above. 


Juxta, 


Nigh to. Trans, 


On the farther side. 


Ob, 


For. Ultra, 


Beyond. 


II. Praepositiones quae re- 


II. The Prepositions which 


gunt Ablativum sunt quinde- 


govern 


the Ablative are fif- 


cim ; nempe, 


teen; namely, 


A, 


V ] 


3e, 


Of, concerning. 


Ab, 
Abs, 


> From. ] 
) 1 




1 Of, out of. 


Absque, 


Without. ] 


Pro, 


For. 


Cum, 


With. ] 


?rae, 


Before. 


Clam, 


Without the know-. 


Palam, 


With the knowledge of. 




ledge of ! 


Sine, 


Without. 


Coram, 


Before. 


lenus, 


Up to. 


III. Hae quatuor inter dum 


III. 


These four govern some- 


Accusativum, interdum Ab- 


times the Accusative, and some- 


lativum, 


regunt. 


times the Ablative. 


In, 


In, into. 


Super, 


Above. 


Sub, 


Under 


Subter ; 


Beneath. 



A PREPOSITION is an indeclinable word, showing the relation of 
one Substantive Noun to another. 

Note, That pone and secus rarely occur ; and prope, nigh ; usque, un- 
to ; circiter, about ; versus, towards ; which are commonly reckoned a- 
mong the Prepositions governing the Accusative ; and procul, far, among 
those governing the Ablative, are Adverbs, and do not govern a case of 
themselves, but by the Preposition ad, which is understood to the first 
four, and a or ab to the last. To which perhaps may be added, clam, 
which is joined very frequently with the Accusative ; as, clam patre, or 
patrem ; a being understood to the one, and quod ad to the other. 

Besides the separate use of these Prepositions, there is another use which 
arises from them, namely, their being put before a vast number of Nouns 
and Verbs in composition, which creates a great variety, and gives a pe- 
culiar elegance and beauty to the Latin Tongue. 

D2 



76 Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 

There are five or six syllables, viz. am, di or dis, re, se, con, which are 
commonly called Inseparable Prepositions, because they are only to be 
found in compound words : However, they generally add something to 
the signification of the words with which they are compounded : Thus, 

Am, 
Di, 



round about, 
j asunder, 



Dis, V 

-d J > signifies * 

Re, { ° j again, 

Se, I aside or apart, 

Con, J ^together; 



rambio, to surround, 
divello, to pull asunder. 
■ distraho, to draw asunder. 
' | relego, to read again, 
j sepono, to lay aside, 
(^concresco, to grow together. 



CHAP. VII. 

OF INTERJECTION. 
As INTERJECTION is an indeclinable word, thrown into discourse 
to signify some Passion or Emotion of the ZNIind. 
r l« JOY; as, Evax. hey, brave, io. 
2. GRIEF ; as, Ah, hei, heu, eheu, ah, alas, woes me. 
o. WONDER ; as. Papae, Oh strange ; Yah, ha. 

4. PRAISE ; as, Euge, well done. 

5. AVERSION; as, Apage, away, be gone, fie, tutu. 

6. EXCLAIMING ; as, Oh, Proh, 0. 
§ J 7. SURPRISE or FEAR; as, Atat, ha, aha. 

8. IMPRECATION ; as, Vae. too, pox ont. 

9. LAUGHTER ; as, Ha, ha. he. 

10. SILENCING ; as, Au, 'st, pax, silence, hush, 'st. 

11. CALLING; as, Eho, io, ho, so, ho, soho, 0. 

12. DERISION; as. Hui, away with. 
[13. ATTENTION; as, Hem, ha. 

Note 1. That the same Interjection denotes sometimes one passion 
and sometimes another ; as, Vah, which is used to express Joy and Sor- 
row and Wonder, &e. i 

Note 2. That some of them are natural sounds common to all lan- 
guages. 

Note 5. That Nouns are sometimes used for Interjections ; as, Ma- 
lum ! With a pox ! With a mischief! Infandum ! shame ! Fie, fie ! 
Miserum ! wretched ! Nefas ! O the villanv ! 

An Interjection is a compendious way of expressing a whole sentence 
in one word, and used only to represent the passions and emotions of the 
soul, that the shortness of the one might the sooner express the sudden- 
ness and quickness of the other. 



CHAP. VIII. 

OF CONJUNCTION. 
-A. CONJL'NCTION is an indeclinable word, that joins sentences to- 
gether, and thereby shows their dependence upon one another. 



Part IL—Chap. VIII.— Of Conjunction. 77 



Of these some are called, 

1. COPULATIVE; as, Et, ac, atque, que, and; etiam, quoque, item, 
also; cum, turn, both, and. Also their contraries, Nee, neque, neu, 
neve, neither, nor. 

2. DISJUNCTIVE ; as, Aut, ve, vel, seu, sive, either, or. 

3. CONCESSIVE ; as, Etsi, etiamsi, tametsi, beet, quanquam, quam- 
vis, though, although, albeit. 

4. ADVERSATIVE ; as, Sed, verum, autem, at, ast, atqui, but ; tamen, 
attamen, veruntamen, verumenimvero,ye£, notwithstanding, nevertheless. 

5. CAUSAL ; as, Nam, namque, enim, for ; quia, quippe, quoniam, 
because ; quod, that, because. 

6. ILLATIVE or RATIONAL ; as, Ergo, ideo, igitur, idcirco, itaque, 
therefore ; quapropter, quocirca, wherefore ; proinde, therefore ; cum, 
quum, seeing, since ; quandoquidem, forasmuch as. 

7. FINAL or PERFECTIVE ; as, Ut, uti, that, to the end that. 

8. CONDITIONAL; as, Si, sin, if; dum, modo, dummodo, provided, 
upon condition that ; siquidem, if indeed. 

9. EXCEPTIVE or RESTRICTIVE ; as, Ni, nisi, unless, except. 

10. DIMINUTIVE ; as, Saltern, certe, at least. 

11. SUSPENSIVE or DUBITATIVE; as, An, anne, num, whether ; 
ne, annon, whether, not ; necne, or not. 

12. EXPLETIVE; as, Autem, vero, now, truly; quidem, equidem, indeed. 

13. ORDINATIVE; as, Deinde, thereafter; denique, finally ; insu- 
per, moreover ; caeterum, moreover, but, however. 

14. DECLARATIVE ; as, Videlicet, scilicet, nempe, nimirum, &c. to 
wit, namely. 

Note 1. That the same words, as they are taken in different views, 
are both Adverbs and Conjunctions, as, an, anne, &c. are Suspensive Con- 
junctions and Interrogative Adverbs. The same may be said of the Or- 
dinative and Declarative Conjunctions, which, under another view, may 
be ranked under Adverbs of Order and Explaining. So likewise utinam, 
which is commonly called an Adverb of Wishing, when more narrowly 
considered, is nothing else but the Conjunction uti [that], with the sylla- 
ble nam added to it, and opto [I wish] understood ; as, Utinam adfuisses ; 
Ut te Deus maleperdat ; supple opto. But since both of them are indeclin- 
able, there is no great need of being very nice in distinguishing them. 

Note 2. That other parts of speech compounded together, supply the 
place of Conjunctions ; as, postea, afterwards ; praeterea, moreover ; 
propterea, because, &c. which are made up of the Prepositions, post, prae- 
ter, and propter, with ea, the Pronoun. 

Note o. That some Conjunctions, according to their* natural Order, 
stand first in a sentence ; as, et, aut, nee, si, &c. Some, contrary to then- 
natural Order, stand in the second place, viz. autem, vero, quoque, qui- 
dem, enim : And some may indifferently be put either first or second, viz. 
namque, etenim, siquidem, ergo, igitur, itaque, &c. Hence arose the di- 
vision of them into Prepositive, Subjunctive, and Common. 

D3 



78 Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 

% CHAP. IX. 

APPENDIX, containing some Observations concerning the 
various divisions and significations of words, especially Noun 
and Verb. 

1. -A.ll words whatsoever are either Simple or Compound. A Simple 
word [Simplex] is that which was never more than one; as, Justus, lego. 
A Compound [Composition] is that which is made up of two or more 
words, or of a word and some syllabical adjection ; as, injustus, perlego, 
derelinquo, egomet. 

2. All words whatsoever are either Primitive or Derivative. A Pri- 
mitive word \_Primitivum] is that which comes from no other word ; as, 
Justus, lego. A Derivative [Derivativum] is that which comes from ano- 
ther word; as, justitia, lectio. 

I. Besides the more general Divisions of Nouns and Pronouns, men- 
tioned p. 13. and 50. there are other particular Divisions of them, taken 
from their various Significations and Derivations ; the most remarkable 
whereof are these : 

I. With respect to Signification. 

1. A Collective [Collectivum] is a Substantive Noun which signifies 
many in the Sing. Num. ; as, populus, a people ; exercitus, an army. 

2. An Interrogative Noun or Pronoun [Interrogativum] is that by 
which we ask a question ; as, quis ? who ? uter ? which of the two ? 
qualis ? of what kind? quantus ? how great ? quot ? how many ? And 
these, when they are used without a question, are called Indefinites. 

5. A Relative Noun or Pronoun [Relativum] is an Adjective that has 
respect to something spoken before ; as, Qui, ille, ipse, &c. Alius, alter, 
reliquus, caetera, -um, qualis, quantus, &c. 

4. A Partitive Noun or Pronoun [Partitivum] is an Adjective which 
signifies many severally, and as it were one by one ; as, oninis, nullus, 
quisque, &c. ; Or a part of many ; as, quidam, aliquis, neuter, nemo, &c. 

5. A Numeral Noun [Nitwterale] is an Adjective which signifies Num- 
ber ; of which there are four principal kinds : 

(1.) Cardinal [Numerus Cardinalis] as, unus, duo, tres, &c. 

(2.) Ordinal [Ordinalis] as, primus, secundus, tertius, &c. 

(<5.) Distributive [Distributivus] as, singuli, bini, terni, &c. 

(4.) Multiplicative [Multiplicativus] as, simplex, duplex, triplex, &c. 
II. With Respect to Signification and Derivation. 

1. A Patronymic Noun [Patronymicum] is a Substantive Noun de- 
rived from another Substantive proper, signifying one's pedigree or extrac- 
tion; as, Priamides, the son of Priamus ; Pri a mis, the daughter of Pria- 
mus ; Aetias, the daughter of Aeetes ; Kerine, the daughter of Nereus. 
Patronymics are generally derived from the name of the Father ; but the 
Poets (for others seldom use them) derive- them also from the Grandfa- 
ther, or some other remarkable person of the family ; nay, sometimes from 
the founder of a nation or people, and also from countries and cities ; as, 
Aeacides, the son, grandson, great-grandson, or one of the posterity of 
Aeacus ; Romulidae, the Romans, from their first king Romulus ; Sicilis, 



Part II. — Chap. IX. — Appendix, fyc. 79 

Troas, a woman of Sicily, of Troy, &c. Patronymics of men end in des; 
of women in is, as, and ne. Those in des and ne are of the First, and those 
in is and as of the Third Declension. 

2. An Abstract Noun [Abstractum] is a Substantive derived from an 
Adjective, expressing the quality of that Adjective in general, without 
regard to the thing in which the quality is ; as, bonitas, goodness ; dul- 
cedo, sweetness ; from bonus, good ; dulcis, sweet. With respect to these 
abstracts, the Adjectives from which they come are called Concretes, 
because, besides the quality, they also confusedly signify something as the 
subject of it, without which they cannot make sense. 

5. A Gentile or Patrial Noun {Gentile or Patriurn] is an Adjective 
derived from a Substantive proper, signifying one's country ; as, Scotus, 
Macedo, Arpinas, Edinburgensis, Taodunanus ; a man born in Scotland, 
Macedonia, Arpinum, Edinburgh, Dundee ; from Scotia, Macedonia, Ar- 
pinum, Edinburgum, Taodunum. 

4. A Possessive Noun [Possessivum~\ is an Adjective derived from a 
Substantive, whether proper or appellative, signifying possession or pro- 
perty ; as, Scoticus, Herculeus, Paternus, Herilis, Foemineus ; of or 
belonging to Scotland, Hercules, a father, a master, a woman ; from Scotia, 
Hercules, Pater, Herus, Foemina. 

5. A Diminutive Noun \Diminutivum\ is a Substantive or Adjective 
derived from another Substantive or Adjective respectively, importing 
a diminution or lessening of its signification ; as, libellus, a little book ; 
chartula, a little paper ; opusculum, a little work ; from liber, charta, opus ; 
parvulus, very little ; candidulus, pretty white ; from parvus, candidus. 
These for the most part end in lus, la, or lum, and are generally of the 
same gender with their primitives. 

6. A Denominative Noun [Denominativum] is a Substantive or Adjec- 
tive derived from another Noun ; as, gratia, favour ; vinea, a vineyard ; 
senator, a senator ; from gratus, vinum, senex : coelestis, heavenly ; 
humanus, human ; aureus, golden ; from coelum, komo, aurum. 

7. A Verbal Noun [ Verbale] is a Substantive or Adjective derived 
from a Verb; as, amor, love; doctrina, learning; lectio, a lesson ; auditus, 
hearing ; from amo, doceo, lego, audio : amabilis, lovely ; capax, capable; 
valucer, swift; from amo, capio, volo. 

8. Lastly, There are some Nouns derived from Participles, Adverbs, 
and Prepositions ; as, Jictitius, counterfeit; crastinus, belonging to the 
morrow ; contrarius, contrary ; from jictus, eras, contra. 

Note, That the same Nouns, according to the different respects in 
which they are considered, may sometimes be ranked under one and some- 
times under another of the above mentioned classes ; as, quis is an Inter- 
rogative, Relative, or Partitive ; pietas, an Abstract or Denominative. 

II. Pronouns are divided into four classes ; viz. 

1. Demonstratives ; ego, tu, sui. 

2. Relatives ; ille, ipse, iste, hie, is, quis, qui. 

3. Possessives ; mens, tuus, suus, noster, vester. 

4. Patrials or Gentiles ; nostras, vestras, cujas. 

Of them also two are interrogatives, quis and cujas. 

III. 1. Verbs, with respect to their Figure or Frame, are either Sim- 
ple ; as, amo, I love : Or Compound ; as, redamo, I love again. 

D4 



80 Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 

2. With respect to their Species or Origin, are either Primitive ; as, 
lego, I read : Or Derivative ; as, lectito, I read frequently. 

3. With respect to their Conjugation, are either regular ; as, amo : 
Or Irregular ; as, volo, vis, &c. 

4. With respect to their Constituent Parts, are either Complete ; as, amo: 
Or Defective; as, inquam : Or Redundant; as, edo, edis, andes, &e. 

5. With respect to their Persons, are either Personal ; as, amo : Or 
Impersonal ; as, poenitet. 

6. With respect to their Terminations, they end either in o ; as, amo : 
Or in r ; as, amor : Or in m ; as, sum. 

7. With respect to their Signification, Verbs are either Substantive 
or Adjective. 

(1.) A Substantive Verb [Substantivum] is that which signifies simply 
the affirmation of being or existence; as, sum,jio, existo, I am. 

(2.) An Adjective Verb [Adjectivum] is that which, together with the 
signification of Being, has a particular signification of its own ; as, amo, 
i. e. sum amans, I am loving. 

An Adjective Verb is divided into Active, Passive, and Neuter. 

(1.) An Active Verb [Activum] is that which affirms Action of its 
Person or Nominative before it; as, amo, loquor, curro. 

(2.) A passive Verb [Passivum] is that which affirms Passion of its 
Person or Nominative before it ; as, amor. 

(5.) A Neuter Verb [Neutrum] is that which affirms neither Action nor 
Passion of its Nominative ; but simply signifies the state, posture, or qua- 
lity of things ; as, sto, sedeo, maneo, duro, vireo,flaveo, sapio, quiesco, &c. 
to stand, sit, stay, endure, to be green, to be yellow, to be wise, to rest. 

An Active Verb is again divided into Transitive and Intransitive. 

(1.) An Active Transitive Verb [Transitivum'] is that whose Action 
passeth from the Agent to some other thing ; as, amo patrem. 

(2.) An Active Intransitive Verb [Intransitivum~\ is that whose Ac- 
tion passeth not from the agent to any other ; as, curro, I run ; ambulo, 
I walk. 

When to any Verb you put the question whom ? or what ? if a ra- 
tional answer can be returned, the Verb is Transitive ; as, Whom, or 
what do you teach ? Ans. A boy the grammar. If not, it is Intransitive ; 
as, What do you run, go, come, live, sleep, &c. to which no rational an- 
swer can be given, unless it be by a word of like signification, which 
sometimes indeed these Verbs have after them ; as, Vivo vitam jucundam, 
I live a pleasant life ; Eo iter longum, I go a long journey. 

Note I. That the same Verb is sometimes Transitive, and sometimes 
Intransitive ; as, Ver incipit, The Spring begins, Cic. Incipere f acinus, 
to begin an Action, Plaut. 

Note 2. That Neuter and Intransitive Verbs are often Englished 
with the signs of a Passive Verb ; as, caleo, I am hot ; palleo, I am pale ; 
Jacobus abiit, James is gone. 

Note 5. That Neuter and Intransitive Verbs want the Passive Voice, 
unless impersonally used, as the Istransitive Verbs most frequently and 
elegantly are ; as, pugnatur, itur, ventum est. 

Though all Verbs whatsoever, with respect to their signification, be- 
long to some one or other of the foregoing classes, yet because gramma- 



Part II. — Chap. IX. — Appendix, %c. 81 

rians, together with the signification of Verbs, are obliged also to consider 
their termination ; and finding that all Active Verbs did not end in o, 
neither all Passives in or, it was judged convenient to add to the former 
two or three other classes or kinds of them, viz. Deponent, Common, 
and Neuter Passive. 

(1.) A Deponent Verb [Deponens] is that which has a Passive termi- 
nation, but an Active or Neuter signification ; as, loquor, I speak; mo~ 
rior, I die. 

(2.) A Common Verb [Commune] is that which, under a Passive ter- 
mination, has a signification either Active or Passive ; as, criminor, I ac- 
cuse, or I am accused ; dignor, I think, or I am thought worthy. 

(3.) A Neuter Passive [Neutro-passivum] is that which is half Active 
and half Passive in its termination, but in its signification is either wholly 
Passive; as, fio, factus sum, to be made : Or wholly Active or Neuter; as, 
audeo, ausus sum, to dare ; gaudeo, gavisus sum, to rejoice. 

8. To omit the other kinds of Derivative Verbs, which are not very 
material, there are three kinds of them derived from Verbs which de- 
serve to be remarked ; viz. Frequentatives, Inceptives, and Desideratives. 

(1.) Frequentatives [ Verba frequentativa] signify Frequency of Action. 
They are formed from the last Supine, by changing atu into ito from Verbs 
of the first, and u into o from Verbs of the other three Conjugations. They 
are all of the first ; as, clamito, to cry frequently, from clamo ; dormito, 
to sleep often, from dormio. From them also are formed other Frequen- 
tatives; as, curro, curso, cursito ; jacio, jacto, jactito ; pello, pulso, pul- 
sito and pulto. 

(2.) Inceptives [Verba inceptiva] signify that a thing is begun and 
tending to perfection. They are formed from the second person singular 
Pres. Ind. by adding co. They are all of the third Conjugation, and want 
both Preterite and Supine ; as, caleo, cales, calesco, I grow or wax warm. 

(5.) Desideratives [Verba Desiderativa] signify a desire of Action. 
They are formed from the last Supine by adding rio. They are all of 
the fourth Conjugation, and generally want both Preterite and Supine ; 
as, coenaturio, I desire to sup; esurio, I am hungry, or I desire to eat. 

9. Lastly, In Construction, Verbs receive names from their more par- 
ticular significations ; as, Vocative Verbs, or Verbs of Naming, Verbs of 
Remembering, of Want, of Teaching, of Accusing, &c. 

In the preceding Division of Verbs, with respect to their signification, 
I have receded a little from the common method, and in particular I have 
given a different account of Neuter Verbs from that commonly received 
by grammarians, who comprise under them all Intransitive Verbs, though 
their significations be ever so much Active. But this I did partly from the 
reason of the Name, which imports a negation both of Action and Pas- 
sion, and partly to give a distinct view of the significations of Verbs, 
without regard to their terminations, which in that respect are purely 
accidental and arbitrary. 

I have also excluded from the divisions of Verbs those called Neutral 
Passives, [Lat. Neutra Passiva] because originally they are Active Verbs; 
for the primary signification of vapulo is pereo or ploro; of exulo, extra so- 
lum eo ; of veneo, venum eo / of nubo, veto. Liceo indeed is a very 
singular Verb, for in the Active Voice it signifies passively, and in the 
Passive actively. 

D 5 



82 Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 

PARS TERTIA. PART THIRD. 



DE SENTENTIIS, SIVE ORATIONE. 

Oententia est quaevis animi 
cogitatio, duabus aut pluribus 
vocibus simul junctis enuncia- 
ta : ut, Tu legis, Tu legis li- 
bros ; Tu legis libros bonos ; 
Tu legis libros bonos domi. (a) 



A 



OF SENTENCES, OR SrEECH. 

sentence is any thought of 
the mind expressed by two or 
more words put together : as, 
You read; You read books; 
You read good books ; You 
read good books at home. 



CAP. I. 

DE SYNTAXI, SIVE C0NSTRUC- 
^ TIONE. 

Joyntaxis est recta vocum in 
Oratione Compositio. 

Ejus partes sunt duae, Con- 
cordantia et Regimen, (b) 



CHAP. I. 

OF SYNTAX, OR C0NSTRUC- 
£Y TION. 

Syntax is the right ordering 
of Words in Speech. 

Rs parts are two, Concord 
and Government. 



(a) We are now arrived at the principal part of Grammar; for the 
great end of speech being to convey our thoughts unto others, it will be 
of little use to us to have a stock of words, and to know what changes 
can be made upon them, unless we can also apply them to practice, and 
make them answer the great purposes for which they are intended. To 
the attainment of this end, there are two things absolutely necessary, 
viz. 1. That in speech we dispose and frame our words according to the 
laws and rules established among those whose language we speak. 2. 
That in like manner we know what is spoken or written, and be able 
to explain it in due order, and resolve it into the several parts of which 
it is made up. The first of these is called Syntax or Construction, and 
the second is named Exposition or Resolution. The first shows us how 
to speak the language ourselves, and the second how to understand it 
when spoken by others. But it must be owned that there is such a ne- 
cessary connection between them, that he who is master of the first can- 
not be ignorant of the second. 

(6) Note 1. That the difference between Concord and Government 
consists chiefly in this, that in Concord there can no change be made in 
the Accidents, that is, Gender, Case, Number, or Person of the one, but 
the like change must also be made in the other ; but in Government the 
first word (if declinable) may be changed, without any change in the 
second. 

In Concord, the first word may be called the word directing, and the se- 
cond the word directed : In Government, the first is called the word go- 
verning, and the second the word governed. 



Part III. — Chap* I. — Of Construction. 



Concordantia est quando una 
dictio concordat cum altera in 
quibusdam accidentibus. 

Regimen est quando dictio 
regit certum casum. 



Concord is when one word 
agrees with another in some ac- 
cidents. 

Government is when a word 
governs a certain case. 



I. DE CONCORDANTIA. 

V^oncordantia est quadru- 
plex. 

1 . Adjectivi cum Substantivo. 

2. Verbi cum Nominativo. 

3. Relativi cum Antecedente. 

4. Substantivi cum Substan- 
tivo. 

. Regula I. 

-ttLdjectivum concordat cum 
Substantivo in genere, nurae- 
ro, et casu : ut, 

a Vir b bonus. 

*Foemina b casta. 

h Didce zpomum. 



a 



I. OF CONCORD. 

ONCORD is fourfold. 



1. Of an Adjective with a 
Substantive. 

2. Of a Verb with a Nomi- 
native. 

3. Of a Relative with an 
Antecedent. 

4. Of a Substantive with a 
Substantive. 

s Rule I. 

JLl-N Adjective agrees with a 1 
Substantive in Gender, Num- 
ber, and Case : as, 

A good man. 

A chaste woman. 

A sweet apple. 



Note 2. That for the greater ease both of master and scholar, we 
have noted those words wherein the force of each example lieth, with 
the letters [a] and [b] : the word directing or governing with [a], and 
the word directed or governed with [b] : or where there are two words 
directing or governing, the first with [a], and the second with [aa] ; and 
where two words are directed or governed, the first with [b], and the 
second with [bb]. 

Number 1. Note 1. That the way to find out the Substantive, is to 
ask the question Who or What? to the Adjective; for that which an- 
swers to it is the Substantive. And the same question put to the Verb 
or Relative, discovers the Nominative or Antecedent. 

Note 2. That another Adjective sometimes supplies the place of a 
Substantive ; as, amicus certus, a sure friend ; bonaferina, good venison ; 
homo being understood to amicus, and caro to ferina. 

Note 3. That the Substantive Thing [negotium] is most frequently 
understood: and then the Adjective is always put in the Neuter Gen- 
der, as if it were a Substantive ; as, triste [supple negotium], i. e. res tristis, 
a sad thing. Bona, [supple negotia], i. e. res bonae, good things. 

D6 



84 Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 

Reg. II. 

2 V erbum concordat cum 
Nominativo ante se in nu- 
mero et persona: ut, 

a Ego b /<?go. 

a Tu b scribis. 

a Praeceptor h docet. 



* Rule II. 

JL Verb agrees with the No- 
minative before it in Number 
and Person : as, 

I read. 

You write. 

The master teacheth. 



ANNOTATIONES. 



3 1. VERBA Substantiva, 
Vocandi et Gestus, habent 
utrinque Nominativum ad 
eandem rem pertinentem : 
ut, 

h Ego *sum hh discipidus. 
b Tu a vocaris bb Joannes. 
^ Ilia a i?icedit ^regina. 

4 2. ^[EXCEP. Infinitivus 
Modus Accusativum ante se 
habet : ut, 

Gaudeo h te * voter e. 



1. Substantive Verbs, Verbs 
of Naming and Gesture, have a 
Nominative both before and af- 
ter them, belonging to the same 
thing : as, 

I am a scholar. 
You are named John. 
She walks [as] a queen. 

2. 5) EXCEP. The Infini- 
tive Mood has an Accusative 
before it : as, 

I am glad that you are well. 



Num. 2. Note, That the Infinitive Mood frequently supplies the place 
of the Nominative ; as, mentiri non est meum, to lie is not mine, [or my 
property.] 

Num. o. 1. Substantive Verbs are, Sum, fio, forem, and existo. 

2. Verbs of Naming are these Passives, Appellor, dicor, vocor, nomi- 
nor, nuncupor; to which add, Videor, existimor, creor, constituor, salu- 
tor, designo, &c. 

3. Verbs of Gesture are, Eo, incedo, venio, cubo, sto, sedeo, evado, fu- 
gio, dormio, somnio, moneo, &c. 

Note, That any Verb may have after it the Nominative, when it be- 
longs to the same thing with the Nominative before it; as, audivi hocpuer, 
I heard it being [or when I was] a boy. Defendi rempublicam adolescens, 
non deseram senex, I defended the commonwealth [when I was] a young 
man, I will not desert it [now that I am] old. Cic. 

Num. 4. Note, That when the Particle That [in Lat. quod or ut\ 
comes between two Verbs, it is elegantly left out, by turning the No- 
minative Case into the Accusative, and the Verb into the Infinitive 
Mood ; as, aiunt regem adventare, they say [that] the king is coming ; ra- 
ther than, aiunt, quod rex adventat. Turpe est eos qui bene n&ti sunt 
turpiter vivere, it is a shameful thing that they who are well born shouldiive 
basely; rather than, ut ii turpiter vivant. See p. 51. . 



Part III.— Chap. L 
3. tfl ESSE habet eundem 
casum post se quern ante se : 
ut, 

b Petrus cupit a esse bb vir 

doctus. 
Scio b Petrum a esse bb virum 

doctum. 
b Mihi bb negligenti a esse non 
licet. 

Reg. III. 
JtVELATivuM Qui, quae, quod, 
concordat cum Antecedente in 
gen ere et numero : ut, 

a Vir sapit b qui pauca loqui- 
tur. 

1. Si nullus interveniat No- 
minativus inter Relativum et 
Verbum, Relativum erit Ver- 
bo Nominativus : ut, 

Praeceptor a qui b docet. 



i — Of Construction. 85 

3. f ESSE Aa$ */*<? 5fl77ze 5 
Case after it that it hath be- 
fore it : as, 

Peter desires to be a learn- 
ed man. 
I know that Peter is a 

learned man. 
I am not allowed to be 
negligent. 
rfl Rule III. 

jl he Relative Qui, quae, 6 
quod, agrees with the Antece- 
dent in Gender and Number : 
as, 

He is a wise man who 

speaks little. 

I. If no Nominative comes 7 

between the Relative and the 

Verb, the Relative shall be the 

Nominative to the Verb ; as, 

The master who teacheth. 



Num. 5. Note 1. That we frequently say, licet nobis esse bonos, we 
may be good. Tibi expedit esse sedulum, it is expedient for you to be dili- 
gent. Nemini unquam nocuit fuisse pium, it never hurt any man that he 
had been pious. But then the Accusative, nos, te, ilium, &c. is under- 
stood : thus, licet nobis [nos] esse bonos, &c. 

Note 2. That if esse, and the other Infinitives of Substantive Verbs, 
Verbs of Naming, &c. have no Accusative or Dative before them, the 
word that follows (whether Substantive or Adjective) is to be put in the 
Nominative ; as, dicitur esse vir, he is said to be a man. Non videtur esse 
facturus, he seems not about to do it. Nemo debet dici beatus ante suum 
obitum, no man should be called happy before his death. 

Num. 6. Note 1. That the Antecedent is a Substantive Noun that goes 
before the Relative, and is again understood to the Relative. Wherefore 
it will not be amiss to teach the scholar to supply it every where : thus, 
Beware of 'idleness, which [idleness] is an enemy to virtue, Cave segnitiem, 
quae [segnities~\ est inimica virtuti. Nay, Cicero himself, but especially 
Caesar, frequently repeats the Substantive ; as, in oppidumperfugisti, quo in 
oppido, &c. You fled to a town, in which town, Cic. J)iem dicunt, quo 
die ad ripam Rkodani conveniant, they appoint a day, on which day they 
should meet upon the bank of the river Rhone, Caes. 

Note 2. That when the Relative respects a whole Sentence, it is put 
in the Neuter Gender ; as, Joannes mortuus est, quod mihi summo dolori 
est, John is dead, which is a great grief to me. 

Note 3. That the Person of the Relative is always the same with that 



Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 



86 

8 2. At si interveniat Nomi- 
nativus inter Relativum et 
Verbum, Relativum erit ejus 
casus quern Verbum aut No- 
men sequens, vel Praepositio 
praecedens, regere solent : ut, 

Deus b quern a colimus. 
b Cujus *munere vivimus. 

Cui nullus est a similis. 
a A b quo facta sunt omnia. 



2. But if a Nominative comes 
between the Relative and the 
Verb, the Relative shall be of that 
Case which the Verb or Noun 
following, or the Preposition go- 
ing before, use to govern : as, 

God whom we worship. 
By whose gift we live. 
To whom there is none like. 
By whom all things were made. 



ANNOTATIO. 



9 <[[ Duo vel plura Substan- 
tia singularia, Conjunctione 
[et, ac, atque, Sec] copulata, ha- 
bent Adjectivum, Verbum, vel 
Relativum Plural e : ut, 

a Petrus et aa Joannes b qui 
b sunt b docti. 



^ Two or more Substantives 
singular, coupled together with 
a Conjunction [et, ac, atque, 
fyc] have a Verb, Adjective, or 
Relative Tlural : as, 

Peter and John who are 
learned. 



of its Antecedent ; as, ego qui doceo, I who teach. Tu qui discis, you 
who learn. Lectio quae docetur, the lesson which is taught. 

Num. 9. Note 1. That when the Substantives are of different Gen- 
ders, and signify Persons, the Adjective or Relative Plural must agree 
with the Masculine rather than the Feminine ; as, pater et mater qui sunt 
mortui, the father and mother who are dead. 

EXCEP. But if all the Substantives, or any one of them, signify things 
without life, the Adjective or Relative Plural must be put in the Neuter 
Gender; as, divitiae, decus, gloria, in oculissita sunt, riches, honour, and 
glory, are set before your eyes. 

Note 2. That when two or more Nominatives are of different Persons, 
the Verb Plural must agree with the First Person rather than the Second, 
and the Second rather than the Third : as, si tu et Tullia valetis, ego et Ci- 
cero valemus, if you and Tullia are well, I and Cicero are well. 

Note 5. That the Adjective or Verb frequently agree with the Sub- 
stantive or Nominative that is nearest them, and are understood to the 
rest ; as, et ego in cutya sum et tu, both I and you are in the fault ; or, et 
ego et tu es in culpa. Nihil hie deest, nisi carmina, there is nothing here 
wanting but charms ; or, nihil hie nisi carmina, desunt. This manner 
of construction is most usual when the different words signify one and the 
same thing, or much to the same purpose ; as, mens, ratio, et consilium 
in senibus est, understanding, reason, and prudence, is in old men. 

Note 4. That a Collective Noun, because it is equivalent to a Plural 
Number, has sometimes the Adjective or Verb in the Plural Number ; as, 
pars virgis caesae, a part of them were scourged. Turba ruunt, the crowd 



rush. 



Part III.— Chap. 1 

Reg. IV. 

Unum Substantivum concor- 
dat cum alio eandem rem sig- 
nificante in casu : ut, 

a Cicero b Orator. 

a Urbs bEdinburgum. 
Filius b deliciae matris suae. 

w 



— Of Construction. 87 

~ Rule IV 

kJne Substantive agrees with 10 
another, signifying the same 
Thing in case : as, 
Cicero the Orator. 
The City Edinburgh. 
A son the darling of his 
mother. 



II. DEREGIMINE. 
Jlvegimen est triplex; 

1. Nominum. 

2. Verborum. 

3. Vocum indeclinabilium. 



II. OF GOVERNMENT 
\JTovernment is threefold; 

1. Of Nouns. 

2. Of Verbs. 

3. Of Words indeclinable. 



I. The Government of Nouns. 
§ 1. OF SUBSTANTIVES. 
/ r^ Rule I. 

kJne Substantive governs 11 
another signifying a different 
Thing in the Genitive : as, 
The love of God. 
The law of nature. 
ANNOTATIONES. 
* 1. Si posterius Substanti- I I. If the last Substantive 12 
vum adjunctum habeat Adjec- | have an Adjective of Praise 



I. Regimen Nominum. 
§ 1. SUBSTANTIVORUM. 
TT Reg. I. 

U num Substantivum regit a- 
liud rem diversam significans 
in Genitivo : ut, 
a Amor b Dei. 
*Lex b naturae. 



(a) To these four Concords some add a fifth, viz. That of the Respon- 
sive, agreeing with its Interrogative in Case ; as, Quis dedit tibi pecuniam / 
Pater. Who gave you money ? My father. Quo cares ? Libro. What 
do you want ? A book. But this ought not to be made a principal rule : 
For the Responsive, or the word that answers the question, does not de- 
pend upon the Interrogative, but upon the Verb, or some other Word 
joined with it ; which, because spoken immediately before, is generally 
understood in the answer. Thus, Quis dedit tibi pecuniam ? Pater [de- 
dit mihi pecuniam]. Quo cares ? [Careo] Libro. 

Num. 11. Note 1. That of or *s is the ordinary sign of this Genitive. 

Note 2. That the Relative Pronouns, ejus, illius, cujus, &c. Englished 
his, hers, its, theirs, thereof, whereof, whose, have their Substantives gene- 
rally understood ; as, liber ejus, [supple hominis, foeminae, &c] his book, 
or her book ; libri eorum, [supple hominum,foeminarum, &c] their books. 



88 



Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 



tivum laudis vel vituperii, in 
Genitivo vel Ablativo poni 
potest : lit, 
a Fir b summae b prudentiae, 

vel b summa b prudentia. 
a Puer b probae b indolis, vel 
b proba b indole. 

13*2. Adjectivum in Neutro 
genere absque Substantivo 
regit Genitivum : ut, 
a Midtum b pecuniae. 
*Quid b rei? 



or Dispraise joined with it, it 
may be put in the Genitive or 
Ablative : as, 

A man of great wisdom. 

A boy of a good disposition. 



2. An Adjective in the Net* 
ter Gender without a Substan~ 
tive governs the Genitive : as, 

Much money. 

What is the matter : 



§ 2. ADJECTIVOBVM. 
. Reg. I. 
14 *^Ldjectiva verbalia, vel 
affectionem animi significan- 
tia, Genitivum postulant: ut, 
z Avidus b gloriae. 
a Ignarus b fraudis. 
z Memor b beneficiorum. 



§ 2. OF ADJECTIVES. 
j j. Rule I. 

V erbal Adjectives, or such as 
signify an Affection of the Mind, 
require the Genitive : as, 

Desirous of glory. 

Ignorant of fraud. 

Mindful of favours. 



Num. 13. This is more elegant than Multa pecunia : Quae res? 

Note 1. That these Adjectives which thus govern the Genitive, as if 
they were Substantives, are generally such as signify Quantity ; as, mul~ 
turn, tajitum, quantum, plus, plurimum. 

Note 2. That plus and quid always govern the Genitive, and upon 
that account are by many thought real Substantives. 

Num. 14. To this rule belong, 

1. Adjectives of Desire* as, Cupidus, ambitiosus, avarus, studiosus, 
curiosus. 

2. Of Knowledge ; as, Peritus, gnarus, prudens, callidus, providus, 
doctus, docilis, praescius, praesagus, certus, memor, eruditus, expertus, 
consultus, Sec. 

5. Of Ignorance ; as, Ignarus, rudis, imperitus, neselus, inscius, incer- 
tus, dubius, anxius, sollicitus, immemor. 

4. Of Guilt ; as, Conscius, convictus, manifestus, suspectus, reus. 

5. Verbals in ax and ns ; as, Edax, capax, ferax, fugax, tenax, pervi- 
cax : And Amans, cupiens, appetens, patiens, fugiens, sitiens, negligens, 

4-c. 

6. To which may be referred, Aemulus, munifkus, parcus, prodigus, 
profusus, securus. 



Part III. — Chap. I. — Of Construction. 



89 



_ Reg. II. 

* Jr artitiva et partitive po- 
sita, Comparativa, Superlativa, 
Interrogativa, et quaedam Nu- 
meralia, Genitivo plurali gau- 
dent: ut, 

*Aliquis b philosophorum. 

a Senior b fratrum. 

a Doctissimus b Ro?nanorum. 

a Quis b nostrum f 
a Una b musarum, 
a Octavus b sapientum. 

. Reg. III. 

xYdjectiva significantia com- 
modum vel incommodum, si- 
militudinem vel dissimilitudi- 
nem, regunt Dativum : ut, 

z Utilis h bello. 

z Perniciosus b reipublicae. 

z Similis b patri. 



Rule II. 



J. artitives and words plac- 1 5 
ed partitively, Comparatives, 
Superlatives, Interrogate es, 
and some Numerals, govern 
the Genitive plural : as, 

Some one of the philosophers. 
The elder of the brothers. 
The most learned of the Ro- 
mans. 
Which of us? 
One of the muses. 
The eighth of the wise men. 

* Rule III. 

Jtdjectives signifying Pro- 1 6 
fit or Disprofit, Likeness or 
Unlikeness, govern the Da- 
tive : as, 

Profitable for war. 
Pernicious to the common- 
Like his father. [wealth. 



Num. 15. Note 1. That it is easy to know when this rule takes 
place, by resolving the Genitive into inter with the Accus. or de, e, ex, 
with the Abl. ; as, optimus regum, the best of kings ; i. e. optzmus inter 
reges, or de, e, ex, regibus. 

Note 2. That when there are two Substantives of different Genders, 
the Partitive, fyc. rather agrees with the first than the last ; as, Indus jiu- 
minum maximus, Cic. Leo animalium fortissimus, Plin. Otherwise 
it is of the same Gender with the Substantive it governs \ as, pauca ani- 
malium, Unaquaeque foeminarum. 

Note 5. That Partitives, fyc. take the Genitive Singular of Collective 
Nouns, and do not necessarily agree with them in Gender ; as, praestan- 
tissimus nostrae civitatis, Cic. Nympharum sanguinis una, Virg. 

Num. 16. Note 1. That some of these Adjectives govern also the Ge- 
nitive ; as, amicus, inimicus, socius, vicinus, par, aequalis, similis, dissi- 
milis, proprius, communis, &c. 

Note 2. That Adjectives signifying Motion or Tendency to a thing, 
choose rather the Accusative with ad than the Dative ; such as, proclivis, 
pronus, propensus, velox, celer, tardus, piger, &c. ; as, 

Est piger ad poenas princeps, ad praemia velox. Ovid. 

Note 3. That Adjectives signifying Fitness, or the contrary, may have 
either of them ; as, aptus, ineptus, bello } or ad bellum. 



Rudiments of the Latin Tongue^ 



90 

17 f Verbalia in BILIS et 
DUS regunt Dativum : ut, 
*Amandus vel z a?nabilis 
b o?nnibas. 

Reg. IV. 

18*^Ldjectiva dimensionem 
significantia regunt Accusa- 
tivum mensurae: ut, 

Columna sexaginta b pedes 
z alta. 

Reg. V. 
I9*1^/omparativus regit Ab- 
lativum, qui resolvitur per 
Quam : ut, 

z Dulcior b melle, 
*Praestantior b auro, 

^ Reg. VI. 
SOXXaec Adjectiva, Dignus, 
Indignus, Contentus, Praedi- 
tus, Captus, et Fretus : Item, 
Natus, Satus,Ortus,Editus, et 



Verbals in BILIS and DUS 
govern the Dative : as, 
To be beloved of all men. 



A Rule IV. 

Objectives signifying Dimen- 
sion govern the Accusative of 
Measure : as, 

A pillar sixty feet high. 



J f Rule V. 

HE Comparative Degree go- 
verns the Ablative, which is re- 
solved by Quam : as, 
Sweeter than honey. 
Better than gold. 



T 



Rule VI. 



J. hese Adjectives,Digmis, In- 
dignus, Contentus, Praeditus, 
Captus, and Fretus : Also, Na- 
tus, Satus, Ortus, Editus, and 



Num. 17. Of or by is the ordinary sign of this Dative. 

Note, That Participles of the Preter Tense, and Passive Verbs also, 
especially among the Poets, have frequently the Dative, instead of the 
Ablative with a or ab : as, Nullus eorum mihi visus est, none of them 
was seen by me. Non audior ulli, I am not heard by any. 

Num. 18. The Adjectives of Dimension are, Altus, high or deep; eras- 
sus or densus, thick; latus, broad; Ion gus, long ; profundus, deep. The 
names of Measure are, Digitus, an inch ; palmus, an hand-breadth ; pes, 
a foot ; cubitus, a cubit ; ulna, an ell ; passus, a pace ; &c. 

Note 1. That Verbs signifying Dimension likewise have the Accusa- 
tive of Measure ; as, Patet tres ulnas, It is three ells large, Virg. 

Note 2. That sometimes the word of Measure is put in the Ablative ; 
as, Fossa sex cubitis alta, duodecim lata, Liv. Venter ejus exstat ses- 
quipede, Pers. And sometimes, but rarely, in the Genitive; as, Nee 
longiores duodenum pedum, Plin. 

Num. 19. Let the following examples be observed and imitated. 
Multo melior, Much better. Nihilo pejor, Nothing worse. Major solito, 
Greater than usual. Quo diligentior es, eo doctior evades, The more di- 
ligent you are, the more learned you will become. Quanto superbior, 
tanto vilior, The prouder, the less worth. Nihil Virgilio doctius, There 
is none more learned than VirgiL 



Part III.— Chap, L 

similia, Ablativum petunt : ut, 

z Dignus b honor e. 

z Praeditus b virtute. 

z Contentus b parvo. 

z Captus b oculis. 

z Fretus b viribus. 

z Ortus b regibus. 

Reg. VII. 
^tldjectivum copiae aut ino- 
piae regit Genitivum vel Abla- 
tivum : ut, 

z Plenus b irae vel b ira. 

z Inops b rationis. 



— Of Construction. 91 

the like require the ablative : as, 

Worthy of honour. 

Endued with virtue. 

Content with little. 

Blind. 

Trusting to his strength. 

Descended of kings. 

. Rule VII. 

j^±n Adjective of Plenty or 21 
Want governs the Genitive or 
Ablative : as, 

Full of anger. 

Void of reason. 



II. Regimen Verborum, 
§ 1. PERSONALIUM. 
~ Reg. I. 

* O um, quoties possessionem, 
proprietatem, aut officium sig- 
nificat, regit Genitivum : ut, 
3 Est b regis punire rebelles. 

b Insipientis a est dicere, Non 

putaram. 
b Militum z est suoduciparere. 

^ Excipiuntur hi Nominati- 
vi, Meum, tuum, suum, nostrum, 
vestrum : ut, 

b Tuum z est id procurare. 



II. The Government of Verbs. 
§ I. OF PERSONAL VERBS. 
~ Rule I. 

uum, when it signifies Pos- 22 
session, Property, or Duty, 
governs the Genitive: as, 
It belongs to the king to pun- 
ish rebels. 
It is the property of a fool 
to say, I had not thought. 
It is the duty of soldiers to 
obey their general. 
«[[ These Nominatives, Me- 23 
um, tuum, suum, nostrum, 
vestrum, are excepted : as, 
It is your duty to manage that. 



Num. 21. Note 1. That Distentus, gravidus, refertus, and orbus, va- 
cuus, viduus, choose rather the Ablative; Indigus, compos, and impos, 
the Genitive. 

Note 2. That some comprehend opus, and usus, when they signify 
Necessity, under this rule ; as, Quid opus est verbis ? What need is there 
of words ? Ovid. Nunc viribus usus. Now there is need of strength, Virg. 
But it is to be remarked, that these are Substantive Nouns, the very same 
withOpus, operis, a work, and Usus, usus, use; and have the Ablative af- 
ter them because of the Preposition in, which is understood. Sometimes 
0]ms hath the Nominative, by Num. 3. ; as, Dux nobis opus est, We stand 
in need of a leader. It is elegantly joined with the Participle Perfect ; 
as, Consulto, maturato, invento, facto, &c. opus est. We must advise, 
make haste, find out, do, <£c. 



92 



Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 



*M« 



Reg. 



II. 

24*J.KLisereor 9 miseresco, et 

satago, regunt Genitivum : 

ut, 

^Miserere b civium tuorum. 

*8atagit b rerum suarian. 
-p, Reg. III. 
25J-jst pro habeo regit Dati- 

vum personae : ut, 

a Est b mihi liber. 
a Sunt b mihi libri. 
c Reg. IV. 

26)Jum pro offer regit duos 
Dativos, unum personae, al- 
terum rei : ut, 

a Est b mihi hb volu2otati. 
„ Reg. V. 

27 \ erbum significans com- 
modum vel incommodum re- 
git Dativum : ut, 

Fortuna a favet b fortibus. 

b Xemini a ?wceas. 



-*-- Rule II. 

ItAisereor, miseresco, and sa- 
tago, govern the Genitive : as, 

Take pity on your countrymen. 
He hath his hands full at home. 

Rule III. 
Jljst taken for habeo [to have] 
governs the Dative of a person ; 
as, 

I have a book. 

I have books. 

Rule IV. 
Joum taken for affero [to bring] 
governs two Datives, the one of 
a Person, and the other of a 
Thing : as, 
It is [brings'] a pleasure to me. 

- Rule V. 

Ji. verb signifying Advantage 
or Disadvantage governs the 
Dative : as, 

Fortune favours the brave. 

Do hurt to no man. 



Num. 23. To these last may be added Possessive Nouns; such as, 
Regium, humanum, belluinum, and the like; as, Humanum est errare, 
It is incident to man to err. 

Note, That to all these are understood, Ofjicium, opus, negothim, or 
some other word to be gathered from the sentence ; as, Me Pompeii to- 
turn esse scis, You know that I am wholly Pompey's, or in Pompey's in- 
terest, Cic. i. e. amicum, fautorem, or the like. 

Num. 25. This is more elegant than Habeo librum, or Habeo libros. 

So Desum is used elegantly for Careo ; as Desunt mihi libri, for Ca- 
reo libris, I want books. 

Num. 26. Note, That other Verbs, such as, Do, duco, verto, tribuo, 
habeo, relinquo, &c. may have two Datives ; as, Hoc tibi laudi datur, 
You are praised for this ; Ne mihi vitio vertas, Do not blame me. 

To this may be referred such expressions as these : Est mihi nomen 
Joanni, My name is John ; which is more elegant than Est mihi nomen 
Joannes or Joannis. 

Num. 27. This is a very general rule, and (when we signify a thing 
to be acquired to any Person or Thing) almost common to a)l Verbs i 
JBut in a more particular manner are comprehended under it, 



Part IIL—Chap. L 

Reg. VI. 

V erbum active significans re- 
git Accusativum : ut, 
*Ama h Deum. 
*Reverere 'bparentes. 

* Recordor, memini, reminis- 
cor, et obliviscor, regunt Accu- 
sativum vel Genitivum : ut, 

2 Recordor h lectionis vel h lec- 
tionem. 

* Obliviscor ^injuriae vel b m- 

juriam. 



A 



.—-Of Construction. 93 

Rule VI. 
verb signifying actively 2% 
governs the Accusative : as, 
Love God. 

Reverence your parents. 
Recordor, memini, remi-2Q 
niscor, and obliviscor, gover- 
the Accusative or Genitive : au 
I remember my lesson. 

I forget an injury. 



1. To Profit or Hurt: as, Commodo, proficio, placeo, consulo, 
noceo, officio. But laedo and offendo govern the Accus. 

2. To Favour, to Help, and their contraries : as, Faveo, annuo, 
arrideo, assentior, adstipulor, gratulor, ignosco, indulgeo, parco, a- 
dulor, plaudo, blandior, lenocinor, palpor, studeo, supplico, &c. Also, 
Auxilior, adminiculor, subvenio, succurro, patrocinor, medeor : Also, 
Derogo, detraho, invideo, §c. But juvo has the Accus. 

3. To Command, Obey, or Resist : as, Impero, praecipio, mando ; 
Pareo, servio, obedio, obsequor, obtempero, morem gero, morigeror 
famulor ; Pugno, repugno, certo, obsto, reluctor, renitor, resisto, ad- 
versor, refragor, fyc. TSutjubeo governs the Accus. 

4. To threaten, or to be Angry with : as, Minor, indignor, iras- 
cor, succenseo. 

5. To Trust : as, ndo, confido, credo. 

6. Verbs compounded with satis, bene, and male : as, Satisfacio, bene- 
facio, benedico, malefacio, maledico. 

7. The Compounds of the Verb Sum : as, Adsum, prosum, obsum. 

8. Verbs compounded with. these ten Prepositions, Ad, ante, con, in, 
inter, ob,. post, prae, sub, and super : as, 1. Adsto, accumbo, acquiesco, 
assideo, adhaereo, admoveo. 2. Antecello, anteeo, anteverto. 3. Con- 
sono, commisceo, condono, commorior. 4. Illudo, immorior, inhaereo, 
insideo, inhio, innitor, invigilo, incumbo. 5. Interpono, intervenio, in- 
terfero. 6. Obrepo, obtrecto, occumbo. 7. Postpono, posthabeo. 8. 
Praeeo, praestat, for ' excellit, praeluceo. 9. Succedo, submitto, subjicio. 
10. Super sto, supervenio. 

Note 1. That to, the sign of the Dative, is frequently understood. 

Note 2. That to is not always the sign of the Dative : for, 1. Verbs 
of Local Motion, as, Eo, venio, proficiscor ; and, 2. These Verbs, Pro- 
vocO, voco, invito, hortor, specto, pertineo, attineo, and such like, have 
the Accusative with the Preposition ad. 

Num. 28. Note, That Neuter and Intransitive Verbs have sometimes 
an Accusative after them. 1 . Of their own or the like signification ; as, 
Vivere vitam,' Gaudere gaudium, Sitire sanguinem, Olere hircum. 2. 
When tak€n in a metaphorical sense ; as, Ardebat Alexin, i. e, Vehemen- 
ter araabat. 



94 



Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 



VERBA Activa alium una 
cum Accusativo casum re- 



30 *i. VERBA accusandi, 
damnandi, et absolvendi, cum 
Accusativo personae, regunt 
etiam Genitivum criminis : 
ut, 

*Arguit h i7ie hh furti. 
b Meipsum hh inertiae *con- 

demno. 
b Ilium bbhomicidii a absol- 
vunt. 
31*2. VERBA comparandi, 
dandi, narrandi, et auferen- 
di, regunt Dativum cum Ac- 
cusativo : ut, 



Active VERBS governing 
another Case together 
with the Accusative. 

1. VERBS of Accusing, Con- 
demning, and Acquitting, with 
the Accusative of the Person, 
govern also the Genitive of the 
crime : as, 

He accuses me of theft. 

I condemn myself of lazi- 
ness. 

They acquit him of man- 
slaughter. 

2. VERBS of Comparing, 
Giving, Declaring, and Taking 
away, govern the Dative with 
the Accusative : as, 



Num. 30. 1. Verbs of Accusing are, Accuso, ago, appello, arcesso, 
arguo, alligo, astringo, defero, incuso, insimulo, postulo, fyc. 

2. Verbs of Condemning are, Damno, condemno, convinco, $c. 

3. Verbs of Absolving are, Solvo, absolvo, libero, purgo, fyc. 

Note 1. That the Genitive may be changed into the Ablative, either 
with or without a Preposition ; as, Purgo te hac culpa, or, de hac culpa, 
I clear you of this fault. Eum de vi condemnavit, He found him guilty 
of a riot. Cic. 

Note 2. That the Genitive, properly speaking, is governed by some 
Ablative understood ; such as, Crimine, poena, actione, causa : as, Accu- 
sare furti, i. e. Crimine furti. Condemnare capitis, i. e. poena capitis. 

Note 3. That Crimine, poena, actione, capite, morte, scarcely admit 
of a Preposition. 

Num. 31. 1. To Verbs of Comparing belong also Verbs of preferring 
or postponing. 

2. To Verbs of Giving belong Verbs of receiving, promising, paying, 
sending, bringing. 

3. To Verbs of Declaring belong Verbs of explaining, showing, deny- 
ing, £c. 

4. Verbs of Taking away are, Aufero, adimo, eripio, eximo, demo, 
surripio, detraho, tollo, excutio, extorqueo, arceo, defendo, fyc. 

Note 1. That many of these Verbs govern the Dative by Num. 27. 

Note 2. That innumerable other Verbs may have the Dative with the 
Accusative, when, together with the Thing done, is also signified the Per- 
son or Thing to or for whom it is done ; as, Doce mihi filium, Teach 
me my son. Cura mihi hanc rem, Take care of this affair for me. 

Note 3. That comparo, confero, compono, have frequently the Abla- 
tive with cum. 



Part III.— Chap. L 

*Comparo b Virgilium bb Ho- 

mero. 
b Suum bb cuique Hribuito. 
*Narras h fabulam bb surdo. 

*Eripuit b me bb morti. 

*3. VERBA rogandi et do- 
cendi duos admittunt Accu- 
sative^, priorem personae, pos- 
teriorem rei : ut, 

*Posce b Deum bb veniam. 

*Docuit b me bb grammaticam. 



— Of Construction. 95 

I compare Virgil to Ho- 
mer, 

Give every man his own. 

You tell a story to a deaf 
man. 

He rescued me from death. 

3. VERBS of asking and 32 
teaching admit of two Accu- 
satives, the first of a Person, 
and the second of a Thing : as, 

Beg pardon of God. 

He taught me grammar. 



ANNOTATIO. 



* Quorum Activa duos Ca- 
sus regunt, eorum Passiva pos- 
teriorem retinent : ut, 

*Accusor b furti. 

Virgilius z comparatur b Ho- 

mero, 
z Doceor b grammatical. 
Reg. VII. 
JL retium rei a quovis Ver- 
bo in Ablativo regitur : ut, 



The Passives of such ActiveS3 
Verbs as govern two Cases, 
do still retain the last of them : 
as, 

I am accused of theft. 
Virgil is compared to Ho- 
mer. 
I am taught grammar. 
rjl Rule VII. 
JL he Price of a Thing is 34 
governed in the Ablative by 
any Verb : as, 



Num. 32. Note 1. That among the Verbs that govern two Accusa- 
tives, are also reckoned these following : 

1. Celo ; as, Cela hanc rem uxor em, Conceal this from your wife, Plaut. 
But we can also say, Cela te de hac re, and Celo tibi hanc rem. 

2. Verbs of Clothing; as, Induit se calceos, He put on his shoes. But 
these have more commonly the Ablative of the Thing without a Preposi- 
tion ; as, Vestit se purpura, He clothes himself with purple. Induo and 
Exuo have frequently the Person in the Dative, and the Thing in the Ac- 
cusative ; as, Thoracem sibi induit, He put on his breastplate. 

3. Moneo ; as, Id unum te moneo, I put you in mind of this one thing. 
But, unless it is some general word, [as, Hoc, illud, id, &c] Moneo, ad- 
moneo, commonefacio, have either the Genitive ; as, Admoneo te officii, I 
put you in mind of your duty, or the Ablative with de ; as, De hac re te 
saepius admonui, I have frequently warned you of this. 

Note 2. That Verbs of Asking often change the Accusative of the Per- 
son into an Ablative, with the Preposition ; as, Oro, exoro, peto, postulo 
hoc a, te, I entreat this of you. Some always ; as, Contendo, quaero, set- 
tor, sciscitor hoc a te. Finally, some have the Accusative of the Person, 
and the Ablative of the Thing with de ; as, Interrogo, consulo, percontor 
te de hac re. 



96 



Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 



z Emi librum b duobus assi- 
bus. 

*Vendidit hie b auro pa- 
triam. 

Demosthenes z docuit b ta- 
lent o. 

35 *Excipiuntur hi Genitivi, 
Tanti, quanti, pluris t mino- 
ris : ut, 

b Quanti z co?istitit? 
Asse et b pluris* 

36 * VERBA aestimandi, cum 
Accusative), regunt hujusmo 
di Genitivos, Magni, parvi, 
nihili, &c : ut, 

* Aestimo te b magni. 
Reg. VIII. 
37* V erba copiae et ino- 
piae plerumque Ablativum 
regunt : ut 

z Abundat b divitiis. 
a Caret omni b culpa. 
38 * Utor, abutor, fruor, fun- 
gor, potior, vescor, regunt 
Ablativum : ut, 
z Utitur \fraude, 
a Abutitur h libris. 



I bought a book for two 

shillings. 

This man sold his country 
t for gold. 

Demosthenes taught for a 
talent. 

These Ge7iitives, Tanti, quan- 
ti, pluris, minoris, are excepted ; 
as, 

How much cost it ? 

A shilling and more. 

VERBS of valuing, with the 
Accusative, govern such Genitives 
as these, Magni, parvi, nihili, 
Sfc. : as, 

I value you much. 
„ Rule VIII. 
V erbs of Plenty and Scarce- 
ness for the most part govern the 
Ablative : as, 

He abounds in riches. 

He has no fault. 

Utor, abutor, fruor, fungor, 
potior, vescor, govern the Ab- 
lative : as, 

He uses deceit. 

He abuses books. 



Num. 55. Note, That if the Substantive be expressed, they are put 
in the Ablative ; as, Quanto pretio ? Minore mercede. 

Num. 56. 1. Verbs of Valuing are, Aestimo, pen do, facio, habeo, du- 
co, puto, taxo. 

2. The rest of the Genitives are. Minoris, minimi, tanti, quanti, pluris, 
majoris, plurimi, maximi, nauci, flocci, pili, assis, teruncii, hujus : Also 
aequi and boni, after facio and consulo. 

Note 1. That we say also, Aestimo, magno, parvo, supple pretio. 

Note 2. That Alvarus excludes majoris, as wanting authority : But 
there is an example of it to be found in Phaedrus, II. 5. 25. 
Multo majoris alapae mecum veneunt 

Num. 57. Sometimes they have the Genitive ; as, Aegit aerts, He wants 
money, Hor. Implentur veteris Bacchi, They are filled with old wine, Virg. 

Note, That Verbs of Loading and Unloading, and the like, belong 
to this Rule ; as, Kavis oneratur mercibus, The ship is loaded with goods, 
Levabo te hoc onere, I will ease you of this burden. Liberavit nos metu, 
He delivered us from fear. 

Num. 58. To these Verbs add, Nitor, gaudeo, mnto, dono, munero, com- 



Part III. — Chap. I. — Of Construction 

§ 2. REGIMEN VERBORUM 

IMPERSONALIUM. 
XT Reg. IX. 

V ereum impersonate regit 
Dativum : lit, 

*Expedit b reipublicae. 
3 Licet b nemini peccare. 



*EXCEP. 1. Refert et In- 
terest Genitivum postulant : ut, 

a Refert b patris. 
a Interest b omnium. 

*At mea, tua, sua, nostra, 
vestra, ponuntur in Accusati- 
ve pluraii : ut, 

Non b mea a refert. 

*EXCEP. 2. Haec quinque, 
JMiseret, poenitet, pudet, taedet, 
et piget, regunt Accusativum 
personae, cum Genitivo rei : 
ut, 

z Miseret b me bb tui. 

3 Poenitet b me bb peccati. 

*Taedet b me bb vitae. 

*EXCEP. 3. Haec quatuor, 

Decet, delectat, jurat, oportet, 
regunt Accusativum personae 
cum Infinitivo : ut, 



97 
§ 2. THE GOVERNMENT 
OF IMPERSONAL VERBS. 
' Rule IX. 

j^Ln Impersonal Verb go- 3 9 
verns the Dative : as, 

It is profitable for the State. 

No man is allowed to sin. 



EXCEP. 1, Refert andio 
Interest require the Genitive : 
as, 

It concerns my father. 

It is the interest of all. 

But mea, tua, sua, nostra, 4 1 
vestra, are put in the Accusa- 
tive Plural : as, 

I am not concerned. 

EXCEP. 2. These five, Mi-42 
seret, poenitet, pudet, taedet, 
and piget, govern the Accusa- 
tive of a Person, with the Ge- 
nitive of a Thing : as, 

I pity you. 

I repent of my sin. 

I am weary of my life. 

EXCEP. 3. Thesefour,De-*3 
cet, delectat, juvat, oportet, 
govern the Accusative of the 
Person with the Infinitive : as, 

munico, viclito, beo,fido, impertior, dzgnor, nascor, creor, officio, consto, 
prosequor, &c. 

Note, That potior sometimes governs the Genitive ; as, potiri hostium, 
To get his enemies into his power. Potiri rerum, To have the chief rule. 

Num. 59. Such as these, accidit, contingit, evenit, conducit, expedit, 
lubet, libet, licet, placet, displicet, vacat, restat, praestat, liquet, nocei, do- 
let, sufficit, &c. Together with the Dative, they have commonly an Infi- 
nitive after them, which is supposed to supply the place of a Nominative be- 
fore them. 

Num. 42. Note, That this Genitive is frequently turned into the In- 
finitive ; as, poenitet me jieccdsse ; taedet me vivere ; and so they fall in 
with the following Rule. 



9S 



Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 



z Delectat b me hh studere. 
Non a decet b te bb rivari. 



* S. REGIMEN Infinitivi, 

Participiorum, Gerundio- 
rum, et Supinorum. 
TT Reg. X. 

44 Unum Verbum regit aliud 
in Infinitivo : ut, 

a Cupio b discere. 
Reg. XI. 

45 X articipia, Gerundia, et 
Supina, regunt Casum suo- 
rum Verborum : ut, 

z Amans b virtutem. 

3 Car ens b fraude. 

j~ 1. Gerundia. 
461.(jerundium in DUM 
Nominativi Casus cum Ver- 
bo [est] regit Dativum : ut, 

a Vivendum est b mihi recti. 

z Moriendum est b omnibus. 
47 2. Gerundium in DI re- 
gitur a Substantivis vel Ad- 
jectivis: ut, 

z Tempus b legendi. 

z Cupidus b discendi. 



I delight to study. 
It does not become you to 
scold. 
* s. The GOVERNMENT 
of the Infinitive, Partici- 
ples, Gerunds, and Supines. 
ORule X. 
ne Verb governs another in 
the Infinitive : as, 
I desire to learn. 
y^ Rule XI. 

participles, Gerunds, and Su- 
pines, govern the Case of their 
own Verbs ; as, 
Loving virtue. 
Wanting guile. 
r j 1 1. Gerunds. 
1. JL he Gerund in DUM of 
the Nominative Case,. with the 
Verb [est] governs the Dative: as, 
I must live well. 
All must die. 

2. The Gerund in DI is go- 
verned by Substantives or Ad- 
jectives : as, 

Time of reading. 
Desirous to learn. 



Num. 45. Note, That oportet is elegantly joined with the Subjunctive 
Mood, ut being understood ; as, oportet facias, you must do it ; for opor- 
tet te facer e. 

Attinet, pertinet, and spectat, when used impersonally, (which rarely hap- 
pens) have the Accusative with ad, as was observed above, p. 95. 

Num. 44. Sometimes it is governed by Adjectives ; as, cupidus et cu- 
piens discere. 

Note, That the Verb coepit or coeperunt is sometimes understood ; as, 
omnes mihi invidere (supple coeperunt), they all began to envy me. 

Num. 46. This Dative is frequently understood ; as, eundum est (sup- 
ple nobis), we must go. 

Note, That this Gerund always imports necessity, and the Dative af- 
ter it is the person on whom the necessity lies. 

Num. 47. 1. The Substantives are such as these ; amor, causa, gratia, 
sludium, tempus, occasio, ars, otium, voluntas, cupido, &c. 

2. The Adjectives are generally Verbals, mentioned Num. 14. 



Part III<—Chap. I 

3. Gerundium in DO Da- 
tivi Casus regitur ab Adjecti- 
vis utilitatem vel aptitudinem 
significantibus : ut, 

Charta z utilis h scribendo. 

4. Gerundium in DUM Ac- 
cusativi Casus regitur a Prae- 
positionibus ad vel inter : ut, 

Promptus z ad b audiendum. 
Attentus a inter h docendum. 

5. Gerundium in DO Abla- 
tivi Casus regitur a Praeposi- 
tionibus, a, ab, de } e, ex, vel 
in : ut, 

Poena z a h peccando abster- 

ret. 
*Vel sine praepositione, ut 
Ablativus Modi vel Causae : 
ut, 

Memoria b excolendo a au- 

getur. 
z Defessus sum ^ambulando. 

6. Gerundia Accusativum 
regentia vertuntur eleganter 
in Participia in DUS, quae 
cum suis Substantivis in Ge- 
nere, Numero, et Casu, con- 
cordant : ut, 

Petendum est pacem, 
Tempus petendi pacem. 



, — Of Construction. 99 

3. The Gerund in DO o/48 
the Dative Case is governed 
by Adjectives signifying Use- 
fulness or Fitness : as, 

Paper useful for writing. 

4. The Gerund in DUM49 
of the Accusative Case is go- 
verned by the Prepositions 
ad or inter : as, 

Ready to hear. 
Attentive in time of teach- 
ing. 

5. The Gerund in DO of 50 
the Ablative Case is governed 
by the Prepositions, a, ab, de, 
e, ex, or in : as, 

Punishment frightens from 

sinning. 
* Or without a Preposi-5l 
tion, as the Ablative of Man- 
ner or Cause : as, 

The memory is improved 

by exercising it. 
I am wearied with walking. 

6. Gerunds governing the 52 
Accusative are elegantly turn- 
ed into the Participles in 
D US, which agree with their 
Substantives in Gender, Num- 
ber, and Case : as, 

Petenda est pax. 
Tempus petendae pacis. 



Num. 48. The Adjective of Fitness is often understood ; as, non est 
solvendoy he is not able to pay, (supple aptus or par). 

Note, That sometimes this Gerund is governed by a Verb ; as, Epi- 
dicum quaerendo operam dabo, I'll endeavour to find out Epidicus, Plaut 

Num. 49. Note 1. That it hath sometimes, but very rarely, the Pre- 
positions ob and ante ; as, ob absolvendum munus, for finishing your task, 
Cic. Ante domandum } before they are tamed or broken, Virg. speaking 
©f horses. 

Note 2. That what was the Gerund in dum of the Nominative with 
the Verb est, fait, &c. becomes the Accusative with esse ; as, omnibw 
moriendum esse novimus, we know that all must die. 

E2 



100 



Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 



Ad petendum pacem. 
A petendo pacem. 

Supina. 

53* 1. Supinum in UM ponitur 

post Verbum Motus : ut, 

*Abiit b deambulatum. 

54 * 2. Supinum in U ponitur 
post Nomen Adjectivum : ut, 
a Facile b dictu. 



Ad petendam pacem. 
A petenda pace. 

Supines. 

1. The Supine in U Mis put 
after a Verb of Motion : as, 

He hath gone to walk. 

2. The Supine in U is put 
after an Adjective Noun : as. 

Easy to tell, or to be told. 



Num. 52. Add to these the Gerunds of fungor, fruor, and potior. 

These Participles in dus are commonly called Gerundives. 

Note 1. That the Substantive must always be of the same Case that 
the Gerund was of. 

Note 2. That because of its noisy sound, the Gerund in di is seldom 
changed into the Genitive Plural ; but either the Accusative is retained ; 
as, studio patres vestros videndi, rather than patrum vestrorum videndo- 
rum : Or it is turned into the Genitive Plural, without changing the Ge- 
rund ; as, patrum vestrorum videndi studio. Thus Valla and Farnabius : 
But see my Gram. Maj. vol. ii. p. 256. 

Num. 53. The Supine in um is elegantly used with the Verb eo, when 
we signify that one sets himself about the doing of a thing ; as, in mea 
vita tu laudem is quaesitum P are you going to advance your reputation 
at the hazard of my life ? Ter. And this is the reason why this Supine, 
with iri taken impersonally, supplies the place of the Fut. of the Inf. Pass. 

Some general Remarks on the Construction of Participles, 
Gerunds, and Supines. 
Note i. That Participles, Gerunds, and Supines, have a twofold Con- 
struction ; one, as they partake of the nature of Verbs, by which they go- 
vern a certain Case after them ; another, as they partake of the nature of 
Nouns, and consequently are subject to the same rules with them. Thus, 

1. A Participle is always an Adjective agreeing with its Subst. by No. 1. 

2. A Gerund is a Substantive, and construed as follows; (1.) That in 
dum of the Nominative by No. 2. ; of the Accus. by No. 68. (2.) That 
in di by No. 11. or 14. (3.) That in do of the'Dat. by No. 16. ; of 
the Ablat by No. 69. 71. or 55. 

3. A Supine is also a Substantive. (1.) That in um, governed by ad un- 
derstood, by No. 68. (2.) That in u, governed by in understood, by No. 71. 

Note 2. That the Present of the Infinitive Active, the first Supine, 
and the Gerund in dum, with the Preposition ad, are thus distinguished : 
The Supine is used after Verbs of Motion ; the Infinitive after any other 
Verb ; the Gerund in dum, with ad, after Adjective Nouns. But these 
last are frequently to be met with after Verbs of Motion ; and Poets also 
use the Infinitive after Adjectives. 

Note 3. That the Present of the Infinitive Passive, and the last Su- 
pine, are thus distinguished : The Supine hath always an Adjective before 
it, which the Infinitive hath not, unless (as I said) among Poets. 



Part IIL—Chap. I. 

§4. CONSTRUCTIO CIR- 

CUMSTANTIARUM. 
1. Causa, Modus, et Instru- 

mentum. 
~ Reg. XII. 
*\^/ausa, Modus, et Instru- 
mentum, ponuntur in Ablati- 
vo : ut, 

*Palleo b metu. 
*Fecit suo b more. 
*Scribo b calamo. 
2. LOCUS. 
Reg. XIII. 
*1. J%l omen oppidi ponitur in 
Genitivo, cum quaestio fit per 
UBI: ut, 

*Vixit b Romae. 
z Mortuus est b Londini. 



—Of Construction. 101 

§ 4. THE CONSTRUCTION 
OF CIRCUMSTANCES, (a) 
1. The Cause, Manner, and 
Instrument. 
™ Rule XII. 
JL he Cause, Manner, and 5 5 
Instrument, are put in the Ab- 
lative : as, 

I am pale for fear. 
He did it after his own way. 
I write with a pen. 
2. PLACE. 
Rule XIII. 
Name of a Town is 56 
put in the Genitive, when the 
question is made by UBI, 
[Where] : as, 

He lived at Rome. 
He died at London. 



JL HE 



(a) Adjective Nouns, but especially Verbs, have frequently some Cir- 
cumstances going along with them in discourse, the most considerable 
whereof with respect to construction, are these five ; 1. The Cause or 
Reason why any thing is done ; 2. The Way or Manner how it is done s 
3. The Instrument or Thing wherewith it is done ; 4. The Place where ; 
arul 5. The Time when it is done. 

Num. 55. Note 1. That the Cause is known by the question cur or 
quare ? why, wherefore ? &c. The Manner by the question quomodo ? 
how ? and the Instrument by the question quocum ? wherewith ? 

Note 2. That the Preposition is frequently expressed with the Cause 
and Manner ; as, praegaudio, for joy ; propter amor em, for love ; ob cuU 
pam, for a fault ; cum summo labore, with great labour ; per dedecus, 
with disgrace. But the Preposition cum is never added to the Instru- 
ment, for we cannot say, scribo cum calamo ; cum oculis vidi. 

Note 3. But here we must carefully distinguish between the Instru- 
ment, and what is called the Ablativus Comitatus, or Ablative of Concomi- 
tancy, i. e. signifying that something was in company with another ; for 
then the Preposition [cwm] is generally expressed ; as, ingressus est cumgla- 
dio, he entered with a sword, i. e. having a sword with him, or about him. 

Note 4. That to Cause some refer the matter of which any thing is 
made ; as, clypeus aere fabricatus, a shield made of brass ; but, except 
with the Poets, the Preposition is for the most part expressed. 

Note 5. That to Manner some refer the adjunct, i. e. something join- 
ed to another thing ; as, terra amoena Jloribus, a land pleasant with flowers; 
mons nive candidus, a hill white with snow. 

Note 6. That to Instrument some refer conjicior dolore, inedid. &c. 
prosequor odio, amore, &c. officio te honore, contumelia, &c. lacesso ver- 
bis asperis, &c. 

E 3 



Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 



102 

57 *EXCEP. Si vero sit 
tertiae Declinationis, aut 
Pliiralis Numeri, in Abla- 
tivo effertur : ut, 

^Habitat b Carthagine. 
*Studuit b Parisiis. 

58 *2. Cum quaestio fit per 
QUO, nomen oppidi in Ac- 
cusative regitur : ut, 

a Venit b Edinburgum, 
*Profectus est b Athenas. 

59 *S. Si quaeratur per UN- 
DE vel QUA, nomen op- 
pidi ponitur in Ablativo : 
ut, 

*Discessit b Aberdonid. 
b Laodiced iter b faciebat. 

60 *4. Domus et Rus eodem 
modo quo oppidorum nomi- 
na construuntur : ut, of Towns : as, 
Manet domi, He stays at home. Domum revertitur, He re- 
turns home. Domo arcessitus sum, I am called from home. 
Vivit rure or ruri, Ab'iit rus, Redilt rure. 

61 *5. Nominibus regionum, 
provinciarum, et aliorum 



EXCEP. But if it is of the 
third Declension, or of the Plu- 
ral Number, it is expressed in 
the Ablative : as, 

He dwells at Carthage. 

He Xudied at Paris. 

2. When the question is made 
by Q UO, [Whither], the Name 
of a Town is governed in the 
Accusative ; as, 

He came to Edinburgh. 
He went to Athens. 

3. If the question is made by 
UNDE, [Whence], or QUA, 
[By or through what Place], 
the name of a Town is put in 
the Ablative : as, 

He went from Aberdeen. 
He went through Laodicea. 

4. Domus and Rus are con- 
strued the same way as Names 



5. To Names of Countries, 
Provinces, and other Places, 
not mentioned, the Preposition 
is generally added : as, 



locorum, non dictis, prae 

positio fere additur : ut, 

UBI ? Natus in Scotia, in Fifa, in urbe, &c 

QUO ? Abut in Scotiam, in Fifam, in [vel ad] urbem, &c 

UNDE ? Rediit e Scotia, e Fifa, ex urbe, &c. 

QUA ? Transit per Scotiam, per Fifam, per urbem, Sec. 



62 *Distantia unius loci ab 
alio ponitur in Accusativo, 
interdum et in Ablativo : 
ut, 

Glascua *distat Edinburgo 



The Distance of one Place 
from another is put in the Ac 
cusative, and sometimes in the 
Ablative: as, 

Glasgow is thirty miles dis- 



Num. 56, &c. Note i. That the Preposition is frequently added to 
Names of Towns, (especially when the question is Quo ? Unde ? or 
Qua ?) and sometimes omitted to Names of Countries, Provinces*, &c. 



Part HI— Chap. I. 
triginta b millia passuum. 
b Iter vel b itinere unius diet, 
3. TEMP US. 
R EG . XIV. 
*1. X empus pomtur in Ab- 
lativo, cum quaestio fit per 
QUANDO : ut, 
z Fenit b hord tertid. 
* 2. Cum quaestio fit per 
QUAMDIU, tempus ponitur 
in Accusativo vel Ablativo, 
sed saepius in Accusativo : ut, 

^Mansit paucos b dies. 

Sex h mensibus a abfuit. 

De Ablativo Absoluto. 

G Reg. XV. 

*Oubstantivum cum Partici- 
pio, quorum Casus a nulla alia 
dictione pendet, ponuntur in 
Ablativo absoluto : ut, 

*Sole b oriente fugiunt tene- 
brae. 



— Of Construction. 103 

tant from Edinburgh. 
One day's journey. 

3. TIME. 
„ Rule XIV. 
1. J. ime is put in the Abla-63 
tive, when the question is made 
by QUANDO, [When] : as, 
He came at three o'clock. 
2. When the question is 64 
made by QUAMJDIU [How 
long], Time is put in the Ac- 
cusative or Ablative, but of- 
tener in the Accusative : as, 
He staid a few days. 
He was away six months. 
Of the Ablative Absolute. 
\ Rule XV. 

^L substantive with a Par- 6 5 
ticiple, whose Case depends 
upon no other word, are put in 
the Ablative absolute ; as, 
The sun rising [or while 
the sun riseth] darkness 
flies away. 



Note 2. That humi, militiae, and belli, are also used in the Genitive 
when the question is made by ubi ? as, procumbit humi, he lies down on 
the ground ; domi militiaeque undfuimus, we were together both at home 
and abroad, or in peace and war, Ter. ; bellique domi agitabatur, was ma- 
naged both in peace and war, Sail. 

Note 3. That when the name of a Town is put in the Genitive, in 
urbe is understood ; and therefore we cannot say, Katus est Romae urbis 
nobilis, but urbe nobili. 

These Rules concerning names of Towns may be thus expressed : 
or at ~) • , C Genitive or Ablative *. 

or unto i ' ih i Accusative. 

_ roni or through j £ Ablative. 

* i. e. When it is of the Third Declension, or of the Plural Number. 
But when at signifies about or near a place, we make use of the Prepo- 
sition ad i as, Bellum quod ad Trojam gesserat, Virg. 

Num. 63. and 64. These two Rules may be thus expressed : 

1 . Nouns that denote a precise term of Time are put in the Ablative. 

2. Nouns that denote continuance of Time are put in the Accusative 
or Ablative. 



The name 
Tow 



c C in < 
ime of a ) 

> r n after J r 
Lfro 



E4 



104 



Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 



*Opere ^peracto ludemus. 



Our work being finished 
[or, when our work is 
finished] we will play. 

III. The Construction of 
Words Indeclinable. 

1. of Adverbs. 

1. jTldferbs are joinedto Verbs, 
Participles, Nouns, and other 
Adverbs : as, 

He writes well. 

Fighting bravely. 

A servant remarkably faithful. 

Well enough. 
2. So ?7i e Adverbs of T'wie, 
Place, and Quantity, govern the 
Genitive : as, 

The day before that day. 

Every where. 

There's enough of words. 
3. Some Derivative Ad- 



Ill. Constructio Vocum In- 
declinabilium. 

1. Adverbiorum. 

66 * 1. xtLdverbia junguntur 
Verbis, Participiis, Nomini- 
bus, et aliis Adverbiis : ut, 
Bene scribit. 
Fortiter pugnans. 
Servus egregie f delis. 
Satis bene. 
66* 2. Adverbia quaedam tem- 
poris, loci et quantitatis, 
regunt Genitivum : ut, 
z Pridie illius b diei. 
z Ubique b gentium. 
a Satis est h verborum. 
67*3. Quaedam Adverbia de- 

~Num. 65. Note 1. This Ablative is called Absolute or Independent, 
because it is not directed or determined by any other word ; for if the 
Substantive (which is principally to be regarded) hath a Word before 
that should govern it, or a Verb coming after, to which it should be a 
Nominative, then the Rule does not take place. 

Note 2. That Having, Being, or a word ending in ing, are the ordi- 
nary signs of this Ablative. 

Note 5. That (to prevent our mistaking the true Substantive) when 

a Participle Perfect is Englished by Having, we are carefully to advert 

whether it is Passive or Deponent. If it is Passive, we are to change it 

into Being, its true English. If it is Deponent, there needs no change, 

for Having is the proper English of it. The use of this Note will appear 

by the following example ; 

James, having said these things,") T , , , ..^ « 

■j , D / Jacobus, haec locutus, abut. Dep. 

James, these things being said, ( 
departed. 

Having promised a great reward. 

A great reward being promised. § Mag7id mercede promissd. Pass. 

Note 4. That when there is no Participle expressed in Latin, existente 
[being] is understood; as, me puero, I being a boy; Saturno rege, Sa- 
turn being king ; civitate nondum libera, the state not being yet free. 

Note 5. That the Participle may be resolved into dum, cum, quando, 
si, postquam, &c. [while, seeing, when, if, after] with the Verb either in 
English or Latin. 



Jacobus, his dictis, abiit. Pass. 
7 Pollicitus magnam mercedem. Dep. 



Part III.— Chap. I. 

rivata regunt Casum primiti- 
vorum : ut, 

b Omnium a elegantissime lo- 
quitur. 
Vivere a convenienter b natu- 
rae. 

T ^ 2. PRAErOSITIONUM. 

l.X raepositiones, ad, apud, 
ante, &c. Accusativum regunt : 
ut, 

z Ad b patrem. 

2. Praepositiones, a, ah, abs, 
&c. regunt Ablativum : ut, 

*A b patre. 

3. Praepositiones in, sub, su- 
per, et subter, regunt Accusa- 
tivum, cum motus ad locum 
significatur : ut, 

Eo *in b scholam. 
z Sub b moenia tendit, Virg. 
Incidit a super b agmina, Id. 
Ducit a subter b fastigia tec- 

ti, Id. 
^[ At si motus vel quies in 
loco significetur, in et sub re- 
gunt Ablativum, super et sub- 
ter vel Accusativum vel Abla- 
tivum : ut, 

Sedeo vel discurro z in b scho- 

la. 
Recubo vel ambulo *sub b um- 
bra. 
Sedens a super b arma, Virg. 
b Fronde a super viridi, Id. 
Venae a subter b cut em disper- 

sae, Plin. 
3 Subter b littore, Catull. 



— Of Construction. 105 

verbs govern the Case of their 
Primitives: as, 

He speaks the most ele- 
gantly of all. 
To live agreeably to na- 
ture. 
™ 2. of Prepositions. 
1. JL he Prepositions ad, a- 6? 
pud, ante, fyc. govern the Ac- 
cusative ; as, 
To the father. 

2. The Prepositions a, ab,69 
abs, fyc, govern the Ablative : 
as, 

From the father. 

3. Tlie Prepositionsm, sub,70 
super, and subter, govern the 
Accusative, when Motion to a 
Place is signified : as, 

I go into the school. 
He goes under the wall. 1 * . 
It fell upon the troops. 
He brings [him] under the 

roof of the house. 
<U But if Motion or Rest in 7 1 
a Place be signified, in and 
sub govern the Ablative, su- 
per and subter either the Ac- 
cusative or Ablative : as, 
I sit or run up and down 

in the school. 
I lie or walk under the 

shadow. 
Sitting above the arms. 
Upon the green grass. 
The veins dispersed under 

the skin. 
Beneath the shore. 



^ The Prepositions, with the Cases they govern, are contained in these 
verses : 

1. Hae quartum adsciscunt casum sibi praepositurae ; 
Ad, penes, adversum, cis, citra, adversus, et extra. 
E5 



106 

72 4. ^J Praepositio in com- 
positione eundem saepe ca- 
sum regit quem extra : ut, 



Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 

4. fl A Preposition oft-times 
governs the same Case in com- 
position that it does without it : 
as, 

Let us go to the school. 

Let us go out of the school. 



z Adeamus h scholam. 
*Exeamus b schola. 



3. Interjectionum. 

73 * 1. JLnterjectiones, O, 
heu, et proh, regunt Voca- 
tivum, interdum Accusati- 
vum: ut, 



3. of Interjections. 

1. JL he Interjections O, heu, 
and proh, govern the Vocative, 
and sometimes the Accusative : 
as, 



Ultra, post, praeter, juxta, per, pone, secundum, 
Erga, apud, ante, secus, trans, supra, propter, et intra ; 
Qiieis addas contra, circum, circa, inter, ob, infra. 

2. Hae sextum poscunt ; A, cum, tenus, abs, ab, et absque, 
jit que palam, pro, prae, clam, de, e, ex, sine, coram. 

5. Sub, super, in, subter, quartum sextumque requirunt 

Note 1. That versus and usque are put after their Cases; as Italiam 
versus, towards Italy; oceanum usque, as far as the ocean. But (as we 
have already observed, p. 75) these are properly Adverbs, the Preposition 
ad being understood. 

Note 2. That tenus is also put after its Case; as, mento tenus, up to 
the chin. 

Note 3. That tenus governs the Genitive Plural, 1. When the word 
wants the Singular ; as, Cumarum tenus, as far as [the town] Cumae. 2 
When we speak of things of which we have naturally but two ; as, cru- 
rum tenus, up to the legs. 

Note 4. That a and e are put before Consonants ; ab and ex before 
Vowels and Consonants ; abs before t and q. 

Note 5. That subter hath very rarely the Ablative, and only among 
Poets. 

Note 6. That in English, in is commonly the sign of the Ablative ; 
into of the Accusative. 

Note 7. In for erga, contra, per, supra, ad, &c. governs the Accusative ; 
as, Amor in patriam. Quid ego in ie commisi ? Crescit in dies singulos. 
Imperium regum in proprios greges, Horat Pisces in coenam enipti. 
But in for inter governs the Ablative ; as, in amicis habere, Sallust. 

Sub for circa governs the Accusative ; as, sub coenam. 

Super for ultra, praeter, and inter, governs the Accusative ; as, Super 
Ga7'amantas,\"ivg. Super grati am suam, Sallust. In sermone super coenam 
nato, Suet. For de, it governs the Ablative ; as, Super hac re nimis, Cic. 

Num. 72. Note, That this Rule onry takes place when the Preposi- 
tion may be dissolved from the Verb, and put before the Case by itself; 
as, alloquor patrem, i. e. loquor ad patrem. And even then, the Prepo- 
sition is frequently repeated ; as, cxire e finibus suis, Caes. 



Part III.— Chap. /.- 

a formose h puer ! 
*Hea b 7ne miserumJ 



* 2. Hei et Vae regunt Da- 
tivum : ut, 
z Hei h mihi! 
a Vae b vobis ! 

^ 4. CoNJUNCTIONUM. 
*l.VyONJUNCTIONES, et, ac, at^ 
que, nee, neque, aut, vel, et 
quaedam aliae, connectunt si- 
miles Casus et Modos : ut, 
Honor a b patrem *et b ma- 

trem. 
Nee b scribit z nec b legit. 



* 2. Ut, quo, licet, ne, utinam, 
et dummodo, Subjunctivo Mo- 
do fere semper adhaerent : ut, 



Lego a ut b discam. 
a Utinam b saperes. 



-Of Construction. 
O fair boy ! 
Ah wretch that I am ! 



107 



2. Hei and Vae govern the 74 
Dative : as, 
Ah me ! 
Wo to you ! 



T< 



4. of Conjunctions. 



1. JL he Conjunctions, et, ac,75 
atque, nee, neque, aut, vel, 
and some others, couple like 
Cases and Moods : as, 
Honour your father and 

mother. 
He neither writes nor 
reads. 

2. Ut, quo, licet, ne, uti-76 
nam, and dummodo, are for 
the most part joined with the 
Subjunctive Mood : as, 

I read that I may learn. 

I wish you were wise. 



Num. 75. To these add quam, nisi, praeterquam, an, and Adverbs of 
Likeness. The reason of this Construction is, because the words so cou- 
pled depend all upon the same word, which is expressed to one of them? 
and understood to the other. 

Num. 76. To these add all Indefinite words, that is, Interrogatives, 
whether Nouns, Pronouns, Adverbs, or Conjunctions, when taken in a 
doubtful or indefinite sense ; such as, Quis, uter, quantus, &c. Ubi, quo. 
unde, &c. Cur, quare, quamobrem, num, an, anne, &c. [See p. 75. and 
78.] They generally become Indefinites, when another word comes before 
them in the sentence; such as, scio, nescio, video, intelligo, dabito, and 
the like ; as, Ubi est jrater tuus ? Nescio ubi sit. An venturus est t 
Dubito an venturus sit. 

Ne, the Adverb of Forbidding, requires the Imperative or Subjunctive; 
as, Ne time, or Ne timeas. See p. 55. 

Dum, quum, quod, si, ni, sin, nisi, etsi, etiamsi, priusquam, simulac, 
siquidem, quandoquidem, &c. are joined sometimes with the Indicative, 
and sometimes with the Subjunctive. 

Ee 



108 



Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 



SYNTAXEOS 

SYNOPSIS; 

S1VE, 

Genuinae et maxime necessariae 
Constructionis Regulae, ad 
quas caeterae omnes reducun- 
tur. 

AXIOM AT A. 

I. Otans Oratio constat ex 
Nomine et Verbo. 

II. Omnis Nominativus ha- 
bet suum Verbum expressum 
vel suppressum. 

III. Omne verbum finitum 
nabet suum Norninativum ex- 
pressum vel suppressum. 

IV. Omne Adjectivum habet 
suum Substantivum expressum 
vel suppressum. 

Sex Casuum Construction 

I. Omne Verbum finitum, ex- 
pressum vel suppressum, con- 
cordat cum Nominativo, ex- 
presso vel suppresso, in Nume- 
ro et Persona : ut, 

Puer legit, 

^Homines] ainnt. 

Romani [coeperunt] festi- 



A SUMMARY OF 

SYNTAX; 

OR, 

The true and most necessary 
Rules of Construction, to 
which all the rest are re- 
duced. 

First PRINCIPLES. 

I. Evert Speech [or Sen- 
tence] consists of a Noun and a 
Verb. 

II. Every Nominative hath 
its oiun Verb expressed or un- 
derstood. 

III. Every Finite Verb hath 
its own Nominative expressed 
or understood. 

IV. Every Adjective hath its 
own Substantive expressed or 
understood. 

The Construction of the Six 

Cases. 
I. Every Verb of the Finite 
Mood, expressed or understood, 
agrees with its Nominative, ex- 
pressed or understood, in Num- 
ber and Person : as, 

The boy reads. 

They say. 

The Romans made haste. 



Part. III.— Chap. L 

II. Omnis Genitivus regitur 
a Substantivo expresso vel sup- 
presso : ut, 

Liber fratris. 

Est [officium] patris. 

III. Dativus Acquisitionis, 
i. e. cui aliquid acquiritur vel 
adimitur, cuivis Nomini aut 
Verbo expresso vel suppresso 
jungitur: ut, 

Dedi Petro. 
Cui dedisti ? 

[Dedi] Petro 
Utilis hello. 
Non est [aptus] solvendo. 

IV. Omnis Accusativus re- 
gitur a Verbo activo, vel* Prae- 
positione, expressis vel suppres- 
sis : ut, 

Amo Deum ; 

et [amo] parentes. 
Ad patrem. 
Abiit [ad] Londinum. 
^f Aut Infmitivo praeponitur 
expressus vel suppressus : ut, 
Dicit se scribere. 
Licet mihi [me] esse bonum. 

V. Omnis Vocativus abso- 
lute ponitur, addita nonnun- 
quam Interjectione : ut, 

Dave. 
Heus, Syre. 

VI. Omnis Ablativus regi- 
tur a* Praepositione expressa 
vel suppressa : ut, 

A puero. 

Exultat [prae] gaudio. 



— Of Construction. 1 09 

II. Every Genitive is govern- 
ed by a Substantive expressed 
or understood : as, 

The book of my brother. 
It is the duty of a father. 

III. The Dative of Acquisi- 
tion, i. e. to which any Thing 
is acquired, or from which it is 
taken, is joined to any Noun or 
Verb expressed or understood: as, 

I gave it to Peter. 

To whom did you give it ? 

To Peter. 
Profitable for war. 
He is not able to pay. 

IV. Every Accusative is go- 
verned by an Active Verb, or a 
* Preposition expressed or un- 
derstood: as, 

I love God; 

and my parents. 
To the father. 
He hath gone to London. 
^[ Or is put before the Infini- 
tive expressed or understood: as, 
He says that he is writing. 
I may be good. 

V. Every Vocative is placed 
absolutely, the Interjection O be- 
ing sometimes added : as, 

O Davus. 

Come hither, Syrus. 

VI. Every Ablative is go- 
verned by a * Preposition ex- 
pressed or understood : as, 

From a child. 
He leaps for joy. 



* See Page 75. and Larger Syntax, Page 105, and 1GG. 



110 



Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, 



APPENDIX. 



I* vJmne Adjectivum con- 
cordat cum Substantivo ex- 
presso vel suppresso, in Gene- 
re, Numero, et Casu : ut, 

Bonus vir. 

Triste [negotium]. 

II. Substantiva significantia 
eandem rem conveniunt in Ca- 
su : ut, 

Dominus Deus. 

III. Omnis Infinitivus regi- 
tur a Verbo vel Nomine ex- 
pressis vel suppressis : ut, 

Cupio discere. 
Dignus amari. 
Populus [coepit] mirari. 



I. JlL very Adjective agrees 
with a Substantive, expressed or 
understood, in Gender, Number, 
and Case : as, 

A good man. 

A sad thing. 

II. Substantives signifying the 
same Thing agree in Case : as, 

The Lord God. 

III. Every Infinitive is go- 
verned by a Verb or Noun ex- 
pressed or understood : as, 

I desire to learn. 
Worthy to be loved. 
The people wondered. 



EXPLANATION. 

All Construction is either TRUE or APPARENT, or (as Gramma- 
rians express ife) JUST or FIGURATIVE. — TRUE Construction is 
founded upon-the essential properties of Words, and is almost the same 
in all languages. APPARENT Construction entirely depends upon 
Custom, which, either for elegance or dispatch, leaves out a great many 
words otherwise necessary to make a sentence perfectly full and gramma- 
tical. — The first is comprised in these few Fundamental Rules, and more 
fully branched out in the Larger Syntax. The other is also interspersed 
through the Larger Syntax, but distinguished from that which is True by 
an Asterisk. 

The Cases mentioned in the Rules of the Larger Syntax immediately 
discover the Rules of this Summary to which they respectively belong: those 
that are True, without any Ellipsis ; those that are Figurative, by having 
their Ellipsis supplied as follows, as they are numbered in the margin. 

To Rule II. are reduced Num. 15. supple negotium. Num. 14. and 47. 
sup. de causa, gratia, or in re, negotio. Num. 15. sup. e numero. Num. 
21. sup. de negotio. Num. 22. and 25. sup, officium, negotium, &c. Num. 
24. sup. 1. de causa, &c. ; 2. sat, taken from the Verb. Num. 29. sup. 
memoriam, notitiam, verba, &c. Num. 50. sup. de crimine, poena, &c. 
Num. 55. and 56. sup. pro re, or pretio aeris. Num. 40. sup. inter nego- 
tia, and res [fert] se ad negotia. Num. 42. sup. res, negotium, &c. Num. 
56. sup. in urbe. Num. 60. domi, sup. in aedibus. Num. 66. these Ad- 
verbs seem to be taken for Substantive Nouns. 

To RULE III. is reduced Num. 75. sup. malum est ; or these Inter- 
actions are used as Substantives. 



Part HI.— Chap. IL— Of Resolution. Ill 

To RULE IV. belong Num. 18. 55. and 62. sup. ad. Num. 55. sup. 
quod ad. Num. 41. i. e. Est inter mea negotia ; Refert [or res feri] 
se ad mea negotia, &c. Num. 58. sup. ad or in. Num. 64. sup. per. 
Num. 73. sup. sentio, lugeo, &c. 

To RULE VI. belong Num. 12. sup. e, ex, cum, &c. Num. 19. sup. 
prae. Num. 20. sup. de, e, or, cum, &c. Num. 21. sup. a, ab, &c. 
Num. 54. sup. pro. Num. 57. 58. sup. a, abs, de, e, ex Num. 51. and 
55. sup. prac, cum, a, ab, e, ex, &c. Num. 54. sup. in orde. Num. 57, 
sup. in. Num. 59. sup. a, ab, e, ex. Num. 62. sup. in. Num. 64. sup. 
in or pro. Num. 65. sup. sm&, cum, a, a b. 

Note 1. That under Verbs must also be comprehended Participles, 
Gerunds, and Supines, because the general signification of Verb is includ- 
ed in them. 

Note 2. That as a consequence of this, a learned grammarian inge- 
niously supposes, that the Dative and Infinitive are always governed by a 
Verb ; and that when they seem to be governed by a Noun, the Partici- 
ple existent is understood : ut, Utilis [existens~\ bello. Pollio praesidium 
[existens] reis. Dignus [existens] amari. 

Note 5. That the Vocative is properly no part of a sentence, but the 
case by which we excite one to hear or execute what we say. Therefore 
when the Vocative is put before the Imperative, as frequently happens, 
the Nominate TU or VOS is understood; and that even though these 
words be already expressed in the Vocative : as, Tw, Jacobe, lege ; i. e. 
tu Jacobe, tu lege. 

Note 4. That the Vocative is sufficient to itself, and does not necessa- 
rily require the Interjection 0. See Vossius, lib. vii. cap. 69. and Sanc- 
tius, lib. iv. De Ellipsi Verb. Audio et Narro. 



CHAP. IL 
_ OF EXPOSITION or RESOLUTION. 

IMPOSITION or RESOLUTION is the unfolding of a Sentence, 
and placing all the parts of it, whether expressed or understood, in their 
proper order, that the true sense and meaning of it may appear. 
1. A SENTENCE is either Simple or Compound. 

1. A SIMPLE Sentence is that which hath one Finite Verb in it. 

2. A COMPOUND Sentence is that which hath two or more such 
verbs in it joined together bv some Couples. 

These COUPLES are of four sorts. 1. The Relative QUI. 2. Some 
Comparative words : such as, tantus, quantus ; talis, qualis ; tam,qudm, 
&c. . 5. Indefinite words, [See Page 78. and 107.] 4. Conjunctions. 

In a Simple Sentence there are two things to be considered, — 1. Its 
Essential. 2. Its Accidental parts. 

1. The Essential parts of a Sentence are a Nominative and a Verb. 

2. The Accidental parts are of four kinds ; 1. Such as excite Attention ; 
as the Vocative and exciting Particles : as, 0, en, ecce, heus, &c. 2. Such as 
serve to introduce a sentence, or to show its dependence upon what was said 
before ; as, Jam, kactcnus, quandoquidem, cum, dum, interea, &c. 3. Such as 
limit the general and indefinite signification either of the Nominative or 
Verb ; and these are Substantive Nouns. 4. Such as qualify and explain 
them, viz. Adjectives, Adverbs, and Prepositions, with their Cases. Some- 



112 Rudiments of the Latin Tongue, fyc. 

times a part of a compound sentence supplies the place of those- two last 
kinds of words. 

II. The ORDER of words in a sentence is eitherNatural or Artificial. 

1 . NATURAL Order is when the words of a sentence naturally follow 
one after another, in the same order with the conceptions of our minds. 

2. ARTIFICIAL Order is when words are so ranged as to render them 
most agreeable to the ear ; but so as the sense be not thereby obscured. 

III. A Sentence may be resolved from the Artificial into the Natural 
order, by the following rules : 

1. Take the Vocative, Exciting, and Introductory words, where they 
are found. 

2. The NOMINATIVE. 

3. Words limiting or explaining it ; i. e. Words agreeing with or go- 
verned by it, or by one another successively (till you come to the Verb), 
where thev are found. 

4. The* VERB. 

5. Words limiting or explaining it, <£c. where they are found, to the 
end of the sentence. 

6. Supply every where the words that are understood. 

7. If the sentence is compound, take the parts of it severally as they 
depend upon one another, proceeding with each of them as above. 

Example. — Vale igitur, mi Cicero, tibique persuade esse te quidem 
mihi carissimum ; sed multofore cariorem, si talibus monumentis prae- 
ceptisque laetabere. Cic. Off lib. 5. 

Farewell then, my [son] Cicero, and assure yourself that you are indeed 
very dear unto me ; but shall be much dearer, if you shall take delight in 
such writings and instructions. 

This Compound Sentence is resolved into these five Simple Sentences, 

1. Igitur mi [fili] Cicero, [tu] vale, 2. et [tu] persuade tibi te esse 
quidem carissimum [filium] mihi ; 3. sed [tu persuade tibi te~\fore cario- 
rem [filium mihi in] multo [negotio], 4. si [tu] laetabere talibus monu- 
mentis, 5. et [si tu laetabere talibus] jiraecepiis. 

Note 1. That Interrogative words stand always first in a Sentence, un- 
less a Preposition comes before them. 

Note 2. That Negative words stand immediately before the Verb. 

Note 3. That Relatives are placed before the word by which they are 
governed, unless it is a Preposition. 

Note 4. That the Subjunctive Mood is used in Compound Sentences. 

Note 5. That the parts of a Compound Sentence are separated from 
one another by these marks called INTERPUNCTIONS. 1. Those 
that are smaller, named Clauses, by this mark (,) called a Comma. 2. 
Those that are greater, named Members, by this mark ( : ) called Colon, 
or this (;) called a Semicolon. 3. When a sentence is thrown in that 
hath little or no connection with the rest, it is inclosed within what we call 
a Parenthesis, marked thus (). 

. But when the Sentence, whether Simple or Compound, is fully ended, 
if it is a plain Affirmation or Negation, it is inclosed with this mark (.) 
called a Point : If a question is asked, with this mark (?) called a Point 
of Interrogation : If Wonder, or some other sudden Passion, is signified, 
with this mark (!) called a Point of Admiration. 

FINIS. 



PRIMA 
MORUM ET PIETATIS 

PRAECEPTA, 



I. Dicta septem Sapientum e Graecis. 

II. Gulielmi Lilii Monita Paedagogica. 

III. Dion. Catonis Disticha Moralia. 

IV. Joan. Sulpitii Verulani de Moribus et Civilitate Puerorum 

Carmen. 

V. Rudimenta Pietatis; sive, Oratio Dominica, Symbolum Aposto- 

licum, et Decalogus : item, Duorum Sacramentorum, Baptis- 
mi et Sacrae Coenae Domini, Institutiones. 

QUIBUS ACCESSIT 

Summula CATECHISMI ad piam Juniorum Educationem 
apprime utilis; 



Praecipna Capita Christianae Religionis, desumpta e Sacra Scriptura 
Veteris ac Novi Testamenti. 



Timor Domini initium sapientiae est. Prov. i. 7. 

Pietas ad omnia utilis est, promissiones habens et praesentis et futurae 

vitae. 1 Tim. iv. 8. 



DICTA SAPIENTUM E GRAECIS, 

D. ERASMO ROTEROD. Interpreter 

Aurea dicta, puer, quae sunt hie, mente reconde : 
Hinc poteris magna commoditate frui. 



DICTA PERIANDRI CORINTHII. 



Omnibus placeto. 
Bona res quies. 
Periculosa temeritas. 
Semper voluptates sunt mor- 

tales : 
Honores autem immortales. 
Amicis adversa fortuna uten- 

tibus idem esto. 
Lucrum turpe, res pessima. 
Quicquid promiseris, facito. 
Infortunium tuum celato, ne 

voluptate afficias inimicos. 
Veritati adhaereto. 
Age quae justa sunt. 
Violentiam oderis. 
Principibus cede. 
Voluptati tempera. 
A jurejurando abstine. 
Pietatem sectare. 
Laudato honesta. 
A vitiis abstine. 
Beneficium repende. 
Supplicibus misericors esto. 
Liberos instrue. 



Mortalia cogita. 

Ne prior injuriam facias. 

Audi quae ad te pertinent. 

Probrum fugito. 

Responde in tempore. 

Ea facito quorum te non possit 

poenitere. 
Ne cui invideas. 
Oculis moderare. 
Quod justum est imitare. 
Bene meritos honora. 
Spem fove. 
Calumniam oderis. 
Affabilis esto. 

Cum erraris, muta consilium. 
Concordiam sectare. 
Diuturnam amicitiam custodi. 
Magistratus metue. 
Omnibus teipsum praebe. 
Ne loquaris ad gratiam. 
Ne tempori credideris. 
Teipsum ne negligas. 
Senior em r ever ere. 
Mortem oppete pro patria. 



Sapientum utere consuetudine. Ne quavis de re doleas. 



Litem oderis. 

Bonos in pretio habeto. 

Arcanum cela. 

Cede magnis. 

Opportunitatem exspectato. 



Ex ingenuis liberos crea. 
Sperato tanquam mortalis : 
Parcere tanquam immortalis 
Ne efferaris gloria. 
Largire cum utilitate. 



Dicta Sapientum. 3 

Amicis utere. Dilige amicos. 

Mortuum ne irrideto. Consule inculpate. 

DICTA BIANTIS PRIENENSIS. 
In speculo teipsum contempla- Quid sit autem ausculta. 

re, et si formosus apparebis, Prius autem intellige ; et dein- 

age quae deceant formam : de ad opus accede. 

sin deformis, quod in facie Ne ob divitias laudaris virum 

minus est, vel deest, id mo- indignum. 

rum pensato pulchritudine. Persuasione cape, non vi. 
Audito multa : Compara in adolescentia qui- 

Loquere pauca. dem modestiam, in senectu- 

De Numine ne male loquaris : te verd prudentiam. 

DICTA PITTA CI MITYLENAEI. 
(aCUM facturus es, ea ne dixe- Infortunatum ne irriseris. 

ris: frustratus enim rideberis. Audito libenter. 
Depositum redde. Ne lingua praecurrat mentem. 

Desidiosus ne esto. Ne festines loqui. 

A familiaribus in minutis rebus Nosce teipsum. 

laesus, feras. Legibus pare. 

Amico ne maledixeris. Voluptatem coerce. 

Inimicum ne putes amicum. Ne quid nimis. 
Uxori dominare [Christiane]. Inimicitiam solve. 
Quae feceris parentibus^ eadem Ante omnia venerare Numen. 

a liberis exspecta. Parentes reverere. 

Inter amicos ne fueris judex. Quae fieri non possunt, cave 
Ne contende cum parentibus, concupiscas. 

etiamsi justa dixeris. Uxorem ducito ex aequalibus ; 

Ne geras imperium, priusquam ne, si ex ditioribus duxeris, 

parere didiceris. dominos tibi pares, non af- 

fines. 

DICTA CLEOBULI LINDII. 

A e sis unquam elatus. Suspicionem abjicito. 

Domus curam age. Parentes patientia vince. 

Libros evolve. Beneficii accepti memento. 

Juste judicato. Inferiorem ne rejicias. 

Bonis benefacito. Aliena ne concupiscas. 

Liberos tibi charissimos erudi. Ne teipsum praecipites in dis- 
A maledicentia temperato. crimen. 



4? Dicta Sapient mn. 

Res amici diligas, ac perinde Citius ad infortunatos amicos, 

serves ut tuas. quam ad fortunatos, proficis- 

Lapis auri index, aurum ho- cere. 

minum. Mendax calumnia vitam cor- 

Quod oderis, alteri ne feceris. rumpit. 
Voto nihil pretiosius. Mendaces odit quisque prudens 

Ne cui miniteris ; est enim et sapiens. 

muliebre. 

DICTA CHILONIS LACEDAEMONII. 

^N o s c e teipsum. Sapientia utere. 

Ne cui invideas mortalia. Multitudini place. 

Temperantiam exerce. Oderis calumnias. 

Turpia fuge. Ne quid suspiceris. 

Tempori parce. Moribus probatis esto, 

Juste rem para. Ne fueris onerosus. 

DICTA SOLONIS ATHENIENSIS. 
Deum cole. Legibus pareto. 

Parentes reverere. Cogita quod justum est. 

Amicis succurre. Iracundiae moderare. 

Veritatem sustineto. Virtutem laudato. 

Ne jurato. Malos odio prosequitor. 

DICTA THALETIS MILESIL 

x eincipem honora. Gloriam sectare. 

Amicos probato. Vitae curam age. 

Similis tui sis. Pacem dilige. 

Nemini promittito/ Laudatus esto apud omnes. 

Quod adest boni consulito. Susurronem ex aedibus ejice. 

A vitiis abstineto. 



GULIELMI LILII MON1TA PAEDAGOGICA; 

SIVE, CARMEN DE MORIBUS AD SUOS DISCIPULOS. 

W,u i mihi discipulus, puer, es, cupis atque doceri, 

Hue ades, haec animo concipe dicta tuo. 
Mane citus lectum fuge, mollem discute somnum ; 

Templa petas supplex, et venerare Deum. 
Attamen in primis facies sit lota manusque ; 

Sint nitidae vestes, comptaque caesaries. 
Desidiam fugiens, cum te schola nostra vocarit, 

Adsis ; nulla pigrae sit tibi causa morae. 



GuL Lilii Carmen De Moribus. 
Me praeceptorem cum videris, ore saluta, 

Et condiscipulos ordine quosque tuos. 
Tu quoque fac sedeas, ubi te sedisse jubemus : 

Inque loco, nisi sis jussus abire, mane. 
Ac magis ut quisque est doctrinae munere clarus, 

Hoc magis is clara sede locandus erit. 
Scalpellum, calami, atramentum, charta, libelli, 

Sint semper studiis arma parata tuis. 
Si quid dictabo, scribes ; at singula recte : 

Nee macula, aut scriptis menda sit ulla tuis. 
Sed tua nee laceris dictata aut carmina chartis 

Mandes, quae libris inseruisse decet. 
Saepe recognoscas tibi lecta, animoque revolvas : 

Si dubites, nunc hos consule, nunc alios. 
Qui dubitat, qui saepe rogat, mea dicta tenebit ; 

Is qui nil dubitat, nil capit inde boni. 
Disce, puer, quaeso ; noli dediscere quidquam : 

Ne mens te insimulet conscia desidiae. 
Sisque animo attentus : quid enim docuisse juvabit, 

Si mea non firmo pectore verba premas ? 
Nil tarn difficile est, quod non solertia vincat : 

Invigila, et parta est gloria militiae. 
Nam veluti flores tellus, nee semina profert, 

Ni sit continuo victa labore manus : 
Sic puer, ingenium si non exercitet, ipsum 

Tempus et amittit, spem simul ingenii. 
Est etiam semper lex in sermone tenenda, 

Ne nos offendat improba garrulitas. 
Incumbens studio, submissa voce loqueris ; 

Nobis dum reddis, voce canorus eris. 
Et quaecunque mihi reddes, discantur ad unguem ~ 9 

Singula et abjecto verbula redde libro. 
Nee verbum quisquam dicturo suggerat ullum ; 

Quod puero exitium non mediocre park. 
Si quicquam rogito, sic respondere studebis, 

Ut laudem dictis et mereare decus. 
Non lingua celeri nimis, aut laudabere tarda ; 

Est virtus medium, quod tenuisse juvat. 
Et quoties loqueris, memor esto loquare Latine ; 

Et veluti scopulos barbara verba fuge. 
Praeterea socios, quoties te cunque rogabunt, 

Instrue ; et ignaros ad mea vota trahe. 



6 Qui. Lilii Carmen De Morions. 

Qui docet indoctos, licet indoctissimus esset, 

Ipse brevi reliquis doctior esse queat. 
Sed tu nee stolidos imitabere Grammaticastros, 

Ingens Romani dedecus eloquii : 
Quorum tarn fatuus nemo, aut tarn barbarus ore est, 

Quern non auctorem barbara turba probet. 
Grammaticas recte si vis cognoscere leges, 

Discere si cupias cultius ore loqui : 
Addiscas veterum clarissima scripta virorum, 

Et quos auctores turba Latina docet. 
Nunc te Virgilius, nunc ipse Terentius optat, 

Nunc simul amplecti te Ciceronis opus : 
Quos qui non didicit, nil praeter somnia vidit, 

Certat et in tenebris vivere Cimmeriis. 
Sunt quos delectat (studio virtutis honestae 

Posthabito) nugis tempora conterere : 
Sunt quibus est cordi, manibus, pedibusve sodales, 

Aut alio quovis solicitare modo : 
Est alius, qui se dum clarum sanguine jactat, 

Insulso reliquis improbat ore genus. 
Te tarn prava sequi nolim vestigia morum : 

Ne tandem factis praemia digna feras. 
Nil dabis, aut vendes, nil permutabis emesve, 

Ex damno alterius commoda nulla feres. 
Insuper et nummos, irritamenta malorum, 

Mitte aliis ; puerum nil nisi pura decent. 
Clamor, rixa, joci, mendacia, furta, cachinni, 

Sint procul a vobis ; Martis et arma procul. 
Nil penitus dices, quod turpe aut non sit honestum * 

Est vitae ac pariter janua lingua necis. 
Ingens crede nefas cuiquam maledicta referre, 

Jurare aut magni nomina sacra Dei. 
Denique servabis res omnes atque libellos, 

Et tecum, quoties isque redisque, feres. 
Effuge vel causas faciunt quaecunque nocentem, 

In quibus et nobis displicuisse potes. 



DIONYSIl CATONIS 



DISTICHA DE MOEIBUS, AD FILIUM I 

Recognita de novo ad Metaphrasin Jos. Scaligeri, ejusdemque 
D. Erasmi, P. Scriverii, et M. Zuer. Boxhornii Kotas et 
Castigationes, a T. R. 



IN USUM SCHOLARUM. 



Illis quae cecinit Themis aut Thymbraeus Apollo, 
Non canit hicce catus deteriora Cato. 

Praefatio cum brevissimzs Praeceptis. 
(xuum animadverterem quam plurimos homines graviter er- 
rare in via morum, succurrendum et consulendum eorum opin- 
ion! existimavi, maxime ut gloriose viverent, et honorem con- 
tingerent. Nunc te (fili charissime) docebo, quo pacto mores 
animi tui componas. Igitui- praecepta mea ita legito, ut in- 
telligas : Legere enim, et non intelligere, negligere est. 

Xtaque Deo supplica. Mutuum dato. 



Parentes ama. 

Cognatos cole. 

Magistrum metue. 

Datum serva. 

Foro te para. 

Cum bonis ambula. 

Ad consilium ne accesseris, 

antequam voceris. 
Mundus esto. 
Saluta libenter. 
Majori cede. 
Minori parce. 
Rem tuam custodi. 
Verecundiam serva 
Diligentiam adhibe. 
Libros lege. 

Quae legeris memento. . 
Familiam cura. 
Blandus esto. 
Irasci ab re noli. 
Neminem irriseris. 
Miserum ne irriseris. 



Cui des videto. 

In judicium adesto. 

Conjugem ama. 

Liberos erudi. 

Patere legem quam ipse tule- 

ris. 
Pauca in convivio loquere. 
Convivare raro. 
Quod satis est dormi. 
Jusjurandum serva. 
Vino te tempera. 
Pugna pro patria. 
Nil temere credideris. 
Tu te consule. 
Meretricem fuge. 
Liter as disce. 
Nihil mentiri debes. 
Bonis benefacito. 
Maledicus ne esto. 
Existimationem retine. 
Aequum judica. 
Parentes patientia vince. 



8 Lib. DisticJwrum Catonis 

Beneficii accepti memor esto. Aleas fuge. 

Ad praetorium stato. Nihil ex arbitrio virium feceris. 

Consultus esto. Minorem te ne contempseris. 

Utere virtute. Aliena concupiscere noli. 

Iracundiam tempera. Illud stude quod justum est. 

Trocho lude. Amorem libenter ferto. 



DISTICHORUM DE MORIBUS 

LIBER I. 

Dei cultus praecipuus. 
!Si Deus est animus, nobis ut carmina dicunt, 
Hie tibi praecipue sit pura mente colendus. 

Somnolentia vitanda. 
Plus vigila semper, nee somno deditus esto : 
Nam diuturna quies vitiis alimenta ministrat. 

Cohibenda lingua. 
Virtutem primam esse puta, compescere linguam ; 
Proximus ille Deo, qui scit ratione tacere. 

Sibi ipsi conveniendum. 
Sperne repugnando tibi tu contrarius esse : 
Conveniet nulli qui secum dissidet ipse. 

Nemo temere culpandus. 
Si vitam inspicias hominum, si denique mores, 
Cum culpas alios, nemo sine crimine vivit. 

Utilitas clivitiis anteponenda. 
Quae nocitura tenes, quamvis sint chara, relinque : 
Utilitas opibus praeponi tempore debet. 

Mores pro tempore mutandi. 

Et *levis et constans, ut res expostulat, esto : *al. Con. 

Temporibus mores sapiens sine crimine mutat. s * aas aut * e 

Uxori non semper assentiendum. > 7 P &' 

__.. v * . , . j . nante metro 

Nil temere uxon de serves crede querenti : 

Saepe etenim mulier, quern conjux diligit, odit. 

Instandum correctioni amici. 
Cumque mones aliquem, nee se velit ipse moneri, 
Si tibi sit charus, noli desistere coeptis. 

Stulti verbis non vincuntur. 
Contra verbosos noli contendere verbis : 
Sermo datur cunctis, animi sapientia paucis. 

Amicus sibi quisque primus. 
Dilige sic alios, ut sis tibi charus amicus, 
Sic bonus esto bonis, ne te mala damna sequantur 



Distichorum Catonis Lib. I. 

Rumores spargere vetitum. 
Rumores fuge, ne incipias novus auctor haberi : 
Nam nulli tacuisse nocet, nocet esse locutum. 

Fides aliena non promittenda. 
Rem tibi promissam certo promittere noli : 
Rara fides ideo est, quia multi multa loquuntur. 

Judex quisque sit sui. 
Cum te aliquis laudat, judex tuus esse memento : 
Plus aliis de te, quam tu tibi credere noli. 

Beneficiorum ratio. 
Officium alterius multis narrare memento : 
Atque aliis cum tu benefeceris, ipse sileto. 

Senio bene gesta referenda. 
Multorum cum facta senex et dicta recenses, 
Fac tibi succurrant, juvenis quae feceris ipse. 

Suspicionis labes. 
Ne cures si quis tacito sermone loquatur : 
Conscius ipse sibi de se putat omnia dici. 

In prosperis de adversis cogitandum. 
Cum fueris felix, quae sunt adversa caveto : 
Non eodem cursu respondent ultima primis. 

Mors alterius non speranda. 
Cum dubia et fragilis sit nobis vita tributa, 
In morte alterius spem tu tibi ponere noli. 

Animus in dorio aestimandus. 
Exiguum munus cum dat tibi pauper amicus, 
Accipito placide, plene et laudare memento. 

Paupertas toleranda. 
Infantem nudum cum te natura crearit, 
Paupertatis onus patienter ferre memento. 

Mors non formidanda. 
Ne timeas illam, quae vitae est ultima finis : 
Qui mortem metuit, quod vivit perdit id ipsum. 

Amicorum ingratitudo fugienda. 
Si tibi pro meritis nemo respondet amicus, 
Incusare Deum noli, sed te ipse coerce. 

Frugalitas. 
Ne tibi quid desit, quaesitis utere parce : 
Utque quod est serves, semper tibi deesse putato, 

Promissio iterata molesta. 
Quod praestare potes, ne bis promiseris ulli : 
Ne sis ventosus, dum vis bonus ipse videri. 

Ars arte deludenda. 
Qui simulat verbis, nee corde est fidus amicus, 
Tu quoque fac simile ; sic ars deluditur arte. 

F 



10 Distickorum Catonis Lib, I. 

Blandiloquentia suspecta. 
Noli homines blando nimium sermone probare : 
Fistula dulce canit, volucrem dum decipit auceps. 

Liberi artibus instruendi. 
Cum tibi sint nati, nee opes ; tunc artibus illos 
Instrue, quo possint inopem defendere vitam. 

Res quomodo aestimandae. 
Quod vile est, carum ; quod carum est, vile putato : 
Sic tibi nee cupidus, nee avarus habeberis ulli. 

Culpata non facienda. 
Quae culpare soles, ea tu ne feceris ipse : 
Turpe est doctori cum culpa redarguit ipsum. 

Concedenda petenda. 
Quod justum est petito, vel quod videatur honestum : 
Nam stultum est petere id quod possit jure negari. 

Nota ignotis non commutanda. 
Ignotum tibi tu noli praeponere notis : 
Cognita judicio constant, incognita casu. 

Dies quisque supremus putandus. 
Cum dubia incertis versetur vita periclis, 
Pro lucro tibi pone diem * quocunque laboras. * at. qui- 

Obsecundandum amicis. cunque. 

Vincere cum possis, interdum cede sodali : 
Obsequio quoniam dulces retinentur amici. 

Amieitiae mutua officia. 
Ne dubites, cum magna petas, impendere parva : 
His etenim rebus conjungit gratia charos. 

Amicitia rixas odit. 
Litem inferre cave, cum quo tibi gratia juncta est : 
Ira odium generat, concordia nutrit amorem. 

Castigatio sine ira. 
Servorum ob culpam cum te dolor urget in iram, 
Ipse tibi moderare, tuis ut parcere possis. 

Patientia vincendum. . 

Quem superare potes, interdum vince ferendo : 
Maxima enim morum semper patientia virtus. 

Quaesita sunt servanda. 
Conserva potius, quae sunt jam parta labore : 
Cum labor in damno est, crescit mortalis egesta, 

Consulendum sibi in primis. 
Dapsilis interdum notis, et charus amicis, 
Cum fueris felix, semper tibi proximus est©. 



Distichorum Catonis Lib, IT. 11 

LIB. II. PRAEFATIO. 

Xelluris si forte velis cognoscere cultus, 
Virgilium legito. Quod si mage nosse laboras 
Herbarum vires, Macer has tibi carmine dicet, 
Corporis ut cunctos possis depellere morbos. 
Si Romana cupis et civica noscere bella, 
Lucanum quaeras, qui Martis proelia dixit. 
Si quis amare velis, vel discere amare legendo, 
Nasonem petito. Sin' autem cura tibi haec est, 
Ut sapiens vivas, audi quae discere possis, 
Per quae semotum vitiis traducitur aevum. 
Ergo ades, et quae sit sapientia disce legendo. 

De omnibus bene raerendum. 
!Si potes, ignotis etiam prodesse memento : 
Utilius regno est meritis acquirere amicos. 

Arcana Dei non scrutanda. 
Mitte arcana Dei, coelumque inquirere quid sit: 
Cum sis mortalis, quae sunt mortalia cura. 

Mortis timor gaudia vitae pellit. 
Linque metum lethi : nam stultum est tempore in omni, 
Dum mortem metuis, amittere gaudia vitae. 

Iracundia cavenda. 
Iratus de re incerta contendere noli : 
Impedit ira animum ne possit cernere verum. 

Expendendum ubi opus est. 
Fac sumptum propere, cum res desiderat ipsa : 
Dandum etenim est aliquid, cum tempus postulat aut res. 

Fortuna modica tutior. 
Quod nimium est fugito, parvo gaudere memento : 
Tuta mage est puppis modico quae flumine fertur. 

Occulta vitia reticenda. 
Quod pudeat, socios prudens celare memento : 
Ne plures culpent id, quod tibi displicet uni. 

Occulta tandem revelantur. 
Nolo putes pravos homines peccata lucrari : 
Temporibus peccata latent, sed tempore * parent. * *"■ e. appa- 
Imbecillitas virtute compensatur. rent > vul g° P a " 
Corporis exigui vires contemnere noli : tent ' . conira 

Consilio pollet cui vim natura negavit. me n esem ' 

Cedendum potiori ad tempus. 
Cui scieris non esse parem te, tempore cede , 
Victorem a victo superari saepe videmus. 

F2 



12 Distichorum Catonis Lib. II. 

Rixandum cum familiaribus non esse. 
Adversus notum noli contendere verbis : 
Lis minimis verbis interdum maxima crescit. 

Fortuna non quaerenda sorte. 
Quid Deus intendat, noli perquirere sorte : 
Quid statuat de te, sine te deliberat ipse. 

Luxus odium generat. 
Invidiam nimio cultu vitare memento : 
Quae si non laedit, tamen hanc sufferre molestum est. 

Animus non deponendus ob iniquum judicium. 
Esto animo forti, cum sis damnatus inique : 
Nemo diu gaudet, qui judice vine it iniquo. 

Reconciliatis lis non refricanda. 
Litis praeteritae noli maledicta referre : 
Post inimicitias iram meminisse malorum est. 

Teipsum neque lauda neque culpa. 
Nec te collaudes, nee te culpaveris ipse : 
Hoc faciunt stulti, quos gloria vexat inanis. 

Parsimonia. 
Utere quaesitis parce, cum sumptus abundat : 
Labitur exiguo, quod partum est tempore longo. 

Supercilium nonnunquam deponendum. 
Insipiens esto, cum tempus postulat, aut res : 
Stultitiam simulare loco, prudentia summa est. 

Neque prodigus, neque avarus. 
Luxuriam fugito, simul et vitare memento 
Crimen avaritiae; nam sunt contraria famae. 

Loquaci parum credendum. 
Noli tu quaedam referenti credere semper : 
Exigua iis tribuenda fides qui multa loquuntur. 

Ebrius vinum non accuset. 
Quae *potu peccas, ignoscere tu tibi noli: * a l. potu 

Nam nullum crimen vini est, sed culpa bibentis. 

Amicis consilia credenda. 
Consilium arcanum tacito committe sodali; 
Corporis auxilium medico committe fideli. 

Successus malorum ne te offendat. 
Indignos noli successus ferre molester 
Indulget fortuna malis ut laedere possit. 

Futuros casus praevidendos. 
Prospice, qui veniunt, hos casus esse ferendos : 
Nam laevius laedit, quicquid praevidimus ante. 

Animus in adversis spe fovendus. 
Rebus in adversis animum submittere noli: 
Spem retine; spes una hominem nee morte relinquit. 



Distichorum Catonis Lib. III. 13 

Opportunitas cum contingit tenenda. 
Rem tibi quam noscis aptam, dimittere noli : 
Fronte capillata, post est occasio calva. 

Futura ex praeteritis colligenda. 
Quod sequitur specta, quodque imminet ante videto 
Ilium imitare Deum, qui partem spectat utramque. 

Vitae ratio habenda. 
Fortius ut valeas, interdum parcior esto : 
Pauca voluptati debentur, plura saluti. 

Multitudini cedendum. 
Judicium populi nunquam contempseris unus : 
Ne nulli placeas, dum vis contemnere multos. 

Valetudo curanda. 
Sit tibi praecipue, quod primum est, cura salutis : 
Tempora ne culpes, cum sis tibi causa doloris. 

Somnia non observanda. 
Somnia ne cures : Nam mens humana quod optat, 
Dum vigilans sperat, per somnum cernit id ipsum. 

LIB. III. PRAEFATIO. 
Hoc quicunque voles carmen cognoscere, lector, 
Quum praecepta ferat quae sunt gratissima vitae, 
Commoda multa feres. Sin autem spreveris illud, 
Non me scriptorem, sed te neglexeris ipse. 

Dandam esse operam Uteris. 
Instrue praeceptis animum, nee discere cesses : 
Nam sine doctrina vita est quasi mortis imago. 

Moribus captanda fama. 
Fortunae donis semper parere memento : 
Non opibus bona fama datur, sed moribus ipsis. 

Recte agendo aliorum linguam ne timeas. 
Cum recte vivas, ne cures verba malorum : 
Arbitrii nostri non est quod quisque loquatur. 

Amici crimen celandum. 
Productus testis, salvo tamen ante pudore, 
Quantumcunque potes, celato crimen amici. 

Blandiloquentia suspecta. 
Sermones blandos blaesosque cavere memento : 
Simplicitas veri * sana est, fraus ficta loquendi. t * Seed, fama, 

Ignava vita fugienda. L e * indicium, 

Segnitiem fugito, quae vitae ignavia fertur : ai ' norm£U 

Nam cum animus languet, consumit inertia corpus. 

Animus fessus relaxandus. 
Interpone tuis interdum gaudia curis ; 
Ut possis animo quemvis sufferre laborem. 

Fs 



14? Distichorum Catonis Lib. III. 

Malo anirao neminem reprehendas. 
Alterius dictum, aut factum, ne carpseris unquam: 
Exemplo simili ne te derideat alter. 

Haereditas augenda. 
Quod tibi sors dederit tabulis suprema notato ; 
Augendo serva ; ne sis quem fama loquatur. 

Senectus sit munifica. 
Cum tibi divitiae superant in fine senectae ; 
Munificus facito vivas, non parcus amicis. 

Verba attendenda, non os loquentis. 
Utile consilium dominus ne despice servi, 
Nullius sensum, si prodest, tempseris unquam. 

Praesenti utendum fortuna. 
Rebus et in censu si non est quod fuit ante, 
Fac vivas contentus eo quod tempora praebent, 

Uxor spe dotis non quaerenda. 
Uxorem fuge ne ducas sub nomine dotis ; 
Nee retinere velis, si coeperit esse molesta. 

Alieno sapere exemplo. 
^lultorum disce exemplo quae facta sequaris, 
Quae fugias : vita est nobis aliena magistra. 

Nihil ultra vires. 
Quod potes, id tentes : operis ne pondere pressus 
Succumbat labor, et frustra tentata relinquas. 

Consentire videtur qui tacet. 
Quod nosti haud recte factum, nolito silere, 
Ne videare malos imitari velle tacendo. 

Rigor favore temperandus. 
Judicis auxilium sub iniqua lege rogato : 
Ipsae etiam leges cupiunt ut jure regantur. 

Feras quae tua culpa pateris. 
Quod meritd pateris, patienter ferre memento : 
Cumque reus tibi sis, ipsum te judice damna. 

Multa legenda, sed cum judicio. 
Multa legas facito : perlectis *perlege multa : * a l. elige. 

Nam miranda canunt, sed non credenda, poetae. 

Modeste in convivio loquendum. 
Inter convivas fac sis sermone modestus : 
Ne dicare loquax dum vis urbanus haberi. 

Iracundia uxoris non formidanda. 
Conjugis iratae nolito verba timere : 
Nam lachrymis struit insidias, dum foemina plorat. 

Quaesitis utendum, non abutendum. 
Utere quaesitis, sed ne videaris abuti : 
Qui sua consumunt, cum deest, aliena sequuntur. 



Distichorum Catonis Lib. II. 

Mors non formidanda. 
Fac tibi proponas mortem non esse timendam : 
Quae bono si non est, finis tamen ilia malorum est. 

Uxor proba, si loquax, ferenda. 
Uxoris linguam, si frugi est, ferre memento : 
Namque malum est te nolle pati, hanc non posse tacere* 

Pietas erga parentes. 
Aequa diligito charos pietate parentes : 
Nee matrem offendas, dum vis bonus esse parenti. 

LIB. IV. PRAEFATIO. 

ISecuram quicunque cupis traducere vitam, 
Nee vitiis haerere animum, quae moribus obsunt ; 
Haec praecepta tibi semper relegenda memento 
Invenies aliquid quo * te nitare magistro. 

Divitiarum contemptus. 
JL)espice divitias, si vis animo esse beatus ; 
Quas qui suspiciunt, mendicant semper, avari. 

Vivere secundum naturam optimum. 
Commoda naturae nullo tibi tempore deerunt, 
Si contentus eo fueris quod postuiat usus. 

Res ratione regenda. 
Cum sis incautus, nee rem ratione gubernes, 
Noli fortunam, quae * nulla est, dicere caecam. 

Amor pecuniae ad usum. 
Dilige *denarium, sed parce dilige formam, 
Quam nemo sanctus, nee honestus captat * habere. 

In valetudine ne opibus parcas. 
Quum fueris locuples, corpus curare memento : 
Aeger dives habet nummos, *sed non habet ipsum. 

Castigatio paterna ferenda. 
Verbera cum tuleris discens aliquando magistri, 
Fer patris imperium, cum verbis exit in iram. 

Certa et utilia agenda. 
Res age quae prosunt : rursus vitare memento 
In quibus error inest, nee spes est certa laboris. 

Libenter donandum. 
Quod donare potes, gratis * concede roganti : 
Nam recte fecisse bonis in parte *lucrosum est. 

Suspicio statim expendenda. 
Quod tibi suspectum est, confestim discute quid sit 
Namque solent primd quae sunt neglecta nocere. 

Venus abstinentia cohibenda. 
Cum te detineat Veneris damnosa voluptas, 
Indulgere gulae noli, quae ventris arnica est. 

F4 



15 



*al. quovi- 
tae utare. al. 
tu te utare. 



* al. non est 

*al. denarii. 
* al. ab aere. 



* al. se. 



* al. ne vende. 

* al. lucrorum. 



16 Distichorum Catonis Lib. IV. 

Homo malus, fera pessima. 
Cum tibi proponas animalia cuncta timere, 
Unum hominem tibi praecipio plus esse timendum. 

Sapientia fortitudini praeferenda. 
Cum tibi praevalidae fuerint in corpore vires, 
Fac sapias ; sic tu poteris vir fortis haberi. 

Amicus cordis medicus. 
Auxilium a notis petito, si forte laboras : 
Nee quisquam melior medicus, quam fidus amicus. 

Sacrificium spiritus dejectus. 
Cum sis ipse nocens, moritur cur victima pro te ? 
Stultitia est morte alterius sperare salutem. 

Amicus ex moribus deligendus. 
Cum tibi vel socium, vel fidum quaeris amicum, 
Non tibi fortuna est hominis, sed vita petenda. 

Avaritia vitanda. 
Utere quaesitis opibus ; fuge nomen avari : 
Quid tibi divitiae prosunt, si pauper abundas ? 

Voluptas inimica famae. 
Si famam servare cupis, dum vivis, honestam ; 
Fac fugias animo, quae sunt mala gaudia vitae. 

Sen em etiam delirum ne irriseris. 
Cum sapias animo, noli irridere senectam ; 
Nam quicunque senet, sensus puerilis in illo est. 

Opes fluxae, ars perpetua. 
Disce aliquid ; nam ciim subito fortuna recessit, 
Ars remanet, vitamque hominis non deserit unquam. 

Mores ex verbis cogniti. 
Perspicito tecum tacitus, quid quisque Ioquatur : 
Sermo etenim mores et celat et indicat idem. 

Ars usu juvanda. 
Exerce studium, quamvis perceperis artem : 
Ut cura ingenium, sic et manus adjuvat usum. 

Vitae contemptus. 
Multum ne cures venturi tempora fati : 
Non metuit mortem qui scit contemnere vitam. 

Discendum et docendum. 
Disce, sed a doctis : indoctos ipse doceto : 
Propaganda etenim rerum doctrina bonarum est. 

Bibendi ratio. 
Hoc bibe quod possis, si tu vis vivere sanus : 
Morbi causa mali nimia est *quandoque voluptas. * a l quae- 

Ne damnes quod probaveris. cunque. 

Laudaris quodcunque palam, quodcunque probaris, 
Hoc vide ne rursus levitatis crimine damnes. 



Distichorum Catonis Lib. IV. 17 

Circumspectus utraque fortuna esto. 
Tranquillis rebus quae sunt adversa *timeto : * al. caveto. 

Rursus in adversis melius sperare memento. 

Studio crescit sapientia. 
Discere ne cesses ; cura sapientia crescit : 
Rara datur longo prudentia temporis usu. 

Parce laudandum. 
Parce laudato : nam quern tu saepe probaris, 
Una dies, qualis fuerit, monstrabit amicus. 

Discere non pudeat. 
Ne pudeat, quae nescieris, te velle doceri : 
Scire aliquid laus est ; *turpe est nil discere velle. * al. culpa. 

Rebus utendum ad sobrietatem. 
Cum Venere et Baccho lis est, sed juncta voluptas . 
Quod blandum est ammo complectere, sed fuge lites. 

Tristibus et tacitis non fidendum. 
Demissos animo, ac tacitos vitare memento : 
Qua flumen placidum est, forsan latet altius unda. 

Sors sorti conferenda. 
Cum tibi displiceat rerum fortuna tuarum, 
Alterius specta * quo sis discrimine pejor. *al. qui sis. 

Ultra vires nihil aggrediendum. 
Quod potes id tenta : nam littus carpere remis 
Tutius est multo, quam *velis tendere in altum. * al. velum. 

Cum justo inique non contendendum. 
Contra hominem justum prave contendere noli : 
Semper enim Deus injustas ulciscitur iras. 

Fortuna utraque aeque ferenda. 
Ereptis opibus noli tu flere querendo : 
Sed gaude potius, *tibi si contingat habere. * al. si nil. 

Ab amico quid ferendum. 
Est jactura gravis, quae sunt, amittere damnis : 
Sunt quaedam, quae ferre decet patienter amicum. 

Tempori non confidendum. 
Tempora longa tibi noli promittere vitae : 
Quocunque ingrederis sequitur mors, corpus ut umbra. 

Deus quibus placandus. 
* Thure Deum placa ; vitulum sine crescat aratro : * al. Ture. 
Ne credas placare Deum, dum caede litatur. 

A potentioribus laesus dissimula. 
Cede locum laesus, fortunae cede potenti : 
Laedere qui potuit, prodesse aliquando valebit. 

Castiga teipsum. 
Cum quid peccaris, castiga te ipse subinde : 
Vulnera dum sanas, dolor est medicina doloris. 

F5 



18 Disticliorum Catonis Lib, IV. 

Amicus mutatus non vituperandus. 
Damnaris nunquam, post longum tempus, amicum : 
Mutavit mores ; sed pignora prima memento. 

Beneficiis collatis attende. 
Gratior officiis, quo sis mage charior, esto ; 
Ne nomen subeas quod dicitur * offi ciperda. *al. officiperdae. 

Suspicionem tolle. 
Suspectus care sis, ne sis miser omnibus horis : 
Nam timidis et suspectis aptissima mors est. 

Humanitas erga servos. 
Cum fueris famulos proprios mercatus in usus, 
Ut servos dicas, homines tamen esse memento. 

Occasionem rei commodae ne praetermittas 
Quamprimum rapienda tibi est occasio prima, 
Ne rursus quaeras, quae jam neglexeris ante. 

Non laetandum repentino obitu. 
Morte repentina noli gaudere malorum : 
Felices obeunt quorum sine crimine vita est. 

Pauper simulatum vitet amicum. 
Cum tibi sit conjux, *ne res et fama laboret, * a l. nee. 

Vitandum ducas inimicum nomen amici. 

Junge studium. 
Cum tibi contigerit studio cognoscere multa 
Fac discas multa, et vites *nil velle doceri. * at. non. 

Brevitas memoriae arnica. 
Miraris verbis nudis me scribere versus ? 
Hos brevitas sensus fecit conjungere binos. 

JOANNIS SULPITII VERULANI, 

DE MORIBUS ET CIVILITATE PUERORUM, 

Carmen. 
Qu o s decet in vita mores servare docemus, 

Virtuti ut studeas, literulisque simul. 
Quae te igitur moneo, miti, puer, indole serva : 

Praeque tuis oculis haec mea jussa tene. 
Omnibus in rebus studeas precor, esse modestus : 

Sis avidus laudis, sit tibi cura boni. 
Sis pius ac sanctus, nee non venerare parentes : 

Et noceas nulli, surripiasque nihil. 
Futilis et mendax nunquam, nee credulus esto : 

Dedecus et metuas, et r ever ere bonos. 
Improba pestiferi fugias commercia coetus : 

Sic et honorus eris, sic eris ipse bonus. 



Joannis Sulpitii Carmen. 19 

Nee maledicta refer, nee promas turpia dictu : 

Est stomachosa quidem dicere turpe tibi. 
Segnitiem fugito, quae vitae commoda pellit : 

Parce gulae turpi, luxuriamque fuge. 
Parce et avaritiae ; bilem fraenare memento, 

Atque animi fastus, invidiamque simul. 
Fidus sis audensque bonis ; temerarius esse 

Despice : non audax sis, timidusve nimis. 
Esto verecundus : rectum te lectus habebit ; 

Detege nee socium, nee tua membra, puer. 
Nee sis difneilis nimium, nimiumque severus ; 

Sed bonus et blandus conspiciare, puer. 
Nee penitus mutum, nee te decet esse loquacem : 

Convenit ille toro, convenit iste foro. 
Haec te servantem vitae laus spesque futurae ; 

Spernentem turpis poenaque morsque manent. 
Nunc faciles aures, animum quoque trade serenum ; 

Morigerare mihi, mollia jussa dabo. 
Sit sine labe toga, et facies sit lota manusque ; 

Stiria nee naso pendeat ulla tuo. 
Et nihil emineat, sint et sine sordibus ungues ; 

Sit coma, sit turpi calceus absque luto. 
Linguaque non rigeat, careant rubigine dentes : 

Atque palam pudeat te fricuisse caput ; 
Exprimere et pulices, scabiemque urgere nocentem 

Ne te sordidulum, qui videt ista, vocet. 
Seu spuis, aut mungis nares, nutasve, memento 

Post tua concussum vertere terga caput* 
Mucorem haud tangas digitis, sputumve resorbas : 

Panniculo nasum mungere nempe decet. 
Et ructare cave, quin os in terga reflectas : 

Stringe os, et crepitum comprime, quaeso, puer. 
Munditiaeque tibi placeant ; medio quoque cultu 

Utere, ne turpis vel videare levis. 
Non sum qui laudem summo te accumbere mane : 

Judice conveniens me dabit hora cibum. 
Nee vos ante focum coenas producite longas : 

Esse decet vivas, vivere non ut edas. 
Nee sis vinosus, quamvis potasse Catonem 

Fama refert ; fugias sumere vina mera. 
Namque cibus nimius, potus quoque, maxima poena; 

Corporis et vires ingeniique rapit. 

V 6 



20 Joannis Sulpitii Carmen. 

Insternas mensam : nitidas imponito quadras, 

Atque salem et Cererem, flumina, vina, dapes. 
Deinde precare Deum, qui nobis cuncta benigne 

Suggerit, ut sanctos det tibi mane cibos. 
Atque, puer, jubeo, sedeas vel raro, sed astans 

Pocula porge celer, tolle, repone dapes. 
Juraque convivas super importare, minister 

Effuge ; nam turpis saepe fit inde toga. 
Quodque jubebit herus, facilis semperque subito : 

Quemque tibi dederit, tu tibi sume locum. 
Et licet antiqui cubuissent pectore prono, 

Te colla haec aetas recta tenere jubet. 
Et sinito mensae cubitis haerere potentes : 

Tu tantum faciles pone, repone manus. 
Quodque vir egregius pavido tibi porrigit, illud 

Sume lubens, grates aptaque verba refer. 
Esto tribus digitis, magnos nee sumito morsus 

Nee duplices offas mandere utrinque juvet. 
Te vitare velim, cupidus ne ut lurco sonoras 

Contractes fauces : mandere rite decet. 
Gausape non macules, aut pectus ; nee tibi mentum 

Stillet ; sitve tibi ne manus uncta, cave. 
Saepe ora et digitos mappa siccabis adepta ; 

In quadra faciat nee tua palma moram. 
Quod tibi vicinum fuerit, tu sume : sodali 

Cede tuo, referat dum tamen ille manum. 
Dumque in frusta secat, caveas sumpsisse recisa : 

Lurco legit dulces absque rubore bolos. 
Non, manibus gremio immissis, tibi vellicet unguis 

Quod sumes : residens non agitato pedes. 
Incidasque prius quam dens contundat ofellam : 

Tingantur rursum ne tibi morsa cave. 
Ne lingas digitos, nee rodas turpiter ossa, 

Ast ea cultello radere rite potes. 
Sive super mensam cortex cumuletur, et ipsa 

Ossa, vel in quadram, prae pedibusve jace. 
Nee digitis tenta, nee pinguia delige frusta : 

Et quocunque manus, hue tibi lumen eat. 
Nee socium torve inspicias, quidve ederit ille 

Advertas : gestus inspice saepe tuos. 
Pocula cum sumes, tergat tibi mappa labella ; 

Si tergas manibus, non mihi charus eris. 



Joannis Sulpitii Carmen. 21 

Una manus sumat pater am, ni hanc jactet in hostem 

* Theseus, aut Beli sint monumenta patris : * Vid. Ovid. 

Hanc binis quod si manibus captabis, id apte ^ 12# *' 2 { 

Efficies : digitis pocula sume tribus. v ^33, 

Ac teneas oculos, nee supra pocula fare : 

Plena aliquo vites sit tibi bucca cibo. 
Deme merum cyatho, multum ne forte supersit, 

Quod nolit socius sumere forte tuus. 
Qui sapit, extinguet multo cum fonte Falernum, 

Et parco lympham diluet ille mero. 
Haud facias binos haustus, nee fessus anheles, 

Sibila nee labiis stridula prome tuis. 
Nee citd sorbebis, velut ovi lutea grati : 

Nee nimium tarda sume Falerna mora. 
Unum, sive duo, ad summum tria pocula sumes : 

Si hunc numerum excedas, jam mihi potus eris. 
Fac videas quodcunque bibes, modicumque pitissa : 

Crater, sive calix, det tibi vina, brevis. 
Os quoque tergebis semper post pocula : palmas 

Ablue, quum mensam deseris, atque labra. 
Denique jam grates pro donis reddito Christo, 

Qui aeternas nobis praeparat unus opes ; 
Inflectensque genu, jungens et brachia, PROSIT 

Dicito ; mox tolles ordine quaeque suo. 



3 
Q 



REGIMEN MENSAE HONORABILE. 

NEMO CIBUM CAPIAT, DONEC BENEDICTIO FIAT. 

Vultus hilar es habea- 
Sal cultello capia- 
Quod edendum sit, ne peta- 
Non nisi depositum capia- 
Rixas et murmura fugia- 
Manibus erectis sedea- 
Mappam mundam tenea- 
Ne scalpatis cavea- 
Aliis partem tribua- 
Morsus non rejicia- 
Modicum sed crebro biba- 
Grates DEO per CHRISTUM refera- 
Privetur mensd, qui spreverit haec documenta. 



RUDIMENTA PIETATIS. 

In nomine Dei, Patris, Filii, et Spiritus Sancti. Amen. 
ORATIO DOMINICA, Matth. vi. 

xater noster, qui es in coelis, 1. Sanctificetur nomen tuum. 2. 
Veniat regnum tuum. 3. Fiat voluntas tua, quemadmodum in 
eoelo, sic etiam in terra. 5. Panem nostrum quotidianum da 
nobis hodie. 5. Et remitte nobis debita nostra, sicut et nos re- 
mittimus debitoribus nostris. 6. Et ne nos inducas in tenta- 
tionem, sed libera nos a malo : quia tuum est regnum, et po- 
tentia, et gloria, in secula. Amen, 

SYMBOLUM APOSTOLICUM. 

Credo in Deum Patrem omnipotentem, Creatorem coeli et 
terrae: 2. Et in Iesum Christum, filium ejus unigenitum, 
Dominum nostrum ; 3. Qui conceptus est de Spiritu Sancto, 
natus ex Maria Virgin e ; 4. Passus sub Pontio Pilato, crucifix- 
iiSj mortuus, et sepultus, descendit ad inferna; 5. Tertio die 
resurrexit a mortuis ; 6. Ascendit ad coelos, sedet ad dextram 
Dei Patris omnipotentis ; 7. Inde venturus est judicatum vi- 
vos et mortuos. 8. Credo in Spiritum Sanctum. 9. Credo 
Sanctam Ecclesiam catholicam; Sanctorum communionem ; 
10. Remissionem peccatorum ; 11. Carnis resurrection em; 12. 
Et vitam aeternam. Amen. 

DECALOGUS, SIVE LEX DEI. 

Locutus est DEUS omnia verba haec. Exod. xx. 

Ego sum Dominus Deus tuus, qui eduxi te ex Aegypto, e do- 
mo servitutis : 

I. Non habebis deos alienos in conspectu meo. 

II. Ne sculpas tibi simulacrum, nee ullam imaginem effingas 
eorum, quae aut supra sunt in coelo, aut infra in terra, aut in 
aquis sub terra : neque incurves te illis, neque colas ea. Ego 
enim sum Dominus Deus tuus, fortis, zelotes, vindicans peccata 



Rudimenta Pietatis. 23 

patrum in.filios, idque in tertia et quarta progenie eorum qui 
oderunt me, et misericordia utens in millesimam eorum qui 
diligunt me, et observant praecepta mea. 

III. Ne usurpes nomen Domini Dei tui temere. Neque 
enim Dominus dimittet eum impunitum, qui nomen ejus vane 
usurpaverit. 

IV. Memento diem Sabbati sanctifices. Sex diebus opera- 
beris, et facies omne opus tuum. At septimo die Sabbatum 
erit Domino Deo tuo. Non facies ullum opus, nee tu, nee 
films tuus, nee filia tua, nee servus tuus, nee ancilla tua, nee 
jumentum tuum, nee advena qui est intra portas tuas. Nam 
sex diebus fecit Deus coelum, terram, et mare, et quaecunque 
in iis sunt; requievit autem die septimo, ideoque benedixit 
diei Sabbati, et sanctificavit eum. 

V. Honora patrem tuum, et matrem tuam, ut diu vivas in 
terra, quam tibi Dominus Deus tuus daturus est. 

VI. Non occides. 

VII. Non committes adulterium. 

VIII. Non furaberis. 

IX. Non dices contra proximum tuum falsum testimonium. 

X. Non concupisces domum proximi tui, non concupisces 
uxorem proximi tui, nee servum ejus, nee ancillam, nee bovem, 
nee asinum, nee quicquam eorum quae sunt proximi tui. 

SUMMA LEGIS, 

Matth. xxii. 34. 
Pharismu quum audivissent quod IESUS silentium imposuisset 
Sadducaeis, congregati sunt pariter : 35. Et mterrogamt eum 
unus ex iis qui erat legis peritus, tentans eum, et dicens, 36. 
Praeceptor, Quod praeceptum maximum est in lege f 

37. IESUS autem dixit illi, Ut diligas Dominum Deum 
tuum, ex toto corde tuo, et ex tota anima tua, et ex omni co- 
gitatione tua. 38. Hoc est praeceptum maximum et primum. 
39. Secundum autem est simile illi : nempe, Ut diligas proxi- 
mum tuum sicut teipsum. 

40. Ex his duobus praeceptis pendent Lex et Prophetae. 

Quot sunt Christianae Ecclesiae Sacramento, f 

Duo. 

Quae sunt ilia ? 

Baptismus et Sacra Coena Domini. 



24? Rudimenta Pietatis. 

INSTITUTIO BAPTISMI. 

Cujus haec sunt verba. Matth. xxviii. 19. Mark xvi. 16. 

Ite, et docete omnes gentes, baptizantes eos, In nomine Pa- 
tris, et Filii, et Spiritus Sancti. Qui crediderit, et baptizatus 
fuerit, servabitur : Qui non crediderit, condemnabitur. Et 
docete eos, ut custodiant quicquid mandavi vobis : et ecce ego 
vobiscum sum, omnibus diebus, usque ad consummationem se- 
culi. 

Haec promissio repetitur cum Scriptura Baptismum nominat 
Lavacrum regenerationis, et ablutionem peccatorum. Tit, iii. 
5. Act. xxii. 16. 

INSTITUTIO COENAE DOMINI. 

Cujus haec sunt verba. 1 Cor. xi. 23. 

Ego enim accepi a Domino nostro id quod tradidi vobis : 
Quod Dominus noster Iesus Christus, ea nocte qua proditus 
est, accepit panem ; et, gratiis actis, fregit, ac dixit, Accipite; 
manducate, hoc est corpus meum, quod pro vobis frangitur : Hoc 
facite ad memoriam met. Itidem et poculum, postquam coe- 
nasset, dicendo, Hoc poculum est novum illud foedus per meum 
sanguinem : Hoc facite, quotiescunque biberitis y in mei recorda- 
tionem. Quotiescunque enim ederitis panem hunc, et pocu- 
lum hoc biberitis, mortem Domini annunciabitis, usque quo ve- 
nerit. Itaque quisquis ederit panem hunc, vel biberit pocu- 
lum Domini indigne, reus est corporis et sanguinis Domini. 
Probet autem quisque seipsum, et ita de pane illo edat, et de 
poculo illo bibat. Nam qui edit et bibit indigne, damnationem 
sibi ipsi edit et bibit, quia non decernit corpus Domini. 

Haec promissio a Paulo exprimitur, cum inquit, 

x oculum gratiarum actionis, quo gratias agimus, nonne com- 
munio est sanguinis Christi? Panis quem frangimus, nonne 
communio est corporis Christi ? Quoniam unus panis, unum 
corpus, multi sumus. Nam omnes unius panis participes su 
mus. 



SUMMULA CATECHISMI. 



TRIPLEX HOMINIS STATUS : 

1. In sanctitate et sanitate. 

2. Sub peccato et morte. 

3. Sub Chris ti gratia. 



>-». Quaestio. 

laCuiS hominem creavit ? 
Responsio. DEUS. 

Q. Qualem creavit eum? 

R. Sanctum et sanum, raun- 
dique dominum. 

Q. In quern usum creatus est? 

R. Ut Deo inserviret. 

Q. Quod servitii genus ab eo 
exigebat Deus ? 

R. Legis suae praestationem. 

Q. Num in legis Dei prae- 
statione perstitit ? 

R. Nequaquam: sed earn 
foede transgressus est. 

Q. Quae hujus transgressionis 
poena ? 

R. Mors aeterna, cum ani- 
mae, turn corporis, et ipsi et 
posteris. 

Q. Quomodo hide liber amur? 

R . Mer a D ei gratia in Chris- 
to IesUj absque nostris men- 
tis. 

Q. Cujusmodi persona est 
Christus ? 

R. Vere Deus, vereque ho- 
mo, in persona una. 

Q. Quomodo nos liberavit? 

R. Morte sua : mortem e- 
nim nobis debitam pro nobis 
subiit, nosque eripuit. 



Q. Num omnes liberantur 
per Christum? 

R. Minime, sed ii tantum 
qui fide eum amplectuntur. 

Q. Quid est fides? 

R. Cum mihi persuadeo De- 
um me omnesque sanctos ama- 
re, nobisque Christum cum om- 
nibus suis bonis gratiis donare. 

Q. Recense summam tuae Ji- 
dei. 

R. Credo in Deum Patrem, 
$c. 

Q. Quis operatur hanc fidem 
in nobis ? 

R. Spiritus Sanctus per Ver- 
bum et Sacramenta. 

Q. Quomodo earn operatur 
per Verbum et Sacramenta ? 

R. Aperit cor, ut Deo lo- 
quenti in Verbo et Sacramen- 
tis credamus. 

Q. Quid est Dei verbum ? 

R. Quicquid veteris ac novi 
Testamenti libris continetur. 

Q. Verbi Dei quot partes ? 

R. Duae, Lex et Evange- 
lium. 

Q. Quid est Lex? 

R. Doctrina Dei, debitum 
a nobis exigens, et quia non 
sumus solvendo, damnans. 



26 Summula 

Q. Quid Evangelium ? 

R. Doctrina Christum cum 
omnibus suis bonis nobis offe- 
rens, debitumque nostrum ab 
eo solutum, nosque liberos esse 
proclamans. 

Q. Quid Sacramento, ? 

R. Sigilla Dei, significantia 
et donantia nobis Christum 
cum omnibus suis bonis. 

Q. Quae haec Christi bona ? 

R. Amor Dei, Spiritus Sanc- 
tus, unio nostri cum Christo : 
unde remissio peccatorum, sa- 
natio naturae, spiritualis nutri- 
tio,et vita aeterna, promanant. 

Q. Quot sunt novi Testa- 
menti Sacramento, ? 

R. Duo, Baptismus et Sa- 
cra Coena. 

Q. Quid est Baptismus ? 

R. Sacramentum insitionis 
nostrae in Christum, et abluti- 
onis a peccatis. 

Q. Quid insitio nostri in 
Christum ? 

R. Unio nostri cum Chri- 
sto : unde manat remissio pec- 
catorum et perpetua resipis- 
centia. 

Q. Baptismus quid juvat fi- 
dem ? 

R. Testatur, ut aqua corpus 
abluitur, sic, operante Spiritu 
Sancto, a peccatorum reatu et 
radice, per fidem in sanguine 
Christi, nos repurgari. 

Q. Quid est Sacra Coena? 

R. Sacramentum Spiritualis 
nutritionis nostrae in Christo. 

Q. Coena Domini quid juvat 
fidem? 



Catechismi. 

R. Testatur, ut pane et vino 
corpora nostra aluntur et au- 
gescunt ; sic animas nostras 
corpore et sanguine Christi 
crucifixi ali et corroborari ad 
vitam aeternam. 

Q. Corpore et sanguine Chri- 
sti quomodo alimur ? 

R. Dum fide percipimus, et 
Spiritus Sancti, qui una adest, 
vi, ea nobis applicamus. 

Q. Quando fide percipimus, 
et nobis applicamus corpus Chri- 
sti crucifixi ? 

R. Dum nobis persuademus 
Christi mortem et crucifixio- 
nem non minus ad nos perti- 
nere, quam si ipsi nos pro pec- 
catis nostris crucifixi essemus : 
Persuasio autem haec est verae 
fidei. 

Q. Vera fides quomodo dig- 
noscitur? 

R. Per bona opera. 

Q. Quomodo cognoscuntur 
bona opera ? 

R. Si Dei legi respondeant. 

Q. Recita Dei legem ? 

R. Audi, Israel ! Ego sum 
Dominus, Sfc. 

Q. Haec lex de quibus te ad- 
monet ? 

R. De officio meo erga De- 
um, et erga proximum. 

Q. Quid officii debes Deo ? 

R. Supra omnes eum ut a- 
mem. 

Q. Quid debes proximo ? 

R. Eum ut amem tanquam 
meipsum. 

Q. Potis es haec prae stare ? 

R. Minime gentium ; nam 



Summula 
tantisper dum hie vivimus, 
habitat in nobis peccatum. 

Q. In Dei film quid hinc ex- 
istit ? 

R. Perennis pugna inter 
earnem et spiritum. 

Q. In hac pugna quomodo 
nobis versandum ? 

R. Assidue orandum, ut De- 
us peccata nobis remittat, im- 
becillitatemque sustentet. 

Q. Quomodo orandum? 

R. Ut nos docuit Christus, 
Pater noster, qui es, fyc. 



Catechismi. 27 

Q. Qui tibi persuades, De» 
um donaturum quae petis ? 

R. Quia orare jussit, pollici- 
tusque est, quicquid peterem 
in Christi nomine, se mihi lar- 
giturum. 

Q. Quid debes Deo pro tot 
beneficiis ? 

R. Ut ei gratias agam, per- 
petuoque serviam. 

Q. Quomodo Deo servien- 
dum ? 

R. Ex verbi ipsius praescrip- 
to, ut jam dictum est. 



PRAECIPUA CAPITA 

CHRISTIANAE RELIGIONIS, 

Desumpta e Sacra Scriptura Veteris ac Novi Testamenti. 
I. De DEO. 

Joan. iv. 2. JL)eus est Spiritus. 

Apoc. iv. 8. Sanctus, Sanctus, Sanctus, Dominus Deus omnipo- 
tens, qui fuit, qui est, et qui venturus est. 

Psal. cxlvii. 5. Dominus noster est magnus, multarumque virium, et 
sapientia ejus est immensa. 

JExod. xxxiv. 6. Jehova, Jehova Deus, misericors et exorabi- 

lis, longanimis, et abundans benignitate et fide, 

Vers. 7. Custodiens misericordiam millibus, condonans iniquitatem, 
transgressionem et peccatum, et qui nullo pacto absolvet nocentem. 

Deut. vi. 4. Jehova Deus noster est unus Jehova. 

1 Joan. v. 7. Tres sunt qui testantur in coelo, Pater, Sermo, et Spiri- 
tus Sanctus ; et hi tres sunt unum. 

II. De creatione, lapsu, peccato, etmiseria hominis. 

Gen. i. 2. Jc^t Deus dixit, Faciamushominemadimaginemnostram, 
secundum similitudinem nostram. 

Vers. 27. Itaque Deus creavit hominem ad imaginem suam, ad ima- 
ginem Dei creavit eum. 

Eccl. vii. 29. Deus fecit hominem rectum. 

Rom. v. 12. Peccatum intravit in mundum per unum hominem, et 
mors per peccatum ; et ita mors pervasit ad omnes homines, quatenus 
omnes peccarunt. 

Rom. iii. 23. Omnes peccaverunt, ac deficiuntur gloria Dei. 

Psal. li. 5. En, formatus sum in iniquitate, et in peccato mater mea 
concepit me. 



28 Praecipua Capita 

III. De Redemptione generis humani per Iesum Christum, 

Joan. iii. 16.JDeus sic amavit mundum, ut dederit Filium suum 
unigenitum, ut quisquis credit in eum, non pereat, sed habeat vitam 
seternam. 

1 Jo. iv. 9. Amor Dei patuit erga nos in hoc, quod Deus misit Fi- 
lium suum unigenitum in mundum, ut vivamus per eum. 

V. 10. In hoc est amor, non quod nos dilexerimus Deum, sed quod 
ipse dilexerit nos, et miserit Filium suum, ut esset piaculum pro pec- 
catis nostris. 

1 Pet. iii. 18. Christus quoque passus est semel pro peccatis, Justus 
pro injustis, ut adduceret nos ad Deum. 

1 Pet. ii. 24. Qui ipsemet sustulit peccata nostra in suo corpore su- 
per lignum, ut nos mortui peccatis, viveremus justitiee ; cujus vibici- 
bus sanati sumus. 

Tit. ii. 14. Qui dedit seipsum pro nobis, ut redimeret nos ab omni 
iniquitate, et purificaret sibi ipsi populum peculiarem, accensum stu- 
dio bonorum operum. 

IV. Deiis quae Deus a nobis exigit, ut salutem per Christum 
consequamur. 

Act. xvii.30. JDixit, Domini, quid faciendum est mihi, ut sim salvus ? 

Vers. 31. Et illi dixerunt, Crede in Dominum Iesum, et salvus eris. 

^c^. iii. 19. Resipiscite, et convertimini, ut peccata vestra deleantur, 
cum tempora recreationis venient a conspectu Domini. 

Isa. Iv. 6. Quaerite Jehovam dum possit inveniri ; invocate eum 
dum est propinquus. 

Vers. 7. Improbus derelinquat viam suam, et vir iniquus cogitationes 
suas : revertaturque ad Jehovam, et miserebitur illius ; et ad Deum 
nostrum, quia plurimum condonabit. 

Luc. vs.. 23. Si quis vult venire post me, ipse abneget se, tollatque 
suam crucem quotidie, et sequatur me. 

Matth. xi. 28. Venite ad me omnes qui laboratis et onerati estis, et 
ego recreabo vos. 

Vers. 29. Attollite jugum meum in vos, et discite a me, quia mitis 
sum et humilis corde ; et invenietis requiem animabus vestris. 

Vers. 30. Jugum enim meum est facile, et onus meum est leve. 

Heb. v. 9. Perfectus factus est auctor salutis aeternae omnibus obe- 
dientibus sibi. 

Jo. xiv. 15. Si amatis me, servate praecepta mea. 

Jo. xv. 14. Vos estis amici mei, si feceritis quaecunque ego praeci- 
pio vobis. 

Tit. ii. 11. Gratia Dei, quae salutem adfert, apparuit omnibus 
hominibus ; 

Vers. 1 2. Erudiens nos, ut, abnegata impietate et mundanis cupidita- 
tibus, vivamus sobrie, juste, et pie, in hoc praesenti seculo. 

Mic. vi. 8. Indicavit tibi, O homo ! quod sit bonum ; et quid exigit 
Jehova a te, nisi ut aequum facias, et ames misericordiam, et ambules 
submisse cum Deo tuo ? 

Col. iii. 5. Mortificate igitur vestra membra terrestria ; scortationem> 
impuritatem, libidinem, cupiditatem malam, et avaritiam, quae est 
idololatria : 

Vers. 6. Propter quae, ira Dei venit super filios contumaces. 

Vers. 8. Deponite haec omnia, iram, excandescentiam, malitiam, 

maledicentiam, obscoenitatem verborum ex ore vestro. 



Christianae Religionis. 29 

Vers, 9. Ne mentimini alii aliis. 

Vers. 12. Induite igitur (utelecti Dei, sancti, amatique) viscera mise- 
ricordiae, benignitatem, submissionem animi, lenitatem, patientiara ; 

Vers. 15. Sufferentes alii alios, et condonantes alii aliis; siquisha- 
bet querelam ad versus aliquem, quemadmodum Christus condonavit 
vobis, sic quoque vos facite. 

Vers. 14. Super omnia autem induite charitatem, quae est vincu- 
lum perfectionis. 

1 Thess. iv. 11. Et ut studeatis esse quieti, et agere res vestras, et 
operari propriis manibus, sicut praecepimus vobis. 

1 Pet. ii. 27. Timete Deum, honorate regem. 

Rom. xiii. 1. Omnis anima esto subjecta potestatibus supereminen- 
tibus : nulla enim est potestas nisi a Deo : potestates quae sunt, sunt 
ordinatae a Deo. 

Vers. 2. Itaque quisquis obsistit potestati, obsistit ordinationi Dei : 
qui autem obsistunt, accipient condemnationem sibi ipsis. 

1 Thess. v. 12. Rogamus autem vos, fratres, ut agnoscatis eos qui 
laborant inter vos, et praesunt vobis in Domino, et admonent vos. 

Vers. 13. Et faciatis eos maximi cum amore, propter opu sipsorum. 

Heb. xiii. 17. Parete gubernatoribus vestris, et obsequimini: namii 
vigilant pro animabus vestris, tanquam reddituri rationem: ut faciant 
id cum gaudio, et non cum dolore ; id enim est inutile vobis. 

Col. iii. 18. Uxores, submittite vos viris vestris, ut convenit in 
Domino. 

Vers. 1 9. Viri, diligite uxores, et ne estote amarulenti adversus eas. 

Eph. vi. 1. Liberi, obedite parentibus vestris in Domino ; id enim 
aequum est. 

Vers. 4. Et vos, patres, ne provocate liberos vestros ad iram, sed edu- 
cate eos in disciplina et admonitione Domini. 

Col. iii. 22. Servi, obedite dominis vestris in omnibus secundum 
carnem, non serviendo ad oculum, ut captantes gratiam hominum, sed 
cum simplicitate cordis, timentes Deum. 

Vers. 25. Ac quicquid facitis, agitote id ex animo, tanquam Domi- 
no, et non hominibus. 

Col. iv. 1. Domini, praestate jus et aequum servis vestris, scientes 
vos quoque habere dominum in coelis. 

Matth. vii. 12. Quaecunque igitur volueritis ut homines faciant vo- 
bis, vos facite etiam ita eis. 

Matth. xxiv. 15. Qui sustinuerit ad finem, is servabitur. 

Gal. vi. 9. Ne defetiscamur recte faciendo ; nam debito tempore 
metemus, si non fatigemur. 

Apoc. ii. 10. Esto fidelis usque ad mortem, et dabo tibi coronam vitae. 

V. De necessitate haec praestandi. 

Jo. iii. 36. Qui credit in Filium, habet vitam aeternam; qui vero 
non credit Filio, non videbit vitam, sed ira Dei manet super eum. 

Luc. xiii. 5. 5. Nisi resipiscatis, omnes similiter peribitis. 

Ezek. xxxiii. 11. Sic egovivam, inquit Dominus Jehova, nondelec- 
tor morte impii, sed ut impius recedat a via sua, et vivat. Recedite, 
recedite a malis viis vestris ; cur enim moreremini ? 

Ezek. xviii. 30. Resipiscite, et avertite vos ab omnibus peccatis ves- 
tris ; ita iniquitas non erit exitio vobis. 

V. 31. Abjicite a vobis omnes transgressiones vestras, quibus trans- 



30 Praecipua Capita 

estis ; et facite vobis cor novum, et spiritual novum ; nam quare 
moreremini ? 

Vers. 32. Non enim delector morte morientis, dicit Dominus Jeho- 
va ; convertite igitur vos, et vivite. 

Jo. iii. 3. Nisi quis denuo natus merit, non potest videre regnum Dei. 

Matth. xviii. 3. Nisi convertamini, et fiatis ut pueruli, non intrabitis 
in regnum coelorum. 

Luc. vi. 46. Quid vero vocatis me, Domine, Domine, et non facitis 
quae dico ? 

Heb. xii. 14. Sectamini pacem cum omnibus, et sanctimoniam, sine 
qua nemo videbit Dominum. 

1 Cor. vi. 9. An ignoratis injustos non esse possessuros regnum Dei ? 

Ne errate ; neque scortatores, nee idololatrae, nee adulteri, nee mol- 
les, nee paedicones. 

Vers. 10. Nee fures, nee avari, nee ebriosi, nee conviciatores, nee ra- 
paces, possidebunt regnum Dei. 

Heb. x. 38.— —Si quis se subtraxerit, non erit acceptus animo meo. 

VI. De modis obtinendi gratiam a Deo, viresque ad haec facienda . 

Luc. xi. 9. X etite, et dabitur vobis ; quaerite, et invenietis; pulsate, 
et aperietur vobis. 

Vers. 10. Quisquis enim petit, accipit ; et qui quaerit, invenit ; et 
aperietur pulsanti. 

V. 13. Si vos, qui maliestis, sciatis dare bona dona vestrisliberis,quan- 
to magis Pater vester coelestis dabit Sanctum Spiritum petentibus a se ? 

1 Pet. iii. 21. Cui rei eonsimilisfigura, nempe Baptismus, nuncquo- 
que servat nos, non detractio sordium corporis, sed stipulatio bonae 
conscientiae apud Deum, per resurrectionem Christi. 

1 Cor. xi. 23. Dominus Iesus, ea nocte qua proditus est, accepit panem : 

V. 24. Et gratiis actis, fregit, ac dixit, Accipite, comedite : hoc est 
meum corpus, quod frangitur pro vobis ; hoc facite, ad memoriam mei. 

Vers. 25. Itidem accepit poculum postquam coenasset, dicens, Hoc 
poculum est novum foedus per meum sanguinem ; hoc facite, quoties 
biberitis, ad memoriam mei. 

Vers. 26. Quoties enim ederitis panem hunc, et biberitis poculum 
hoc, annunciatis mortem Domini donee veniat. 

1 Cor. x. 16. Poculum benedictionis cui benedicimus, nonneestcom- 
munio sanguinis Christi ? Panis quern frangimus, nonne est commu- 
nio corporis Christi ? 

Psal. cxix. 9. Quomodo puer purificabit semitam suam ? observando 
earn secundum verbum tuum. 

V. 1 1. Recondidi sermonem tuum in animo meo, ut non peccem in te. 

V.59. Recogitavi meos mores, et con verti pedes meos ad tuatestimonia. 

V. 60. Festinavi, ac non cunctatus sum, observare mandata tua. 

Prov. iii. 5. Confide Jehovae toto corde, neve innitere tuae prudentiae. 

Vers. 6. Agnosce eumin omnibus viis tuis, et is diriget gressus tuos. 

VII. Dc quatuor ultimis, viz. de Morte et Judicio, Coelo et Inferno. 
Heb. ix. 27. Otatutum est omnibus hominibus ut semel moriantur, 

postea vero judicium. 

Joan. v. 28. Hora venit, in qua omnes qui sunt in monumentis suis, 
audient ejus vocem. 



Christianae Religionism 31 

Vers. 29. Et prodibunt ; qui fecerint bona, in resurrectionem vitae ; 
qui vero egerint mala, in resurrectionem condemnationis. 

2 Cor. v. 10. Comparendum est nobis omnibus ante tribunal Chris - 
ti, ut unusquisque accipiat ea quae fecerit in corpore, congruenter ad 
ea quae fecerit, sive bonum sive malum. 

Matth. xxv. 34. Tunc dicet Rex iis qui erunt ad dextram ejus, Ad- 
este, benedicti Patris mei, possidete regnum paratum vobis a jacto 
fundamento mundi. 

Vers. 41. Tunc dicet etiam iis qui erunt ad sinistram, Facessite a 
me, execrati, in aeternum ignem, paratum diabolo et angelis ejus. 

Vers. 46. Et isti abibunt in aeternum supplicium, justi vero in 
aeternam vitam. 

2 Thess. i. 7. Dominus Iesus revelabitur de coelo cum potentibus 
angelis suis. 

Vers. 8. In flammante igne, sumens ultionem de iis qui nesciunt 
Deum neque obediunt Evangelio Domini nostri Iesu Christi. 

Vers. 9. Qui dabunt poenas aeterno exitio, a facie Domini, et a 
gloria potentiae ejus : cum venerit, ut glorificetur in Sanctis suis, et 
ut sit admirandus omnibus credentibus. 



Two Prayers to be taught unto Children at School, with a 

Form of blessing God before and after Meat, 

Morning Prayer. 

God [ I praise thee for the creation of the world, and for the re- 
demption of mankind by the Lord Jesus, and for thy many favours 
bestowed on me. Thou didst safely take me from the womb, and 
hast ever since cared for me : Thou hast, by thy mercy, caused me to 
be born within thy church, where I was early given to thee in bap- 
tism : Thou hast afforded me the means of grace, and called me to 
the hope of glory. 

But, O most merciful Father ! I, a poor and miserable sinner, con- 
ceived in sin, and brought forth in iniquity, have gone astray from thee. 

1 have not cared to know thee, and to do thy will ; but have done my 
own will, and followed my foolish and sinful inclinations, and do there- 
fore deserve thy wrath and curse. O Lord, have mercy upon me, — 
turn me unto thee, and grant me repentance and forgiveness of all my 
sins, for Jesus' sake. Let it from henceforth become my chiefest 
care to please thee, and to seek thy kingdom and righteousness. Work 
in me a true faith, a lively hope, and a fervent charity ; make me 
humble, meek, patient, sober, and just, and loving to all men ; sub- 
missive and obedient to them that are over me, and well content and 
thankful in every condition of life. Grant that I may daily grow in 
knowing, loving, fearing, and obeying thee. Create in me a clean 
heart, O God ! and renew a right spirit within me. 

I thank thee, O Lord ! for thy care of me this night ; watch over 
me this day ; keep me mindful that I am always in thy sight, that 1 
may be in thy fear all the daylong ; and giant that through the whole 
course of my life I may be holy and harmless in all manner of conver- 
sation, that when this short and frail life is at an end, I may be made par- 
taker of everlasting life, through the merits of Jesus Christ, our Lord; 
in whose name and words I pray, Our Father which art in heaven, &c. 



Evening Prayer. 

JVJLost gracious God ! what shall I render unto thee for thy many 
and great benefits bestowed upon me ! Though I have been an un- 
dutiful and disobedient servant unto thee, thou hast continued thy 
care and kindness for me ever since I was born, and hast preserved me 
this day : Let me never forget thy goodness, but grant that thereby I 
may be led to repentance and amendment of life. Preserve me from 
every thing that is displeasing to thee, O Lord ! keep me from cursing, 
swearing, and lying, — from pride, stubbornness, and idleness. Work 
in me an utter dislike of all uncleanness, of gluttony, and drunken- 
ness, of all malice and envy, of strife and contention, of deceit and 
covetousness. Give me grace to deny all ungodliness and worldly 
lusts, and to live godly, righteously, and soberly, in this present world. 
Cause me to understand and consider the laws and life of Jesus, that 
I may do his will, and follow his steps. Let never the cares of this 
life, nor the love of riches, nor evil company, nor the corrupt custom 
of the world, withdraw me from the obedience of thy laws ; but 
strengthen and establish me by thy Holy Spirit, that I may live and 
die thy faithful servant. 

O Lord ! send thy gospel through the world : pour out plenteously 
the spirit of truth, holiness, and peace, on all people : bless the church 
and kingdom : preserve the king, and all the royal family : guide our 
judges and magistrates : sanctify and assist the ministers of the gospel : 
visit all that are in trouble, and sanctify their afflictions to them : be 
gracious to all my kindred, friends, and neighbours : and bless and 
forgive all mine enemies. 

Lord ! watch over me this night, and keep me ever mindful that I 
am shortly to die and come to judgement, that I may without delay 
turn to thee, and pass the time of my sojourning here in thy fear. 
Good Lord ! hear me, and grant these my desires, and what else thou 
knowest to be needful for me, for the sake of Jesus ; in whose name 
and words I pray, Our Father, &c. 



Grace before Meat. 

O LoRn, be merciful unto us, and pardon our sins : sanctify these 
thy good benefits, that we, by the sober and thankful use of them, may 
be enabled for thy service, through Jesus Christ our Lord and Saviour. 
Amen. 

Grace after Meat. 

W e thank and praise thee, O Lord, the giver of all good ! who hast 
at this time fed our bodies : stir up in us a greater care for our souls; 
and grant that our short lives, which are so carefully sustained by thy 
bounty, may be spent in doing thy will. Lead us safely through this 
vain and sinful world, in which we are pilgrims and strangers ; and at 
length bring us to everlasting rest, through Jesus Christ. Amen. 

FINIS. 



PARSING INDEX 



RUDDIMAN'S RULES OF SYNTAX. 



PARSING INDEX 

TO 

RUDDIMAN'S RULES OF SYNTAX. 



ADVERTISEMENT. 

With a view to assist young beginners in making out the 
Parts of Speech, the following Index has been drawn up, 
on a plan which, from its conciseness and simplicity, (it is 
hoped) will meet with the approbation of those who have 
the care of directing their studies. All the Words, as they 
occur in Ruddiman's Examples, are arranged in alphabeti- 
cal order, with their designation immediately after, in a dif- 
ferent character; and the other principal parts connected 
with them are subjoined within parentheses. To guard a- 
gainst improper pronunciation, the most important of the 
quantities are accurately marked. 

W. D. 

Ediru March Is*, 1824. 



Abbreviations used in this Index. 



abl. ablative 

ace. accusative 

act. active 

adj. adjective 

adv. adverb 

com. common gender 

compar. comparative de- 
gree 

conj. conjunction 

dat. dative 

dep. deponent verb 

f. ox fern, feminine gen- 
der 

Jut. future tense 

gen. genitive, or gender 



ger. gerund 
imper. imperative mood 
imperf. imperfect tense 
impers. impersonal verb 
indecl. indeclinable 
ind. indicative mood 
inf. infinitive mood 
inter, interjection 
irr. irregular verb 
m. or masc. masculine 

gender 
n. or neut. neuter 
nom. nominitive 
part, participle 
pass, passive 



perf. perfect tense 

plup. pluperfect tense 

pi. or plur. plural num- 
ber 

prep, preposition 

pres. present tense 

pron. pronoun 

sing, singular number 

subj. subjunctive mood 

sub. substantive 

sup. supine 

superh superlative de- 
gree 

v. verb. 

voc. vocative 



The figures after substantives denote the declension, and after verbs, the 
over a vowel, here and throughout the book, shows that the 



person. 
The mark 



syllable is long ; u that it is short ; and a that two syllables are contracted 
into one. — This last also distinguishes the ablative singular of the first de- 
clension, and the genitive singular of the fourth. 



Index to Ruddimaris Syntax, 



A 

A, and ab, prep. 
Aberdonia, abl. sing, (Aberdo- 
nia, 3d) suh.f, 1. 
Abfuit, 3. sing, per/, ind. (Ab- 

sum, fui, esse) v. irr. 
Abiit, for abivit, 3. sing, perf. 

ind, (Abeo, Ivi, itum, ire) v. 

irr, 
Absolvunt, 3. plur, pres. ind. 

(Absolvo, vi, lutum, vere) v. 

act. 
Absterret, 3. sing. pr. ind. (Abs- 

terreo, ui, itum, ere) v. ad. 
Abundat, 3. sing. pres. ind. (Ab- 

undo, avi, atum, are) v. n, 
Abutitur, 3. sing, pres. ind, (Ab- 

utor, usus, uti) v. dep* 
Accuser, 1. sing, pres. ind. (atus, 

ari) v. pass. 
Ad, prep. 
Adeamus, 1. plur. pres. subj. 

(Adeo, Ivi, itum, Ire) v. irr, 
iEstimo, 1. sing. pres. ind. (avi, 

atum, are) v, act. 
Agmina, ace. plur. (Agmen, mis) 

sub. neut. 3. 
Aliquis, nom. sing, masc, (qua, 

quod or quid) pron. 
Alta, nom. sing. fern. (Altus, a, 

um) adj. 
Ama, 2. sing. pres. imper. (Amo, 

avi, atum, are) v, act. 
Amabilis, nom. sing. m. or/, (e) 

adj. 
Amandus, nom. sing. masc. fut. 

part, (a, um — Amor, atus, ari) 

v. pass. 
Amans, nom, sing. m. ox f, pres, 

part, (antis — Amo, avi, atum, 

are) v, act. 



Ambulando, ger. abl, from 
Ambiilo, 1. sing, pres, ind. (avi, 

atum, are) v. act. 
Amor, nom. sing, (oris^ sub. m. 

3. 
Arcessitus, nom. sing. m. perf. 

part, (a, um — Arcessor, Itus, 

i) v. pass. 
Arguit, 3. sing. pres. ind. (Ar- 

guo, ui, utum, uere) v. act, 
Arma, ace. plur. (orum) sub. n. 

2, wants sing. 
Asse, abl. sing, and 
Assibus, abl. plur. (As, assis) sub. 

masc. 3. 
Athenas, ace. plur. (Athenae, a- 

rum) sub.f. I. wants sing. 
Attentus, nom. sing. masc. (a, 

um) adj. 
Audiendum, ger. ace. (Audio, 

Ivi, Itum, Ire) v. act. 
Augetur, 3. sing. pres. ind. (Au- 

geor, auctus, augeri) v. pass. 
Avidus, nom. sing. masc. (a, um) 

adj. 
Auro, abl. sing. (Aurum, i) sub, 

neut. 2. 

B 

Bello, k cfo£. sing. (Bellum, i) sub, 

neut. 2. 
Bene, adv. 
Beneficiorum, gen. plur. (Bene* 

ficium, i) sub, n. 2. 
Bonus, nom, sing. masc. (a, um^ 

adj. 



Calamo, abl. sing. (Calamus, i) 

sub. masc. 2. 
Captus, nom. sing. masc. perf. 



Index to Ruddimaris Syntax. 



part, (a, um — Capior, captus, 

capi) v. pass. 
Carens, nom. sing. masc. or fern. 

pres. part, (entis) and 
Caret, 3. sing, pres, ind. (Careo, 

ui, ltum, and cassum, ere) v. 

neut. 
Carthagine, all. sing. (Carthago, 

inis) sub.f. 3. 
Casta, nom. sing. f. (Castus, a, 

um) adj. 
Charta, nom. sing, (ae) sub.f. 1. 
Cicero, nom. sing, (orris) sub. m. 

3. 
Civium, gen. plur. (Civis, is) sub. 

com. 3. 
Colimus, 1. plur. pres. ind. (Co- 
lo, colui, cultum, colere) v. 

act. 
Columna, nom. sing, (as) sub.f. I. 
Comparatur, 3. sing. pres. ind. 

(Comparor, atus, ari) v. pass. 

from 
Comparo, 1 . si?ig. pres. ind. (avi, 

atum, are) v. act. 
Condemno, 1. si?ig. pres. ind. 

(avi, atum, are) v. act. 
Constitit, 3. sing.perf. ind. (Con- 

sto, stiti, stitum, and statum, 

stare) v. neut. * 

Contentus, nom. sing. masc. (a, 

um) adj. 
Convenienter, adv. 
Cui, dat. sing. (Qui, quae, quod) 

pron. 
Cuique, dat. sing. (Quisque, quae- 

que, quodque) pron. 
Cujus, gen. sing. (Qui, quee, quod) 

pron. 
Culpa, abl. sing. (Culpa, a?) sub. 

fern. 1. 



Cupidus, nom. sing. masc. (a, um) 

adj. from 
Cupio, 1 . sing. pres. ind. (Ivi, I- 

tum, ere) v. act. Hence 
Cupit, 3. sing. pres. ind. act. 
Cutem, ace. sing. (Cutis, is) sub. 

f.3. 



Deambulatum, sup. (Deambtilo, 

avi, atum are) v. act. 
Decet, 3. sing. pres. ind. (uit, 

ere) v. impers. 
Defessus, nom. sing. masc. perf. 

part, (a, um — Defetiscor, fes- 

sus, ci) v. dep. 
Dei, gen. sing. (Deus, i) sub. m. 

2. 
Delectat, 3. sing. pres. ind. (a- 

vit, are) v. impers. 
Deliciae, nom. pi. (arum) sub. f. 

1. wants sing. 
Demosthenes, nom. sing, (is) sub. 

masc. 3. 
Deum, ace. sing, from 
Deus, nom. sing, (i) sub. m. 2. 
Dicere, pres. inf. (Dico, dixi, 

dictum, dicere) v. act. Hence 
Dictu, sup. 
Diei, gen. sing, and 
Dies, ace. pi. (Dies, ei) sub. m. 

or/. 5. 
Dignus, nom. sing. masc. (a, um) 

adj. 
Discam, ] . sing. pres. subj. and 
Discendi, ger. gen. and 
Discere, pres. inf. (Disco, didi- 

ci, — , discere) v. act. 
Discessit, 3. sing. perf. ind. (Dis- 

cedo, cessi, cessum, cedere) 

v. neuU 



Index to Ruddiman's Syntax. 



Discipulus, nom. sing, (i) sub. m. 

2. 
Discurro, 1. sing.pres. ind. (cur- 

ri, cursum, currere) v. neui. 
Dispersae, nom. pi. f. perf. part. 

(Dispersus, a, um — Disper- 

gor, sus, gi) v. pass. 
Distat, 3. sing. pres. ind. (Disto, 

stiti, — , stare) v. neut. 
Divitiis, abl. plur. (Divitias, a- 

rum) sub.f. 1. wants sing. 
Docendum, ger. ace. (Doceo,ui, 

turn, ere) v. act. Hence 
Doceor, 1. sing. pres. ind. (tus, 

eri) v. pass, and 
Docet, 3. sing. pres. ind. act. 
Docti, nom. plur. masc. and 
Doctum, ace. sing. masc. from 
Doctus, nom. sing. masc. perf. 

part, (a, um — Doceor, tus, 

eri) v. pass. Hence 
Doctissimus, nom. sing. masc. (a, 

um) adj. superl. 
Docuit, 3. sing. perf. ind. (Do- 

ceo, ui, turn, ere) v. act. 
Domi, gen. sing, and 
Domo, abl. sing, and 
Domum, ace. si?ig. (Domus, us, 

or i) sub.f. 2. and 4. 
Diici, dat. sing. (Dux, diicis) sub. 

com. 3. 
Ducit, 3. sing. pres. ind. (Du- 

co, duxi, ductum, ducere) v. 

act. 
Dulce, nom. sing. neut. (Dulcis, 

e) adj. Hence 
Dulcior, nom. sing. masc. or /. 

(us) adj. compar. 
Duobus, abl. plur. masc. (Duo, 

x, o) adj. 



E, and ex, prep. 
Edinburgo, abl. sing, from 
Edinburgum, nom. sing, (i) sub. 

neut. 2. 
Ego, no m. sing. masc. or fern, 

(mei) pron. 
Egregie, adv. 

Elegantissime, adv. superl. 
Emi, 1. sing. perf. ind. (Emo, 

emi, ptum, ere) v. act. 
Eo, 1. sing. pres. ind. (Ivi, ltum, 

Ire) v. irr. 
Eripuit, 3. sing. perf. ind. (Eri- 

pio, ripui, reptum, ripere) v. 

act. 
Esse, pres. inf. and 
Est, 3. sing.pres. ind. (Sum, fui, 

esse) v. irr. 
Et, conj. 
Excolendo, ger. abl. (Excolo, 

colui, cultum, ere) v. act. 
Exeamus, 1. pi. subj. (Exeo, Ivi, 

itum, Ire) v. irr. 
Expedit, 3. sing. pres. ind. (Ivit, 

Ire) v. wipers. 



Fabiilam, ace. sing. (Fabiila, ae) 

sub.f. 1. 
Faciebat, 3. sing, imperf. ind. 

(Facio, feci, factum, facere) 

v. act. 
Facile, nom. sing. neut. (Facilis, 

e) adj. 
Facta, nom. pi. neut. perf. part, 

(Factus, a, um — Fio, factus, 

fieri) v. pass. irr. 
Fastlgia, ace. plur. (Fastlgium, i) 

sub. neut. 2. 



Index to Ruddimaris Syntax. 



Fa vet, 3. sing. pres. ind. (Faveo, 

vi, fautura, vere) v. act. 
Fecit, 3. sing. perf. ind. (Facio, 

feci, factum, facere) v. act. 
Fidelis, nom. sing. masc. (e) adj. 
Flfa, abl. sing, and 
Flfam, ace. sing. (Flfa, ae) sub. f. 

1. 
Filius, nom. sing, (i) sub. m. 2. 
Foemina, nom. sing, (ae) sub.f. 1. 
Formose, voc. sing. masc. (For- 

mosus, a, um) adj. 
Fortibus, dat. plur. masc. or fern. 

(Fortis, e) adj. Hence 
Fortiter, adv. 

Fortuna, nom. sing, (ae) sub.f. 1. 
Fratrum, gen. plur. (Frater, tris) 

sub. m. 3. 
Fraude, abl. sing, and 
Fraudis, gen. si?ig. (Fraus, audis) 

sub.f. 3. 
Fretus, nom. sing. masc. (a, um) 

adj. 
Fronde, abl. sing. (Frons, fron- 

dis) sub. fern. 3. 
Fiigiunt, 3. plur. pres. ind. (Fu- 

gio, fugi, fugitum, fugere) v. 

neut. 
Furti, gen, sing. (Furtum, i) sub. 

neut. 2. 



Gaudeo, 1. sing. pres. ind. (gavi- 

sus, gaudere) v. neut. pass. 
Gentium, gen. plur. (Gens, gen- 

tis) sub. fern. 3. 
Glascua, nom. sing, (ae) sub.f 1, 
Gloriae, gen. sing. (Gloria, ae) 

sub.f. 1. 
Grammaticam, ace. sing. (Gram- 

matlca, ae) sub.f. l 



H 

Habitat, 3. sing. pres. ind. (Ha- 

bito, avi, atum, are) v. neut. 
Hei, interj. 
Heu, interj. 
Hie, nom. sing. masc. (haec, hoc) 

pron. 
Homero, dat. sing. (Homerus, i) 

sub. m. 2. 
Homicidii, gen. sing. (Homicldi- 

um, i) sub. neut. 2. 
Honora, 2. sing. pres. imper.lfio- 

noro, avi, atum, are) v. act. 
Honore, abl. sing. (Honor, oris) 

sub. 7n. 3. 
Hora, abl. sing. (Hora, ae) sub. 



Id, ace. sing. neut. (Is. ea, id) 

pron. 
Ignarus, nom. sing. masc. (a, um) 

adj. 
Ilia, nom. sing, fern, and 
Illius, gen. sing, and 
Ilium, ace. sing. masc. (Ille, ilia, 

illud) pron. 
In, prep. 
Incedit, 3. sing. pres. ind. (In- 

cedo, cessi, cessum, cedere) 

v. neut. 
Incidit, 3. sing. perf. ind. (Inci- 

do, cidi, casum, cidere) v. n. 
Indole, abl. sing, and 
Indolis, gen. sing. (Indoles, is) 

sub.f. 3. 
Inertiae, gen. sing. (Inertia, ae) 

sub.f. 1. 
Injuriae, gen. sing, and 
Injuriam, ace. sing. (Injuria, ae) 

sub.f. 1. 



Index to Ruddiniaris Syntax. 



Inops, nom. sing. com. gen. (6- 

pis) adj. 
InsTpientis, gen. sing. masc. or/. 

(Insipiens, entis) adj. 
Inter, prep. 
Interest, 3. sing. pres. ind. (fuit, 

esse) v. impers. 
Ira, abl. sing, and 
Irae, gen. sing. (Ira, ae) sub. f em. 

1. 
Iter, nom. and ace. sing, and 
Itinere, abl. sing. (Iter, itineris) 

sub. n. 3. 



Joannes, nom. sing, (is) sub. m. 3. 



Laodicea, nom. sing, (ae) sub.f. 1. 
Lectionem, ace. sing, and 
Lectionis, gen. sing. (Lectio, 5- 

nis) sub.f. 3. 
Legendi, ger. gen. and 
Legit, 3. sing. pres. ind. from 
Lego, 1. sing. pres. ind. (legi, 

ctum, gere) v. act. 
Lex, nom. sing, (legis) sub.f. 3. 
Liber, nom. sing, and 
Libri, nom. plur. and 
Libris, abl. plur. and 
Librum, ace. sing. (Liber, libri) 

Sub. 111. 2. 

Licet, 3. si7ig. pres. ind. (licitum, 

licere) v. impers. 
Littore, abl. sing. (Littus, oris) 

sub. n. 3. 
Londini, gen. sing. (Londinum, 

i) sub. neut. 2." 
Loquitur, 3. sing. pres. ind. (Lo- 

quor, cutus, and quutus, qui) 

v. dep. 



Ludemus, 1. plur.fut. ind. (Lu- 
do, si, sum, dere) v. act. 

M 

Magni, gen. sing. neut. (Magnus, 

a, um) adj. 
Manet, 3. sing. pres. ind. and 
Mansit, 3. sing. perf. ind. (Ma- 

neo, raansi, mansum, manere) 

v. neut. 
Matrem, ace. sing, and 
Matris, gen. sing. (Mater, tris) 

sub.f. 3. 
Me, ace. sing. (Ego, mei) pron. 
Mea, ace. plur. neut. (Meus, a, 

um) pron. 
Meipsum,acc. sing. m. (Ego, mei, 

and Ipse, a, um) pron. 
Melle, abl. sing. (Mel, mellis) 

sub. neut. 3. 
Mlmor, nom. sing. com. gen. (o- 

ris) adj. 
Memoria, nom. sing, (ae) sub. 

fern. 1. 
MensTbus, abl. plur. (Mensis, is) 

sub. masc. 3. 
Metu, abl. sing. (Metus, vis) sub. 

masc. 4. 
Mihi, dat. sing. (Ego, mei) pron. 
Militum, gen. plur. (Miles, itis) 

sub. m. 3. 
Millia, ace. pi. neut. (Mille, in- 

declinable in sing. plur. Mil- 
lia, um) adj. 
Miserere, 2. sing. pres. imperat. 

(Misereor, sertus, sereri) v. 

dep. 
Miseret, 3. sing. pres. ind. (uit, 

ere) v. impers. 
Miserum,flcc. sing. masc. (Miser, 

a, um) adj. 



Index to Ruddimans Syntax. 



Moerria, ace. plur. (Mcenia, urn, 
and orum) sub. n. 2. and 3. 
wants sing. 

More, all. sing. (Mos, moris) sub. 
masc. 3. 

Moriendum, ger. nom. (Morior, 
mortuus, mori, and moriri) v. 
dep. 

Morti, dat. sing. (Mors, mortis) 
sub. f. S. 

Mortuus, nom. sing. masc. perf. 
part, (a, um — Morior, mor- 
tuus, mori, and moriri) v. dep. 

Multum, nom. sing. neut. (Mul- 
tus, a, um) adj. 

Munere, abl. sing. (Munus, eris) 
sub. neut. 3. 

Musarum, gen. plur. (Musa, ae) 
sub.f. 1. 

N 
Narras, 2. sing. pres. bid. (Nar- 

ro, avi, atum, are) v. act. 
Naturae, gen. and dat. sing. (Na- 

tura, ae) sub.f. 1. 
Natus, nom. sing. m. perf. part. 

(a^ um — Nascor, natus, nasci) 

v. dep. 
Nee, conj. 
Negligenti, dat. sing. masc. or/. 

(Negligens, entis) adj. 
Nemini, dat. sing. (Nemo, ivants 

gen. dat. ini, wants plur.) sub. 

com. 3. 
Noceas, 2. sing. pres. subj. (No- 

ceo, ui, ltum, ere) v. act. 
Non, adv. 
Nostrum, gen. plur. (Ego, mei) 

pron. 
Nullus, nom. sing. masc. (a, um, 

gen. ius, dat. i) adj. 



O, interj. 

Obliviscor, 1. sing. pres. ind. (ob- 

lltus, oblivisci) v. dep. 
Octavus,wo?w. sing. masc. (a, um) 

adj. 
Oculis, abl. plur. (Ociilus,i) sub. 

masc. 2. 
Omni, abl. sing. fern, and 
Omnia, nom. plur. neut. and 
Omnibus, dat. plur. masc. or /. 

and 
Omnium, gen. plur. masc. or /. 

(Omnis, e) adj. 
Opere, abl. sing. (Opus, eris) sub. 

neut. 3. 
Orator, nom. sing. (Orator, oris) 

sub t m. 3. 
Oriente, abl. sing. masc. pres. 

part. (Oriens, entis) and 
Ortus, nom. sing. masc. perf. 

part, (a, um — Orior, ortus, 

orlri) v. dep. 



Pace, abl. sing, and 

Pacem, ace. sing, and 

Pacis, gen. sing. (Pax, pacis) sub. 

fern. 3. 
Palleo, 1. sing. pres. ind. (ui, 

— , ere) v. neuU 
Parentes, ace. plur. (Parens, en- 
tis) sub. com. 3. 
Parere, pres. inf. (Pareo, ui, i- 

tum, ere) v. neut. 
Parlsiis, abl. plur. (Parish*, orum) 

sub. m. 2. wants sing. 
Parvo, abl. sing. neut. (Parvus, 

a, um) adj. 
Passuum, gen. plur. (Passus, us) 

sub. masc. 4. 



Index to Ruddinian's Syntax. 



Patre, abl. sing, and 

Patrem, ace. sing, and 

Patri, dat. sing. (Pater, tris) sub. 

m. 3. 
Patriam, ace. sing. (Patria, ae) 

sub.f. 1. 
Patris, gen. sing. (Pater, tris) 

sub. m. 3. 
Pauca, ace. plur. neut. and 
Paucos, ace. plur. masc. (Pauci, 

ae, a) adj. wants sing. 
Pax, nom. sing, (pacis) sub.f. 3. 
Peccando, ger. abl. and 
Peccare, pres. inf. (Pecco, avi, 

atum, are) v. act. 
Peccati, gen. sing. (Peccatum, i) 

sub. neut. 2. 
Pecuniae, gen. sing. (Pecunia, ae) 

sub.f. 1. 
Pedes, ace. plur. (Pes, pedis) 

sub. m. 3, 
Per, prep. 
Peracto, abl. sing. neut. perf. 

part. (Peractus, a, urn — Per- 

agor, actus, agi) v. pass. 
Perniciosus, nom. sing. masc. (a, 

um) adj. 
Petenda, abl. sing. fern, and 
Petenda, nom. sing. fern, and 
Petendae, gen. sing. fern, and 
Petendam, ace. sing. fern. fut. 

part. (Petendus, a, um — Pe- 

tor, petltus, peti) v. pass. 

Hence also 
Petendi, ger. gen. and 
Petendum, ger. nom. and accus. 

and 
Petendo, ger. abl. (Peto, ivi, I- 

tum, ere) v. act. 
Petrum, ace. sing, from 
Petrus, nom. sing, (i) sub. m. 2. | 



Philosophorum, gen. plur. (Phi 

losophus, i) sub. m. 2. 
Plenus, nom. sing. masc. (a, um) 

adj. 
Pluris, gen. sing. (Plus, pluris) 

adj. neut. in sing, plural, plu- 

res, a, and ia. 
Poena, nom. sing, (ae) sub.f. 1. 
Pcenitet, 3. sing. pres. ind. (uit, 

ere) v. impers. 
Pomum, nom. sing, (i) sub. n. 2, 
Posce, 2. sing. pres. imper. (Pos- 

co, poposci, — , poscere) v. 

act. 
Praeceptor, nom. sing, (oris) sub. 

m. 3. 
Praeditus, nom. sing. masc. (a, 

um) adj. 
Praestantior, nom. sing. masc. or 

fern, (us) adj. compar. 
Pridie, adv. 

Proba, abl. sing. fern, and 
Probae, gen. sing. fern. (Probus, 

a, um) adj. 
Procurare, pres. inf. (Procuro, 

avi, atum, are) v. act. 
Profectus, nom. sing. masc. perf. 

part, (a, um — Proficiseor, fec- 

tus, ficisci) v. dep. 
Promptus, nom. sing. masc. (a, 

um) adj. 
Prudentia, abl. sing. (Prudentia, 

ae) sub.f. I. Hence 
Prudentiae, gen. sing. 
Puer, nom. sing, (eri) sub. masc. 

2. 
Pugnans, nom. sing. masc. or /. 

pres. part, (antis Pugno, 

avi, atum, are) v. act. 
Punire, pres. inf. (Punio, Ivi, I- 

tum, Ire) v. act. 



Index to Ruddiniaris Syntax. 



Putaram, contracted for putave- 
ram, 1. sing.plusq. ind. (Puto, 
avi, atum, are) v. act. 

Q 

Quanti, gen. sing. neut. (Quan- 

tus, a, um) adj. 
Quem, ace. sing, masc.from 
Qui, wo??*, sing. masc. (quae, quod) 

pron. 
Quid, nom. sing. neut. from 
Quis, nom. sing. masc. (qua? 

quod, or quid) pron. 
Quo, abl. sing, masc, (Qui, quae, 

quod) pron. 

R 
Rationis, gen. sing. (Ratio, o- 

nis) sub.f. 3. 
Rebelles, ace. plur. masc. or fern. 

(Rebellis, e) adj. 
Recordor, 1. sing. pres. ind. (si- 
tus, ari) v. dep. 
Recte, adv. 
Reciibo, 1. sing. pres. ind. (ui, 

ltum, are) v. neut. 
Rediit, contracted for redivit, 

3. sing. perf. hid. (Redeo, Ivi, 

itum, ire) v. irr. 
Refert, S. sing. pres. ind. (tulit, 

latum, ferre) v. wipers. 
Regibus, abl. plur. (Rex, regis) 

sub. masc. 3. 
Regina, nom. sing, (as) sub. f. 1. 
Regis, gen. sing. (Rex, regis) 

sub. m. 3. 
Rei, gen. sing. (Res, re'i) sub.f. 5. 
Re'ipublicae, gen. sing. (Res, rei, 

sub.f. 5. and Publica, as, adj. 

fern, of Publicus, a, um) sub. 

f. 1. and 5. 



Rerum, gen. plur. (Ties, rei) sub. 

f.5. 
Reverere, 2. smg. pres. imperat. 

(Revereor, veritus, vereri) v. 

dep. 
Revertitur, S. sing. pres. ind. 

(Revertor, versus, verti) v. 

dep. 
Rixari, pres. inf. (Rixor, atus, 

ari) v. dep. 
Romae, gen. sing. (Roma, as) sub. 

f. 1. 
Romanorum, gen. plur. masc. 

(Romanus, a, um) adj. 
Rure, ail. sing, and 
Ruri, abl. sing, and 
Rus, ace. sing. (Rus, runs) sub. 

neut. 3. 



Saperes, 2. sing, imperf. subj. 

and 
Sapientum, gen. plur. masc. adj. 

from pres. part. (Sapiens, en- 
ds) and 
Sapit, 3. sing. pres. ind. (Sapio, 

Ivi, and ui, — , ere) v. neut. 
Satagit, 3. sing. pres. ind. (Sata- 

go, egi, — , agere) v. neut. 
Satis, adv. 
Schola, abl. sing. (Schola, ae) sub. 

f. 1. Hence 
Scholam, ace. sing. 
Scio, 1. sing. pres. ind. (Ivi, I- 

tum, Ire) v. act. 
Scotia, abl. sing. (Scotia, ae) sub. 

f. 1. Hence 
Scotia m, ace. sing. 
Scribendo, ger. dat. and 
Scribis, 2. sing. pres. ind. and 
Scribit, 3. sing. pres. ind. from 



Index to Ruddimaris Syntax, 



Scribo, 1. sing. pres. ind. (scrip- 
si, scriptum, scribere) v. act. 

Sedens, nom. sing. masc. or fern, 
pres. part, (entis) from 

Sedeo, 1. sing. pres. ind. (sedi, 
sessum, sedere) v. neut. 

Senior, nom. sing. masc. (oris) 
adj. compar. from Sen ex, se- 
nis, com. 

Servus, nom. sing, (i) sub. m. 2. 

Sex, adj. indecl. 

Sexaginta, adj. indecl. 

Similis, nom. sing. m. (e) adj. 

Sole, abl. sing. (Sol, solis) sub. 
m. 3. 

Studere, pres. inf. and 

Studuit, 3. sing. perf. ind. (Stu- 
deo, ui, — , ere) v. act. 

Suae, gen. sing. fern, and 

Suarum, gen. plur. fern. (Suus, 
a, um) pron. 

Sub, prep. 

Subter, prep. 

Sum, 1. sing. pres. ind. (fui, es- 
se) v. irr. 

Summa, abl. sing. fern, and 

Summae, gen. sing. fern. (Sum- 
mus, a, um) adj. 

Sunt, 3. plur. pres. ind. (Sum, 
fui, esse) v. irr. 

Suo, abl. sing. masc. (Suus, a, 
um) pron. 

Super, prep. 

Surdo, dat. sing. masc. (Surdus, 
a, um) adj. 

Suum, ace. sing. neut. (Suus, a, 
um) pron. 



Tasdet, 3. sing. pres. ind. (uit, 
^er-taesum, ere) v. impers. 



Talento, abl. sing. (Talentum, i) 
sub. neut. 2. 

Te, ace. sing. (Tu, tui) pron. 

Tecti, gen. sing. (Tectum, i) sub. 
n. 2. 

Tempus, nom. sing, (oris) sub. n. 
3. 

Tendit, 3. sing. pres. ind. (Ten- 
do, tetendi, sum and turn, de- 
re) v. act. 

Tenebrae, nom. plur. (arum) sub. 
f. wants sing. 

Tertia, abl. sing. fern. (Tertius, a, 
um) adj. 

Transit,/or transiit, and this for 
translvit, 3. sing. perf. ind. 
(Transeo, Ivi, itum, ire) v. 
irr. 

Tribuito, 2. sing. pres. imperat. 
(Tribuo, ui, utum, uere) v. act. 

Triginta, adj. indecl. 

Tu, nom. sing, and 

Tui, gen. sing. (Tu, tui, tibi) 
pron. 

Tuorum, gen. plur. masc. and 

Tuum, nom. sing. neut. (Tuus, a, 
um) pron. 

U 

Ubique, adv. 

Umbra, abl. sing. (Umbra, ae) sub. 

Una, nom. sing. fern, and 
Unlus, gen. sing. (Unus, a, um, 

gen. lus, dat. i) adj. 
Urbe, abl. sing, and 
Urbem, ace. sing, from 
Urbs, nom. sing, (urbis) sub.f. 3, 
Ut, conj. 
Utilis, nom. sing. masc. or /. (e) 

adj. 



Utlnam, conj. 

Utitur, 3. sing, pres. ind. (Utor, 
usus, uti) v. dep. 



Index to Ruddimans Syntax. -2 iJZ/¥ ' $ 
plur. vires, ium, ibus) sub. f. 
Viridi, abl. sing. fern. (Viridis, e) 



Vae, interj. 

Valere, pres. inf. (Valeo, ui, 1- 

tum, ere) v. neut. 
Vel, conj. 
Venae, nom. plur. (Vena, ae) sub. 

Vendidit, 3. sing. per/, ind. (Ven- 

do, didi, ditum, dere) v. act. 
Veniam, ace sing. (Venia, ae) sub. 

fern. 1. 
Venit, 3. sing. per/, ind. (Venio, 

veni, turn, Ire) v. act. 
Verborum, gen. plur. (Verbum, 

i) sub. n. 2. 
Vir, nom. sing, (viri) sub. in. 2. 
Virgilium, ace. sing, from 
Virgilius, nom. sii2g. (i) sub. m. 2. 
Viribus, abl, plur, (Vis, vim, vi, 



Virtute, abl. sitig. and 
Virtutem, ace. sing. (Virtus, li- 
tis) sub.f. 3. 
Virum, ace. sing. (Vir, viri) sub. 

masc. 2, 
Vitae, gen. sing. (Vita, ae) sub.f. 

1. 
Vivendum, ger. nom. and 
Vivere, pres. inf. and 
Vivimus, 1. plur. pres. ind. and 
Vivit, 3. sing. pres. ind. and 
Vixit, 3. sing. perf. ind.. (Vivo, 

vixi, victum, vivere) v. neut. 

3. 
Vobis, dat. plur. (Tu, tui) pron. 
Vocaris, 2. sing. pres. ind. (Vo- 

cor, atus, ari) v. pass. 
Voluptati, dat. sing. (Voluptas> 

atis) sub.f. 1. 



FINIS. 



Edinburgh : 
Du "an Stevenson, Printer. 



^-Oj^ 



Deacidified using the Bookkeeper process. 
Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide 
Treatment Date: July 2006 

PreservationTeehnologies 

A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESERVATION 

1 1 1 Tnomson Park Drive 
Cranberry Township, PA 16066 
(724) 779-21 1 1 



